Home

9 - Nissan

1. 9 9 Filter Air cleaner housing filter 05 8 17 Changing engine oil and filter 8 9 Flashers See hazard warning flasher switch 2 35 Flat Te econteecegenacecensceuieensseaserectcsasawecee 6 2 Flat TOWING s2 202208eeeGeesecrusont ace emaneqacececs 9 23 Flexible SCAUNG corinudececesceamecetesceconieceesecs 1 14 Floor mat cleaning sc cececcc chameesececnsercccesentes 7 5 Fluid Brake TWIG iceonrbesen dete ennnen 8 12 Capacities and recommended fuel lubricantS nce stsscenrucenseresienawetvateassis 9 2 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT Muid she Shee E connec coeceenae seat 8 11 Engine coolant lt iceg22i ss0 icdeceeasigeietsezenn 8 7 Engine Olleccricsissonssesecanceeasasiszsiecersant 8 8 Power steering fluid isses 8 11 Window washer fluid nsss sesse esseen 8 13 FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD CNANCGl cerasadeneacctedshie ENSE ERER 4 56 FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD DIAV EL recane naen a O EES 4 61 FM AM SAT radio with Compact Disc CD player aee E 4 67 Fog light swith esseiscnes rken nere 2 35 Front manual seat adjustment s asasen 1 3 Front passenger air bag and status light 1 53 Front power seat adjustment ssseseeresresns 1 4 Front seat Front seat adjustment 1 3 Front seat active head restraint 1 10 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants lt i ssasectiieecerianesdastangweniee 9 2 F el GC
2. Foreword Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control This manual was prepared to help you under stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of driving pleasure Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov ering your vehicle The NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your ve hicle Additionally a separate Customer Care Lemon Law Booklet U S only will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle as well as clarify your rights under your state s lemon law Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best When you require any service or have any questions we will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to us READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY Before driving your vehicle read your Owner s Manual carefully This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements assist ing you in the safe operation of your vehicle WARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMA TION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs
3. J Bluetooth gracenote aN Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and lisenced to Visteon Corpora tion and Clarion Co Ltd Gracenote is a registered tra demark of Gracenote Inc The Gracenote logo and logo type and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Grace note XM Radio requires a subscrip tion sold separately It is not available in Alaska Hawaii or Guam For more information visit www xmradio com 2010 NISSAN MOTOR CO LTD All rights reserved No part of this Owner s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photo copying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co Ltd NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs However if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll free number For U S customers 1 800 NISSAN 1 1 800 647 7261 For Canadian customers 1 800 387 0122 The Co
4. AUTO button Turns on off the automatic operation mode when rear air conditioning system is on MODE button Changes the rear air flow TEMP buttons Adjust the rear temperature 4 42 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER WARNING The air conditioner contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid personal injury any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with the proper equipment The air conditioner system in your vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind This refrigerant will not harm the earth s ozone layer However it may contribute in a small part to global warming Special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your vehicle s air con ditioner Using improper refrigerants or lubri cants will cause severe damage to the air conditioner system See AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS in the 9 Technical and consumer information section A NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioner system IN CABIN MICROFILTER Models without Advanced Climate Control System ACCS The climate control system is equipped with an in cabin microfilter which collects dirt pollen dust etc To make sure the air conditioner heats defogs and ventilates efficiently repla
5. WARNING e The heater and air conditioner oper ate only when the engine is running e Never leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in the vehicle Pets should not be left alone either They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and inadver tently become involved in a serious accident and injure themselves On SAA3676 SAA3055 hot sunny days temperatures in a Side Rear closed vehicle could quickly become SIDE VENTILATORS REAR VENTILATORS high enough to cause severe or Open close the ventilators by moving the control If the center knob is moved fully to the left or possibly fatal injuries to people or dial 4 to either direction right the ventilators will be closed animals J This symbol indicates that the ventila Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by z ate a patie a EN me tors are closed Moving the side control moving the center knob up down left right Ieee Ces aS imay Calee to this direction will close the ventila until the desired position is achieved interior air to become stale and the tors windows to fog up This symbol indicates that the ventila e Do not adjust the heating and al tors are open Moving the side control conditioning controls while driving to this direction will open the ventila so that full attention may be given tors to vehicle operation Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by moving the center knob 2 up dow
6. 1 53 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag system 5 1 56 Roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag system 5 1 56 Air bag warning labelS incserccccssusesetesicageess 1 59 Air bag warning light asiasi 1 59 2 14 Air cleaner housing filter uias 8 17 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation 0000 4 29 Air conditioner Service s 4 42 Air conditioner specification label 9 10 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations 4 42 9 6 In cabin microfilter crc tccwee sewer ced ceoeenen 4 43 Alarm How to stop alarm see vehicle security system 00cceeeeees 2 27 Alcohol drugs and driving a c lt cscsbervecnceresseasees 5 7 PUNVCWN Aaxs 254 ob uiwn cieeevnneves teks EAEAN 4 98 Anti lock Braking System ABS 005 5 29 Anti lock braking system ABS warning light 2 10 Appearance care Exterior appearance Care eeeee eee 7 2 Interior appearance Care 6 ce eee eee 7 4 ArMreStS 42 24224csceuahs Smee eetessteaiacdeeeseuedase 1 13 Audible reminders cescesezyeerwseceeodiereeivetiass 2 16 Audio operation precautions 05 4 43 Audio SYSIOM sicescccsneidesaiecsaededs sesteaae ees 4 43 Steering wheel audio controls 5 4 96 Auto CIOS UNG accae sacs aeseces acceseseermiescces 3 28 Autolight system vs eves srses de iccedecatemeseseee 2 32 Automat
7. side or side is selected 10 Key Search DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD CD DA Select the 10 Key Search key and push the ENTER button to open the number entry screen Input the number you want to search for and select the OK key with the multi function controller Then push the ENTER button The specified Title Chapter or Group Track will be played Angle DVD VIDEO If the DVD contains different angles such as moving images the current image angle can be switched to another one Select the Angle key and push the ENTER button When the side or side is selected the angle will change Angle Mark DVD VIDEO When this item is turned on an angle mark will be shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene can be seen from a different angle Menu Skip DVD VIDEO DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly when the Menu Skip key is turned on Note that some discs may not be played directly even if this item is turned on CM Skip DVD VIDEO models with navi gation system The number of seconds for CM Skip can be set to 15 30 or 60 seconds DRC DVD VIDEO DRC Dynamic Range Compression allows tuning of the dynamic range of sound recorded in the Dolby Digital format DVD Language DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD Select the DVD Language key and push the ENTER button to open the number entry screen Input the number corre
8. 2 Move the selector lever to the R Reverse position 3 Choose the right or left outside mirror by operating the outside mirror control switch 4 The outside mirror surfaces move down ward When one of the following conditions has occurred the outside mirror surfaces will return to their original positions e The selector lever is moved to any position other than R Reverse The outside mirror control switch is set to the center position The ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position SPA1829 SIC4448 Foldable outside mirrors VANITY MIRROR Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the To use the front vanity mirror pull down the sun rear of the vehicle visor and pull up the cover Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 35 COMMUNICATION MIRROR if so equipped The communication mirror can be used to view the second or third row seat inside the vehicle To use the communication mirror push the lid To store the mirror push it in until it latches 3 36 Pre driving checks and adjustments AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER if so equipped The automatic drive positioner system has two features e Entry exit function e Memory storage ENTRY EXIT FUNCTION This system is designed so that the driver s seat will automatically move when the selector lever is in the P Park position This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver s seat more easily The driver s seat will
9. 9 9 Emission control information label sae 9 10 Tire and loading information label 5 9 10 Air conditioner specification label 2 5 9 10 Installing front license plate c eeeeeeee ee 9 11 Vehicle loading information 0 s eeeeeeeeee eee 9 12 Vehicle load capacity eeeeeeeee eee eee es 9 12 Securing the 1080 scan ertrnapseaaneceeasennaeensnsaatie 9 14 Loading UPS cetseeeh esemmscuen sete TAERAA EE 9 14 Measurement of weightS cceeeeeeeee eee 9 15 TOWING a talei cee eee ce apres EAER 9 15 Maximum load IMIS tcscccnsicrccteadelanteeessseacnaddes 9 16 Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight GVW maximum Gross Axle Weight GAW 05 9 17 Towing load specification eeeeeeeee eee es 9 19 TOG Sy oases aetna a Ea 9 20 Prat TOW IG ss ceneeee nde ced catenrssauemecenectenieesewedeasees 9 23 Uniform tire quality grading eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 24 Treadwear accu sccencscenncntnoccecataetiursessaeisonaates 9 24 Traction AA A B and C ccc cece cece ce eceeeeee anes 9 24 Temperature A B and C cccceee eee eeee tees 9 24 Emission control system warranty eeeeeeee eee 9 25 Reporting safety defects s sssssssssesererrrrrrrrrrn 9 25 Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M test 9 26 Event Data Recorders EDR cccceceeeeeeeeeeees 9 97 Owner s Manual Service Manual order information 9
10. A The system acknowledges the command and an nounces the next set of available commands Say Add phone B The system acknowl edges the command and asks you to initiate pairing from the phone handset The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if more than one phone is connected and the name sounds too much like a name already used the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Making a call by entering a phone number Main menu Call A Phone Number speak digits Dial Push the amp button on steering wheel A tone will sound digit prefix and the last 4 digits For example 555 121 3354 can be said as five five five as the 1st group then one two one as the 2nd group and three three five four as the 3rd group For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters say Special Dial ing See How to say numbers earlier in this section for more information 5 When you have finished speaking the phone number the system repeats it back and announces the available commands 6 Say Dial The system acknowledges the command and makes the call For additional command options see LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS later in this section Receiving a call 2 Say Call A The system acknowledges When h he
11. After the ignition switch is pushed ON this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off Low tire pressure warning If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the warning light will illuminate A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates you should stop and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is active as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated For additional information see TIRE PRES SURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS in the 5 Starting and driving section and TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS in the 6 In case of emergency section TPMS malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is pushed ON The light will remain on after the 1 minute Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE w
12. If the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not working use a tire pressure gauge 5 6 Starting and driving AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL OVER WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident Be alert and drive defensively at all times Obey all traffic regulations Avoid excessive speed high speed cornering or sudden steering maneuvers because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle As with any vehicle a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to rollover particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways Be attentive at all times and avoid driving when tired Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs including prescription or over the counter drugs which may cause drowsiness Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the SEAT BELTS in the 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual and also instruct your passengers to do SO Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers In a rollover crash an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt OFF ROAD RECOVERY If the right side or left side wheels leave the road surface maintain control of the vehicle by followin
13. Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum If the engine stops you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal However greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and the stopping distance will be longer Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving This will cause overheating of the brakes wearing out the brake and pads faster and reduce gas mileage To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control WARNING e While driving on a slippery surface be careful when braking accelerat ing or downshifting Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident e If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the brakes will not work Braking will be harder Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water the brakes may get wet As a result your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking To dry brakes drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat up the brakes Do this until the brakes return to normal Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the
14. key Bluetooth If this setting is turned off the connection between the Bluetooth devices and the in vehicle Bluetooth module will be canceled Connect Bluetooth Connects to the Bluetooth device See Con necting procedure earlier in this section Up to 5 devices can be registered Connected Devices Registered devices are shown on the list Select a Bluetooth device from the list the following options will be available e Select Select Select to connect the selected device to the vehicle If there is a different device currently connected the selected device will replace the current device e Edit Rename the selected Bluetooth device using the keypad displayed on the screen See HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN models with navigation system earlier in this section e Delete Delete the selected Bluetooth device Edit Bluetooth Info Change the name broadcasted by this system over Bluetooth Change the PIN code that is entered when connecting a hands free device to this system Replace Connected Phone Replace the Bluetooth connection with a connected Bluetooth cellular phone For details about Hands Free Phone System see BLUE Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 83 TOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM models with navigation system later in this section SAA3600 iPod PLAYER OPERATION if so equipped Connecti
15. 3 16 inch tire equipped models 4 18 inch tire equipped models 9 8 Technical and consumer information WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to travel in another coun try you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle s engine Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline Therefore avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country state province or district it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country state province or district therefore vehicle specifications may differ When any vehicle is to be taken into another country state province or district and registered its modifications transpor tation and registration are the responsi bility of the user NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION ST10431 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN PLATE The vehicle identification number plate is at tached as shown This number is the identifica tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER chassis number
16. ALWAYS observe posted speed lim its and never drive too fast for conditions ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems Pre teen children should be seated in the rear seat ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle ALWAYS review this Owner s Man ual for important safety information MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified Modification could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental regulations In addition damage or performance problems result ing from modification may not be covered under NISSAN warranties WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all options available on this model Therefore you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle All information specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design at any time without notice IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual They are used in the following ways WARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury To avoid or re
17. Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake When parking be sure the parking brake is fully engaged Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle They could release the parking brake and cause an acci dent SPA2331 To apply Fully depress the parking brake pedal To release l 2 Firmly apply the foot brake Depress the parking brake pedal 4 and the parking brake will be released Before driving be sure the brake warning light goes out BLIND SPOT WARNING BSW SYSTEM if so equipped The Blind Spot Warning BSW system can help alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes SSD1178 The BSW system uses radar sensors A installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles beside your vehicle in an adjacent lane SSD1030 Detection zone The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft 3 0 m behind the rear bumper and approximately 10 ft 3 0 m sideways The BSW system operates above approximately 20 MPH 32 km h If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone the BSW indicator light illuminates If the driver then activates the turn signal a chime will sound twice and the BSW indicator light will flash
18. M4A m4a or AA3 aa3 cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications Check if the finalization processes such as session close and disc close has been performed for the disc Check if the disc or USB device is copyright protected Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty It tak latively ti f l l l ee ee peiora If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device some time may be required before the music starts playing the music starts playing The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not Music cuts off or skips opal be match the specifications Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data Move immediately to the next song If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like MP3 or when play is prohibited by copyright when playing protection the player will skip to the next song The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which
19. NOTE If it is too noisy to use the phone it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized 4 If optional words of the command have been omitted then the command should be tried with these in place The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in 1 Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored See BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE the phonebook PHONE SYSTEM models with navigation system earlier in this section page 4 110 2 Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 157 MEMO 4 158 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Exhaust gas carbon monoxide c0ceseeeeeees 5 2 Three way CALAN SU tects crseainstina aecewendasauuiarnseaeaeae 5 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 Avoiding collision and rollover se eeeee ee 5 6 Ot road TECOVElY isnccvessendsaatcusecineaiesstensaseccare 5 6 Rapid air pressure lOSSsavcosenscdedanicsatiathoreesindases 5 7 Drinking alcohol drugs and driving seesese 5 7 Push button ignition switch ccccecee cece eee ee eee 5 8 Intelligent Key system 5 8 Push button ignition switch operation 5 9 Push button ignition switch positions 5 10 Emergency engine sh
20. No v 10 USB button if so equipped 11 BACK button S o oe oO hf SAA3610 4 102 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 12 SOUND button 13 Keypad Some models do not have a Commercial Skip button See PLAYING A DVD later in this section for the function of each buttons Remote controller Headphones SAA0978 SAA361 1 Remote controller and headphones bat tery replacement Replace the battery as follows 1 Open the lid The lid is easy to open if a flat head screwdriver etc is used 2 Replace both batteries with new ones e Size AA remote control e Size AAA headphones Make sure that the and ends on the batteries match the markings in side the compartment 3 Close the lid securely If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement close the lid securely e f you will not be using the remote control for long periods of time remove the batteries e Replacement of the batteries is needed when the remote control only functions at extremely close distances to the MES or not at all e Be careful not to touch the battery terminal e An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal e When changing batteries do not let dust or oil get on the remote control and headphones FCC Notice For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Ru
21. Starting and driving 5 17 WARNING The BSW system is not a replace ment for proper driving procedure and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects When changing lanes always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes Never rely solely on the BSW system The BSW system may not provide a warning for vehicles that pass through the detection zone quickly 5 18 Starting and driving BSW indicator light D BSW system warning light SSD1184 SSD1029 SSD1179 BSW switch BSW SYSTEM OPERATION If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone the BSW indicator light in the outside mirror will illuminate in the direction of the detected vehicle If the turn signal is then activated the BSW indicator light flashes and a chime sounds twice The indicator light con tinues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone The BSW indicator lights illuminate for a few seconds when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position The brightness of the BSW indicator lights is adjusted automatically depending on the bright ness of the ambient light A chime sounds if the radar sensors have already detected vehicles when the driver activates the turn signal If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal then only the BSW indicator light flashes and no chime
22. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors or lift gate when the system is armed It is not however a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs Instruments and controls 2 25 The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period Never leave your Intelligent Key s in the vehicle and always lock it when un attended Be aware of your surroundings and park in secure well lit areas whenever possible Many devices offering additional protection such as component locks identification markers and tracking systems are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features 2 26 Instruments and controls SIC2045 How to arm the vehicle security system 1 Close all windows The system can be armed even if the windows are open Push the ignition switch to the OFF position Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle Close all doors and lift gate Lock all doors The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key door handle request switch power door lock switch or mechani
23. WHEELS AND TIRES in the 8 Maintenance and do it your self section of this manual The Anti lock Braking System ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding By preventing each wheel from locking the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure but do not pump the brakes The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles 5 30 Starting and driving WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal Doing so may result in increased stopping dis tances Self test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors electric pumps hydraulic solenoids and a computer The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction If the computer senses a malfunction it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel The brake syst
24. e When radar blockage is detected the BSW system will be turned off automatically a beep will sound and the BSW system warning light orange will blink The BSW system is not available until the condition no longer exists The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water mist or fog The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors Action to take When the above condition no longer exists the BSW system will resume automatically If the warning light orange continues to blink have the BSW system checked by a NISSAN dealer BSW MALFUNCTION When the BSW system malfunctions they will be turned off automatically a beep will sound and the BSW system warning light orange will illuminate Action to take Stop the vehicle in a safe location turn the engine off and restart the engine If the warning light orange continues to illuminate have the BSW system checked by a NISSAN dealer SSD1178 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The two radar sensor units A for the BSW system are located near the rear bumper Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean Do not attach stickers including transparent mate rial install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors Consult a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due
25. in the 5 Starting and driving section Cruise indicator light Cruise main switch indicator This light illuminates when the cruise control main switch is pushed The light turns off when the main switch is pushed again When the cruise main switch indicator light illuminates the cruise control system is operational See CRUISE CONTROL in the 5 Starting and driving section Cruise malfunction If the cruise indicator light blinks while the engine is running it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer See CRUISE CONTROL in the 5 Starting and driving section passenacr OFF p Front passenger air bag status light The front passenger air bag status light mes will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used For front passenger air bag status light opera tion see NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM front seats in the 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual High beam indicator light This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected Low beam indicator light The light comes on when the front park side marker tail and license plate lights are on Malfunction Indicator Light MIL If the malfunction indicator light comes on stea
26. mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indi cator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replace ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or Starting and driving 5 3 alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly Additional information The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display when the low tire pressur
27. 1 Folder Repeat gt 1 Track Repeat gt Normal RDM RANDOM RDM When the RDM button is pushed while a CD is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows CD Normal lt 1 Disc Random CD with compressed audio files Normal 1 Disc Random 1 Folder Random Normal amp cp EJECT When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the CD loaded the CD will be ejected When this button is pushed while the CD is being played the CD will be ejected If the CD comes out and is not removed it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it AUX Auxiliary input AUX IN jack The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape CD player MP3 player or laptop computer AUX Auxiliary button When the AUX button is pushed with no device plugged into the jack the audio system does not change to the AUX mode NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini plug cable when connecting your music device to the audio system Music may not play properly when a monaural cable is used SAA3599 USB memory operation Audio main operation The USB outlet connector is in the front center console box Connect a USB memory as illustrated Then switch to the USB memory mode automatically If the system has been turned off while the USB memory was playing pushing the ON OFF VOL control knob w
28. 13 14 ON OFF button for air conditioning system AUTO button m f fan speed control buttons A C air conditioner ON OFF button REAR control button DUAL zone control ON OFF button AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER Automatic operation AUTO The AUTO mode may be used year round as the system automatically controls constant tempera ture air flow distribution and fan speed after the desired temperature is set manually To turn the heater and air conditioner on or off push the ON OFF button Cooling and dehumidified heating 1 Push the AUTO button The AUTO indicator light will illuminate If the A C indicator light does not illuminate push the A C button The A C indicator light will illuminate Push the temperature control buttons A and w drivers side to set the desired temperature e The temperature can be set within the range of 60 to 90 F 18 to 32 C e When DUAL does not appear on the display Pushing the AUTO button changes both the driver s and front passenger s side temperature Pushing the DUAL button allows the user to independently change the front passenger s side temperature with the passenger side temperature control buttons amp and w DUAL will appear on the display To cancel the separate temperature setting push the DUAL button DUAL will disappea
29. DVD or USB memory When the image is not properly embedded in the file or device the image will not be displayed Phone settings models with navigation system For details of the Phone settings see BLUE TOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM models with navigation system later in this section Bluetooth settings models with navi gation system For details of the Bluetooth settings see BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYS TEM models with navigation system later in this section or BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO models with navigation system later in this section Settings Volume amp Beeps Use volume knob to adjust during playback SAA2554 Example Volume and Beeps settings models with navigation system The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button selecting the Volume amp Beeps key Audio Volume To increase or decrease the audio volume select the Audio Volume and adjust it with the multi function controller You can also adjust the audio volume by turning the VOLUME control knob Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 13 Guidance Volume To adjust the guidance voice volume select the Guidance Volume and adjust it with the multi function controller You can also adjust the guidance voice volume by turning the VOLUME control knob while voice guidance is being announced Ringtone I
30. Display ON OFF button cece rciesstenivis cess 4 7 Instrument panel ute nncucenenseeeberreystanncss 2 34 Bulb check instrument panel 5 2 10 Bulb replacement 2ssesencctenanedacseasieerenecee 8 24 C Cabin air filter nnana aeea 4 43 Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 9 2 Car phone or CB adi02 se sccreusecss ceive stecess 4 110 Cargo floor bOX 14 i2secesestasseecededlieeeereetiass 2 45 Cargo lighis sted idectsterecsveensceuiideesetennies 2 56 Catalytic converter Three way catalyst 5 2 CD CF USB memory care and cleaning 4 95 Center multi function control panel 4 2 Child fEStralNS 2sce doe cevecactuyeeemotsaeuestiseor 1 27 Booster seats scones pe eereesadeseciveriews es 1 43 LATCH system sorxdeitercertauectet eda 1 29 Precautions on child restraints 1 28 Top tether strap ved eee ease ee See es 1 31 ChildtSalety 22cs csccrjcestnedescsgecusensse nea ccees 1 26 Chimes Audible reminders 0 ceeeeee eens 2 16 Seat belt warning light and chime 2 14 Circuit breaker Fusible link 0ceeeeeees 8 20 Cleaning exterior and interior 05 7 2 7 4 Coat hooks eea ee ae eee te eee eee 2 48 Cockpit soso ee creeaous renee a aN EEr EEES 2 2 Cold weather driving sic evenes sexeevests scree es 5 32 Communication IMINGl xi cctencteramerenscnaroucies 3 36 Compact Disc CD player See audio system cc
31. MIL to illuminate If the gt light illuminates because the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The light should turn off after a few driving trips If the lt gt light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN deal er For additional information see Malfunction Indicator Light MIL in the 2 Instruments and controls section The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will appear if the fuel filler cap is not properly tightened Failure to tight en the fuel filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning ap pears may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to illuminate SPA2826 To remove the fuel filler cap 1 Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise 4 to remove 2 Hang the tether of the cap on the hook 3 while refueling To install the fuel filler cap 1 Insert the fuel filler cap straight into the fuel filler tube 2 Turn the fuel filler cap clockwise 2 until a single click is heard TILT TELESCOPIC STEERING WARNING e Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an acci dent e Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort The driver s air bag inflates with great force If you are unrest rained leaning forward sitting side ways o
32. SAA2487 Models with navigation system Settings gt Clock Le On screen Clock 3 Clock Format QC i2h D0 Daylight Saving Time JE Time Zone Ff Clock Adjust Display clock in top right corner of display SAA3675 Models without navigation system Clock settings The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button and selecting the Clock key The clock settings display cannot be operated while driving Stop the vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake before setting the clock On screen Clock When this item is turned on a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen This clock will indicate the time almost exactly because it Is always adjusted by the GPS system models with navigation system Clock Format 24h When this item is turned on the 24 hour clock is displayed When this item is not turned on the 12 hour clock is displayed Offset hour min models with naviga tion system Clock Adjust models without navigation system Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per hour or per minute Daylight Saving Time Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time application Time Zone Choose the time zone from the following Models with navigation system e Pacific e Mountain e Central e Eastern e Atlantic e Newfoundland e Hawaii e Alaska Models without navigation system e Eniwetok Kwajalein e Midway Island
33. approx 1 5 ft 0 5 m e Yellow line approx 3 ft 1 m e Green line 3 approx 7 ft 2 m e Green line 4 approx 10 ft 3 m Vehicle width guide lines 6 Indicate the vehicle width when backing up Predicted course lines 6 Indicate the predicted course when backing up The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the selector lever is in the R Reverse position and the steering wheel is turned The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neutral position HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES WARNING e Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly e Use the displayed lines as a refer ence The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants fuel level vehicle position road condi tion and road grade e If the tires are replaced with differ ent sized tires the predicted course line may be displayed incorrectly Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 23 e Ona snow covered or slippery road course there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line e The displayed lines will appear slightly off to the right because the rear view camera is not installed in the rear center of the vehicle e The distance guide line and the vehicle width line shou
34. as this may cause Neutral position serious and expensive damage to e When towing a CVT model with the 6 14 Incase of emergency v SCE097 1 Rear tie down and recovery hook VEHICLE RECOVERY freeing a stuck vehicle WARNING Stand clear of a stuck vehicle Do not spin your tires at high speed This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged Pulling a stuck vehicle If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery Always follow the manufacturer s instructions for the recovery device Front Using a suitable tool wrapped with a cloth remove the cover from the bumper Securely install the vehicle recovery hook stored in the cargo area as illustrated Make sure that the hook is properly secured in the original place after use CAUTION e Tow chains or cables must be at tached only to the main structural members of the vehicle or the recovery hook Otherwise the vehi cle body will be damaged e Never tow a vehicle using the vehi cle tie downs or recovery hooks e Always pull the cable straight out from the front of the vehicle Never pull on the vehicle at an angle e Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the In case of emergency 6 15 suspension steering brake or cool ing systems Pulling devices such as
35. because this will damage the three way cat alyst e Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system compo nents and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war ranty Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC speci fications where it is available Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this spe cification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWEFC specifications Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor mulated gasolines These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol MTBE and metha nol with or without advertising their presence NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined If in doubt ask your service station manager If you use oxygenate blend gasoline please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and or fuel system damage e The fuel should be unleaded a
36. e When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather put the vehicle in the P Park position e When launching a boat don t allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper e Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out When towing a trailer the transmission fluid should be changed more frequently For additional information see the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle such as a motor home CAUTION e Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage e Whenever flat towing your vehicle always tow forward never back ward e DO NOT tow any continuously vari able transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground flat towing Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication e For emergency towing procedures refer to TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN in the 6 In case of Technical and consumer information 9 23 emergency section of this manual Continuously Variable Transmission CVT To tow a vehicle equipped with a Continuously Variable Transmission CVT an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST
37. ey Fader r JQQU00000000C_F J H Speed Sensitive vo O CO j COo OA SAA3562 Models without navigation system SAA2740 Models without navigation system 4 12 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Audio settings The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button and selecting the Audio key Bass Treble Balance Fade To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound balance select the Bass Treble Balance or Fade key and adjust it with the multi function controller These items can also be adjusted by pushing and turning the AUDIO knob Speed Sensitive Vol The audio system s volume is increased with the vehicle speed Select the Speed Sensitive Vol and adjust the effect level with the multi function controller The Speed Sensitive Volume function is turned off when the level is set to OFF Increasing the value will cause the volume to increase faster with vehicle speed DivX Registration Code models with navigation system The registration code for a device that is used to download DivX files will be displayed on the screen If a disc is loaded or a USB memory is connected to the audio system this function will not be activated Display Album Cover Art models with navigation system When this item is turned on the album cover image is displayed when playing iPod or MP3 music files through a CD
38. factory trained technicians working at a NISSAN dealer Genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals can also be purchased In the USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals contact 1 800 450 9491 www nissan techinfo com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals contact 1 800 247 5321 In Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner s Manual for this model year and prior contact a NISSAN dealer For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1 800 387 0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you Technical and consumer information 9 27 IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION Unfortunately accidents do occur In this unlikely event there is some important informa tion you should know Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non genuine collision parts in order to cut costs among other reasons Insist on the use of Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to NISSAN s original exacting specifications if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value the solution is simple Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Colli sion Parts NISSAN does not warrant non NISSAN parts nor does NISSAN s warranty apply to damage caused by a non genuine part Using Genuine
39. l Voice Recognition International Call Y l 3 011811112223333 j O Say the entire number or groups of J Change Number numbers Say 0 9 pound star or encaliGontale ental Canale plus Please continue or say Dial SAA2541 SAA2542 5 Speak 011811112223333 6 Speak Dial 7 System makes a call to 011 81 111 222 3333 Note Any digit input format is available in the International Number input process 4 146 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION AL TERNATE COMMAND MODE The following section is applicable when Alter nate Command Mode is activated When Alternate Command Mode is activated an expanded list of commands can be used after pressing the TALK amp switch In this mode available commands are not fully shown on the display or prompted Review the expanded command list when this mode is active See examples of Alternate Command Mode screens Please note that in this mode the recognition success rate may be affected as the number of available commands and ways of speaking each command are increased To improve the recog nition success rate try using the Speaker Adaptation Function available in that mode See Speaker adaptation function for Alternate Command Mode later in this section Other wise it is recommended that Alternate Com mand Mode be turned OFF and Standard Mode be used for the best r
40. passenger air bag status light is illuminated indicating that the air bag is OFF it could be that the person is a small adult or is not sitting on the seat properly If a child restraint must be used in the front seat the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used If the passenger air bag status light is not illuminated indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly If the passen ger air bag status light is still not illuminated reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat If the passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat in which case the air bag is OFF Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool However until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status However if the seat becomes
41. 1 CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage 2 6 Instruments and controls SIC4634 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem perature The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone 4 shown in the illustration The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions CAUTION If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature near the hot H end of the normal range reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature If gauge is over the normal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and let the engine idle If the engine is overheated continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine See IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS in the 6 In case of emergency section for immediate action required COMPASS if so equipped convenient preferably before the gauge reaches O There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 The indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the driver s side of the vehicle CAUTION e If the vehicle runs out of fuel the C5 malfunction indicator light MIL may come on Refuel as soon as possible After a few driving trips the l
42. 1 39 SSS0651 Forward facing step 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted SSS0652 Forward facing step 5 5 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt 1 40 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 6 SSS0653 Forward facing step 6 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack SSS0641 Forward facing step 8 8 After attaching the child restraint test it before you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types o
43. 134a 7 Air conditioning system lubricants _ NISSAN A C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent Window washer fluid 1 1 4 gal 1 gal 4 5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Antifreeze or equivalent 1 For additional information see ENGINE OIL in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section for changing engine oil 2 For additional information see ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION later in this section 3 NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil available at a NISSAN dealer 4 Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 will damage the CVT which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty 5 Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E PSF will prevent the power steering system from operating properly 6 Available in mainland U S A through a NISSAN dealer 7 For additional information see VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION later in this section for air conditioner specification label 9 2 Technical and consumer information FUEL RECOMMENDATION Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index number Research octane number 91 CAUTION e Using a fuel other than that speci fied could adversely affect the emis sion control system and may also affect warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used
44. 15 Folding the 3rd row seats Before folding the 3rd row seats Secure the seat belts on the seat belt hooks on the side wall See Seat belt hooks later in this section Disconnect and stow the center seat belt and tongue into the retractor base See 3rd row center seat belt later in this section Always reconnect the center seat belt when the seat is returned to the upright position Remove drink containers from the rear cup holder Manual folding Pull the strap on the seatback A or on the back side of the seatback and fold the seatback SS1151 Power folding if so equipped Push the front side of the switch A located on the right side or left side of the cargo area The corresponding 3rd row seatback will be folded down automatically Push and hold the rear side of the switch The 3rd row seatback will be returned auto matically A beep sounds and the rear seatback will rise up while holding the switch A beep sounds when the seatback is fully returned in position 1 16 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SEAT BELTS PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to
45. 27 In the event of a collision iacsissscovescearsaceseisieans 9 28 CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities The actual refill capacities may be a little different When refilling follow the procedure instructed in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity Capacity Approximate Recommended specifications US measure Imp measure Liter Ful s S C CSCCOC OOQall 16 6 8 gal S75 6 _ _ See FUEL RECOMMENDATION later in this section O O O O oO 7 Engine oil 1 Drain and refill vvitioil Ter change AUEN 4 qt 4 6 e Engine oil with API Certification Mark 2 3 Without oil filter change 4 1 2 qt 3 3 4 qt 4 3 Viscosity SAE SW 3072 13 Cooling system With reservoir 12 qt 10 qt 11 3 Pre diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent Reservoir 3 4 qt 5 8 qt 0 75 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 4 2 22222 Power steering fluid PSF Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the 8 Genuine NISSAN E PSF or equivalent 5 Brake fluid Maintenance and do it yourself section Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid 6 or equivalent DOT 3 Multi purpose grease NLGI No 2 Lithium soap base Air conditioning system refrigerant HFC 134a R
46. 4 140 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems e General Commands Command Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen Cancels Voice Recognition Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 141 Voice command examples To use the NISSAN Voice Recognition function speaking one command Is sometimes sufficient but at other times it is necessary to speak two or more commands As examples some additional basic operations by voice commands are described here For navigation system commands see the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual SAA1859 Example 1 Placing a call to the phone number 800 662 6200 1 Push the TALK y amp switch located on the steering wheel 4 142 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 3 Voice Recognition Phone Y Navigation 2 Information 4 Audio 4 Help To exit hold the TALK switch SAA2535 The system announces Would you like to access Phone Navigation Information Audio or Help Speak Phone Voice Recognition Phone Yil Voice Recognition Dial Number Yil Voice Recognition Dial Number Y l Boo Gee GL y y J Dial Number J Dial Number T Change Number Fe J ehicle Phonebook y Handset Phonebook Please say the entire number or groups f Manual Controls 4 Call Histo of numbers S
47. 800 662 6200 Dial one eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero Note 1 For the best voice recognition phone dialing results say phone numbers as single digits Note 2 You cannot say 555 6000 as five five five six thousands Note 3 When speaking a house number speak the number 0 as zero If the letter o Oh is included in the house number it will not be recognized as the number O zero even if you speak oh instead of zero Please speak Zero for the number O zero oh for the letter o oh 4 154 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings Voice recognition Speaker Adaptation Alternate Command Mode Minimize Voice Feedback System learning mode for recognition improvement stem learning mode for recognition improvement SAA2549 Speaker adaptation function for Alter nate Command Mode The voice recognition system has a function to learn the user s voice for better voice recognition performance The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons Having the system learn the user s voice 1 Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel and select the Others key 2 Select the Voice Recognition key 3 Select the Speaker Adaptation key 7 Select a voice command and then push the ENTER button Settings Speaker Adaptation Settings
48. Audio or Help speed is automatically lowered so that your commands can be recognized more easily 3 After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to 23y speak a command Selecting the Practice key will start the practice mode See Let s Practice earlier in this section 4 Continue to follow the voice menu prompts and speak after the tone sounds until your desired operation is completed Selecting the Help key can display the Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 137 detailed information of the each command Operating tips Say a command after the tone Commands that are available are always shown on the display and spoken through voice menu prompts Commands other than those that are displayed are not accepted Please follow the prompts given by the system If the command is not recognized the system announces Please say again Repeat the command in a clear voice Push the BACK button once to return to the previous screen To exit the voice recognition system push and hold the TALK switch The message Voice canceled will be an nounced To skip the voice guidance function and give the command immediately press the TALK ws switch to interrupt the system Re member to speak after the tone If you want to adjust the volume of the system feedback push the volume control buttons or on the steering swit
49. Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle A This may cause improper windshield washer operation If the nozzle is clogged remove any objects with a needle or small pin Be careful not to damage the nozzle REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or replacement is required BRAKES If the brakes do not operate properly have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer SELF ADJUSTING BRAKES Your vehicle is equipped with self adjusting brakes The disc type brakes self adjust every time the brake pedal is applied WARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING The disc brake pads have audible wear warn ings When a brake pad requires replacement it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion This scraping sound will first occur only when the brake pedal is depressed After more wear of the brake pad the sound will always be heard even if the brake pedal is not depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear warning sound is heard Under some driving or climate conditions occasional brake squeak squeal or other noise may be heard Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed For additional information see the maintena
50. Box Settings le pT SAA2725 Models without navigation system Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 89 There are some options available by selecting the Menu key on the screen during playback Select one of the following options that are displayed on the screen if necessary Now Playing models with navigation sys tem Displays a track list to choose a preferred track for playback Music Library There are some options available during play back Select one of the following options that are displayed on the screen if necessary e Artists Play tracks by an artist whose music is currently being played The artists are sorted in alphabetical order e Albums Play tracks in each album The albums are sorted in alphabetical order e All Songs Play tracks from all recorded tracks The tracks are sorted in alphabetical order e Genres Play tracks by a selected genre My Playlists models with navigation sys tem Displays the Playlist and edits the Playlist if necessary Select the Edit key The following items are available e Add Current Songs Add a current track to the Playlist e Add Songs by Album Displays a list of albums in alphabetical order Selecting an album displays all of the tracks in the album Select tracks from the list to add to the Playlist e Add Songs by Artist Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order Selecting an
51. CD into the slot with the label side facing up The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing After loading the CD the number of tracks on 4 62 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems the CD and the play time will appear on the display If the radio is already operating it will auto matically turn off and the CD will play If the system has been turned off while the CD was playing pushing the ON OFF button will start the CD Do not use 3 1 in 8 cm discs PLAY When the CD button is pushed with the system off and the CD loaded the system will turn on and the CD will start to play When the CD button is pushed with the CD loaded and the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the CD will start to play ry Next Previous Track and Fast Forward Rewind When the or button is pushed for more than 1 5 seconds while the CD is being played the CD will play while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the CD will return to normal play speed When the i or s button is pushed for less than 1 5 seconds while the CD is being played the next track or the beginning of the current track on the CD will be played REPEAT RPT When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is played the play pattern can be changed as follows CD Normal lt 1 Track Repeat CD with compressed audio files Normal
52. E EE 0 9 PHO 8 E E E TE E EE T 0 4 VQ35DE engine aisscinecdnioanomsciinnvancnusnaatiane iritan 0 9 Passenger compartment ssessessseessreerreerreereeenne 0 5 Warning and indicator lights ccceeeeeeeeeeeene es 0 10 CGOCRD I eser E E 0 6 SEATS SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS 0 2 Adjustable headrest Page 1 11 Child restraint anchor points for top tether strap child restraint P 1 31 Seat belt for 3rd row center seat belt P 1 19 Seat belts P 1 16 Illustrated table of contents SS10820 Roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bags P 1 46 Head Restraints P 1 8 Front seat Active Head Restraints P 1 10 Supplemental front impact air bags P 1 46 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system P 1 29 3rd row seats P 1 7 Child restraints P 1 27 Armrest 2nd row seat P 1 13 2nd row seats P 1 6 Child restraints P 1 27 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bags P 1 46 Seat belt pretensioner P 1 58 Front seats P 1 3 Occupant classification sensors weight sen sors P 1 52 EXTERIOR FRONT 1 Hood P 3 24 2 Windshield wiper and washer Switch operation P 2 28 Blade replacement P 8 17 Window washer fluid P 8 13 3 Moonroof P 2 51 4 Outside mirrors P 3 34 SS10821 Power windows P 2 48 Side turn signal light Switch operation P 2 35 B
53. FUNCTION CONTROLLER Choose an item on the display by rotating or pushing the center dial Q upward downward and push the ENTER button 2 for operation If you push the BACK button before the setup is completed the setup will be canceled and or the display will return to the previous screen This button can also be used to delete characters that have been input After the setup is completed push the BACK button and return to the previous screen For the VOICE button 4 functions refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN models with navigation system CAUTION e The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass screen breaks do not touch it Doing so could result in an injury e To clean the display use a soft dry cloth If additional cleaning is ne cessary use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth Never use a rough cloth alcohol benzine thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a che mical cleaning agent They will scratch or deteriorate the panel e Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the dis play Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction To ensure safe driving some functions cannot be operated while driving The on screen functions that are not available while driving will be grayed out or muted Park the vehicl
54. Instruments and controls 2 39 Main switch Type B if so equipped The power outlet plug type is located on the front console It can operate when the ignition switch in the ON position and the main switch located on the instrument panel is ON The specification of this power outlet is for use of a 120 volt 150W 1 25A power draw To turn on or off the power supply to the outlet push the ON Q or OFF 2 side of the main switch When the switch is turned to the ON position the indicator light A will illuminate 2 40 Instruments and controls SIC4725 Power outlet Pull up the cover and plug in After using the power outlet be sure to turn off the main switch CAUTION e Make sure that there is no fluid or other foreign substance in the power outlet Also be sure not to connect or disconnect the outlet with wet hands or insert any metal objects into it Doing so could result in an electric shock or malfunction e Do not use with accessories that exceed a 120 volt 150W 1 25A power draw or the power outlet may switch off automatically If this occurs turn the main switch on the power outlet off and wait a short period of time before turning it back on again If an electrical appliance with a wattage of less than 150W is used the power outlet will be usable again Use this power outlet with the engine running If the engine is stopped this could result in a dis charged battery When usi
55. Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems instead of Enter Number by Keypad in step 3 Copy from Call History The system will show a list of incoming Phone Vehicle Phonebook Qa M Yill sack Settings Vehicle Phonebook QO Mi Yl outgoing or missed calls that were down loaded from the connected cellular phone tC Enty depending on the phone s compatibility Select one of these entries to save in the Aai David E xxxx vehicle phonebook XXXXXXXXXXX Number 111 111 1111 a Type a Copy from the Handset The system will show the connected cellular phone s phonebook that was downloaded depending on the phone s compatibility Select one of these entries to save in the SAA2620 vehicle phonebook Editing the Vehicle Phonebook The following editing items are available SAA2523 1 Push the button and select the Entry Vehicle Phonebook key Changes the displayed number of the 2 Select the desired entry from the displayed selected entry list e Name Select the Edit key Edit the name of the entry using the keypad 4 Select the desired item to change displayed on the screen e Number Edit the phone number using the keypad displayed on the screen e Type Select an icon from the icon list Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 115 Voicetag Confirm and store the voicetag Voicetags al
56. N A _ NESDO SIC0611B Zone map ZONE VARIATION CHANGE PROCE DURE The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance In some areas this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens 1 Push the N switch for more than 3 seconds The current zone number will appear in the display 2 Find your current location and variance number on the zone map NOTE Use zone number 5 for Hawaii 3 Push the N switch repeatedly until the new zone number appears in the display then release the switch After you release the switch the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds e Ifthe compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjust ment have the compass checked at a NISSAN dealer e The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill The compass returns to the correct com pass point when the vehicle moves to an area where the geomagnetism is stabilized CAUTION Do not install a ski rack antenna etc which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet They affect the operation of the compass When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause
57. NISSAN Parts can help protect your personal safety preserve your warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle And if your vehicle was leased using Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident Non genuine imitation parts may not provide 9 28 Technical and consumer information such built in safeguards Also non genuine parts often show premature wear rust and corrosion Why should you take a chance In over 40 states the law says you must be advised if non genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authorizing the use of non genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty These laws help protect you so you can take action to protect yourself It s your right If you should need further information visit us at www nissanusa com for U S customers or www nissan ca for Canadian customers 10 Index A A C Air Conditioner operation 0 00 4 31 ABS Anti lock Braking System 008 5 29 Advanced air bag system 6 eeeeeeeee 1 52 Aiming control leadlightS toisceveverserrssevexs 2 33 Air bag system Advanced air bag system n 1 52 Front passenger air bag and status light
58. Phone Delete Phone Turn Bluetooth Off D Use the Connect Phone commands to manage the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable the Bluetooth function on the vehicle Add Phone A Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to the vehicle See Connecting procedure earlier in this section for more information Select Phone Use the Select Phone command to select from a list of phones connected to the vehicle The system will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to select Only one phone can be active at a time Delete Phone C Use the Delete Phone command to delete a phone that is connected to the vehicle The system will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to delete Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also delete that phonebook for that phone e Replace Phone Use the Replace Phone command to change the priority level of the active phone The priority level determines which phone is active when more than one paired Blue tooth phone is in the vehicle The system states the priority level of the active phone and asks for a new priority level 1 2 3 4 5 If the new priority level is already being used for another phone the two phones will swap priority levels For example if the current priority levels are Priority Level 1 Phone A Priority Level 2 Phone B
59. Priority Level 3 Phone C and you change the priority level of Phone C to Level 1 then Priority Level 1 Phone C Priority Level 2 Phone B Priority Level 3 Phone A Turn Bluetooth Off Use the Bluetooth Off command to prevent a wireless connection to your phone SPEAKER ADAPTATION SA MODE Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out of dialect users to train the system to improve recognition accuracy By repeating a number of commands the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system The system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for each connected phone Training procedure 1 Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location 2 Sit in the drivers seat with the engine running the parking brake on and the transmission in Park 3 Press and hold the amp button for more than 5 seconds 4 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND button for the hands free phone system to enter the speaker adapta tion mode or press the PHONE END sema button to select a different language 5 Press the amp button For information on selecting a different language see Choosing a language earlier in this section 6 If the connected phone is already in use the system will prompt you to overwrite Follow the instructions provided by the system 7 When preparation is complete and you are ready to begin press
60. Pushing the upper switch A will brighten the lights When the brightness reaches the maximum level a beep will sound The lower switch dims the lights Repeatedly pushing the lower switch will turn the lights off and a beep will sound SIC3671 TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction When the turn is completed the turn signals cancel automatically Lane change signal To indicate a lane change move the lever up or down to the point where lights begin flashing SIC3672 FOG LIGHT SWITCH if so equipped To turn the fog lights on turn the headlight switch to the 4O position then turn the switch to the 0 position To turn them off turn the switch to the OFF position The headlights must be on for the fog lights to operate When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position if so equipped e Turning the fog light switch to the p position will turn on the headlights fog lights and the other lights while the ignition switch is in the ON position or the engine is running HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH P SIC2574 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi tions All turn signal lights will flash WARNING e If stopping for an emergency be sure to move the vehicle well off the road e Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the high way unless unusual circumstances force
61. TALK switch to start voice recognition Push the TALK switch to start voice recognition Navigation Commands Dial Number SAA2545 SAA2546 5 Select a category from the list 6 Select an item 7 lf necessary scroll the screen using the multi function controller to view the entire list 8 Press the BACK button to return to the previous screen 4 148 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Command List Phone Commands Command Dial Number Vehicle Phonebook Handset Phonebook Call History Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Missed Calls International Call Call lt named gt Navigation Commands Command Home Address Places Address Book Previous Destinations Previous Start Point Delete Destination Makes a call to the incoming call number Makes a call to the dialed number Makes a call to the Missed calls number Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken Makes a call to a contact that is stored in either Vehicle Phonebook or Handset Phonebook Please say Call followed by a stored name Action Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book Searches for a location by the street address specified and sets a route to the location Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location Searches for stored information in the Address Book Sets a route to a previous destination Sets a route to
62. The position is shown further than the position in the display However the position is actually at the same distance as the position A The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to the position A if the object projects over the actual backing up course HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN To adjust the Display ON OFF Brightness Tint Color Contrast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor push the SETTING button with the RearView Monitor on select the item key and adjust the level using the multi function con troller Do not adjust the Brightness Tint Color Contrast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied and the engine is not running The display of the predicted course lines can be set to ON or OFF For details see CAMERA settings earlier in this section OPERATING TIPS e When the selector lever is shifted to the R Reverse position the monitor screen auto matically changes to the RearView Monitor mode However the radio can be heard e It may take some time until the RearView Monitor or the normal screen is displayed after the selector lever has been shifted to R from another position or to another position from R Objects may be distorted momenta rily until the RearView Monitor screen is displayed completely Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 27 When the temperature is e
63. The vehicle identification number is located as shown Remove the cover to access the number STI0562 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown F M V S S C M V S S CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards F M V S S C M V S S certification label is affixed as shown This label contains valuable vehicle information such as Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR month and year of manufacture Vehicle Identification Number VIN etc Review it carefully Technical and consumer information 9 9 ST10494 EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL LABEL The emission control information label is at The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and tached as shown Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as illustrated 9 10 Technical and consumer information AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL The air conditioner specification label is at tached as shown INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE Use the following steps to mount the license plate Before mounting the license plate confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the plastic bag e License plate bracket e Screw x 2 for license plate bracket 1 Park the vehicle on flat level ground 2 Line up the tab A on the license plate bracket under the top of the front bumper l Install the license plate bracket with screws
64. Tilting up down for more than 1 5 seconds will seek up or down to the next station e Pushing the menu control switch will show the list of preset stations 4 96 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems XM Satellite Radio if so equipped Tilting up down for less than 1 5 seconds will skip up down to the next or previous preset channel e Tilting up down for more than 1 5 seconds will go to the next or previous category e Pushing the menu control switch will show the XM Menu iPod e Tilting up down for less than 1 5 seconds will skip up down to the next or previous track e Tilting up down for more than 1 5 seconds will skip to the next or previous playlist e Pushing the menu control switch will show the iPod Menu CD e Tilting up down for less than 1 5 seconds will skip up down to the next or previous track e Tilting up down for more than 1 5 seconds will skip up down to the next or previous folder number if playing compressed audio files e Pushing the menu control switch will show the CD Menu DVD if so equipped e Tilting up down for less than 1 5 seconds will skip up down to the next or previous track e Tilting up down for more than 1 5 seconds will skip up down to the next or previous title e Pushing the menu control switch will select an item from the DVD display e When the transparent operation menu ap pears the switch will control the m
65. When this item is turned on door lock unlock function by pushing the door handle request switch will be activated Return All Settings to Default Select this item and then select YES to return all settings to the default Speed Sensing Wiper Interval When this item is turned on the wiper interval is adjusted automatically according to the vehicle Settings Language Unils speed Select Language Select Units SAA2490 Models with navigation system Settings gt Language Units l sema O jsem SSSCSC C SAA1092 Models without navigation system Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 19 Language amp Units settings Models with navigation system The Language amp Units settings display will appear when pushing the SETTING button selecting the Others key and then selecting the Language amp Units key Models without navigation system The display illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button and selecting the Lan guage amp Units key Select Language Select the Select Language key Choose English Fran ais or Espa ol for your favorite display appearance If you select the Fran ais key the French language will be displayed so please use the French Owners Manual To obtain a French Owners Manual see OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION in the 9 Technical and
66. XXXXXXXXXX Track XXAXXXXXXX Shuffle OFF Repeat OFF 0 11 SAA2510 Audio main operation Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position Then push the DISC AUX button repeatedly to switch to the Bluetooth audio mode If the system has been turned off while the Bluetooth audio device was playing push ing the ON OFF VOL control knob will start the Bluetooth audio device The ability to pause change tracks fast forward rewind randomize and repeat music may be different between devices Some or all of these functions may not be supported on each device DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pushed with the system off and the Bluetooth audio device connected the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and the Bluetooth audio device is connected push the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the display changes to the Bluetooth audio mode Next Previous Track and Fast Forward Rewind When the mp or mass button is pushed for more than 1 5 seconds while a Bluetooth audio file is being played the Bluetooth audio device will play while forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the Bluetooth audio device will return to normal play speed When the w or 44 button is pushed for less than 1 5 seconds while a Bluetooth audio file is being played the next track or the beginning of the current track on the Bluetooth audio device will be played The multi
67. a previous starting point Deletes a destination Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 149 Information Commands Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information Maintenance Displays maintenance information Displays your current location Traffic Information Turns the traffic information De e a ON and OFF Weather Information Displays weather information weather information Weather Map Displays a weather map Audio Commands po Command tio Turns on the Music Box hard disk drive audio system Starts to play a CD Turns to the FM band selecting the station last played AM Turns to the AM band selecting the station last played pe Turns to the XM Satellite Radio band selecting the channel last played USB s on the USB memory Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth audio player 4 150 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Help Commands Command List Displays the navigation command list Displays the phone command list Displays the audio command list Information Commands Displays the information command list Help Commands Displays the help command list Displays the User Guide Speaker Adaptation The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons General Commands Command tion Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen Exit Cancels Voice Recognit
68. a suitable tool fuel filler cap as a replacement It 2 Move the lever 2 as illustrated to open the has a built in safety valve needed lift gate for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control sys tem An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury It could also cause the mal function indicator light to come on Have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer e Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehi Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 29 cle Close the sliding door before open ing the fuel filler door Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer Static elec tricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers Always place the container on the ground when filling Do not use electronic devices when filling Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid CAUTION If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body flush it away with water to avoid paint damage Insert the cap straight into the fuel filler tube then tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks Failure to tight 3 30 Pre driving checks and adjustments en the fuel filler cap properly may cause the malfunction indicator light
69. air bags side air bags and curtain air bags pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance The ignition switch should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle WARNING e Once a front air bag side air bag or curtain air bag has inflated the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced Additionally the activated pretensioner must also be replaced The air bag mod ule and pretensioner should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer The air bag module and pretensioner system cannot be repaired The front air bag side air bag curtain air bag and the pretensioner should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle If you need to dispose of a supple mental air bag or pretensioner or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Correct supplemental air bag and pretensioner system dis posal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Man ual Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury 1 60 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system MEMO Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 61 2 Instruments and controls OC ON R E E tease aser T 2 2 meru ument DAIS cele ct oct ecesseaeecscudeeeneeracenunees 2 3 Meters ANG QAUG 6S xecccicccnazeunetavicecmesoneccmecinsiaeances 2 4 Meter ring illuminatio
70. and fully retracted The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts For additional information see CHILD RESTRAINTS later in this section The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation During normal seat belt use by an occupant the ALR mode should not be activated If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension WARNING When fastening the seat belts be certain that seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop SSS0326 Unfastening the seat belts To unfasten the seat belt push the button on the buckle The seat belt automatically retracts Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods e When the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor e When the vehicle slows down rapidly To increase your confidence in the seat belts check the operation as follows e Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly The retractor should lock and Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system restrict further belt movement If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any question about seat belt operation see a NISSAN dealer 1 21 SSS0391 3rd row center seat belt The 3rd row center seat belt has a connector tongue 4 and a s
71. and precautions below must be industrial safety spectacles and followed 6 10 WARNING If done incorrectly jump starting can lead to a battery explosion resulting in severe injury or death It could also damage your vehicle Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or painted surfaces Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns If the fluid should come into contact with anything immediately flush the contacted area with water Keep the battery out of the reach of children The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle Whenever working on or near a battery always wear suitable eye In case of emergency remove rings metal bands or any other jewelry Do not lean over the battery when jump starting Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery It could explode and cause serious injury Your vehicle has an automatic en gine cooling fan It could come on at any time Keep hands and other objects away from it WARNING Always follow the instructions below Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury If the booster battery is in another vehicle position the two vehicles A and B to
72. and remains on it may indicate that the BSW system is not functioning properly Although the vehicle is still driveable have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer See BLIND SPOT WARNING BSW SYSTEM in the 5 Starting and driving section Charge warning light If the light comes on while the engine is running it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly Turn the engine off and check the alternator belt If the belt is loose broken missing or if the light remains on see a NISSAN dealer immediately Instruments and controls 2 11 CAUTION Do not continue driving if the alternator belt is loose broken or missing Engine oil pressure warning light This light warns of low engine oil pressure If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving pull off the road in a safe area stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level Use the dipstick to check the oil level See ENGINE OIL in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately Such damage is not cov ered by warranty Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so 2 12 Instruments and controls Hydraulic pump electric power steering warning light
73. and selecting the Comfort key This key does not appear on the display until the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position Auto Interior Illumination When this item is turned on the interior lights will illuminate if any door is unlocked Light Sensitivity Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher right or lower left Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit if so equipped When this item is turned on the driver s seat moves backward for easy exit if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position 4 18 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems the driver s seat moves to the previous position Light Off Delay Choose the duration of the automatic headlight off timer from O 30 45 60 90 120 150 and 180 second periods Selective Door Unlock When this item is turned on only the driver s door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation When the door handle request switch on the driver s or front passenger s side door is pushed to be unlocked only the corresponding door is unlocked first All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is per formed again within 60 seconds When this item is turned off all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once Intelligent Key Lock Unlock
74. and supplemental restraint system through 6 FORWARD FACING CHILD RE STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS WARNING The three point seat belt with Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child re straint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child ina sudden stop or collision When installing a child restraint system in the 3rd center position both the center seat belt connector tongue and buckle tongue must be secured See Attaching 3rd row center seat belt earlier in this section Forward facing front passenger seat step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat it should be placed in a forward facing direction only Move the seat to the rearmost position Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat Always follow the child restraint manufac turer s instructions The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle se
75. and then select from DARKER NORMAL or BRIGHTER When adjusting manually select OFF and adjust using the joystick on the remote controller and tilt the joystick to the right or left To adjust tint color contrast or black level select a key using the joystick on the remote controller and tilt the joystick to the right or left Push the BACK button on the remote controller to apply the settings and return to the previous display To return the adjustment levels to the default value select Execute next to Initialization using the joystick on the remote controller and push the ENTER e button The Execute key is deactivated when the picture mode settings are already in the default value Color System To choose the color system select from NTSC PAL PAL 60 PAL M PAL N or AUTO using the joystick on the remote controller and tilt the joystick to the right or left 3D Y C filter Set to ON OFF using the joystick on the remote controller When turned on small characters and an outline of the shapes will be displayed more clearly than when turned off CARE AND MAINTENANCE Use a lightly dampened lint free cloth to clean the surfaces of your Mobile Entertainment System DVD player face screen remote controller etc CAUTION e Do not use any solvents or cleaning solutions when cleaning the video system e Do not use excessive force
76. artist displays all of the tracks by the artist Select tracks from the list to add to the Playlist e Edit Songs Order Reorder the tracks in the Playlist by select ing a track and specifying the order e Edit Name Edit the name of the Playlist using the keypad displayed on the screen See 4 90 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems HOW TO USE MULTI FUNCTION CON TROLLER earlier in this section e Delete Songs Delete tracks in the Playlist by selecting from the displayed song list Play Mode models with navigation sys tem Choose the preferred play mode from the following items e Normal e 1 Album Repeat e 1 Track Repeat e 1 Playlist Random e 1 Artist Random e 1 Album Random e 1 All Track Random e 1 All Random Edit Music Information Displays the following information about the Music Box hard drive flash memory to edit if necessary Edit Information of Current Song mod els with navigation system Edit the Track Artist and Genre in formation of the current track using the keypad displayed on the screen See HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN models with navigation system earlier in this section Edit the Mode information by selecting from the list Edit Information by Album models with navigation system Edit the displayed information of a selected album and the track information on the album Update Gracenote
77. bags in your vehicle are not part of this system The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants such as children by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF The occupant classification sensors weight sensors are on the seat cushion frame under the front passenger seat and are designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat For example if a child is in the front passenger seat the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations Also if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat the occupant classification sensors can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF For small adults it may be turned OFF however if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly for example by not sitting upright by sitting on an edge of the seat or by otherwise being out of position this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag 1 54 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system NISSAN recommends t
78. be placed under the towed vehicle s driving wheels Always follow the dolly manufacturer s recommendations when using their product 9 24 Technical and consumer information UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT Department Of Transportation Quality Grades All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A TREADWEAR The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road char acteristics and climate TRACTION AA A B AND C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on spe cified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on strai
79. booster seat used See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System SRS section contains important information concern ing the following systems e Driver and passenger supplemental front impact air bag NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System e Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag e Roof mounted curtain side impact supple mental air bag e Seat belt with pretensioner Supplemental front impact air bag system The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvis area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions The supplemental side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted 1 46 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Roof mounted curtain side impact This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear 2nd and 3rd outboard seating positions in certain side impact The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted These supplemental restraint systems are de signed to supplement the c
80. bring their batteries into close proximity to each other Do not allow the two vehicles to touch Apply the parking brake Move the selector lever to the P Park position Switch off all 3 4 5 6 unnecessary electrical systems lights hea ter air conditioner etc Remove vent caps on the battery if so equipped Cover the battery with a firmly wrung out moist cloth to reduce explosion hazard Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated C gt gt gt If the battery is discharged the ignition switch cannot be moved from the OFF position Connect the jumper cables to the booster vehicle before pushing the ignition switch CAUTION Always connect positive to posi tive and negative to body ground for example as illustrated not to the battery Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2 000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle A being jump started CAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds If the engine does not start right away place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before trying again After starting your engine carefully discon nect the negative cable an
81. buckle up every time you drive even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag Most U S states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven WARNING e Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times Children should be prop erly restrained in the rear seat and if appropriate in a child restraint e The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and in crease the chance or severity of injury in an accident Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly e Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never put the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder e Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS NOT THE WAIST A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an acci SSS0134A deni Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 17 Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted Doing so may reduce its effectiveness Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt Never carry more people in t
82. child restraint SSS1168 3rd row seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 31 be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether strap is damaged Top tether anchor point locations Anchor points are located in the following locations e 2nd row seats on the back side of the seatback as shown e 3rd row seat on the back side of the seatback as shown If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint on the rear seat consult a NISSAN dealer for details REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN STALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats and 3rd row seat using the LATCH system 1 Position the child restraint on the seat Always follow the child restraint manufac turer s instructions SSS0648 SSS0649 Rear facing web mounted step 2 Rear facing rigid mounted step 2 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors 1 32 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Rear facing step 3 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor at
83. closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc in side the vehicle before closing the window If the control unit detects something caught in the window as it is closing the window will be immediately lowered The auto reverse function can be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs If the windows do not close automatically If the power window automatic function closing only does not operate properly perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system 1 Push the ignition switch to the ON position Close the door Open the window completely by operating the power window switch 4 Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed completely 5 Release the power window switch Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete 6 Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other windows If the power window automatic function does not operate properly after performing the pro cedure above have your vehicle checked by a NISSA
84. colei iE E N cee 8 25 Exterior and interior lIGQUTSizcedecneeai deetneecsgeccautes 8 26 Wheels and tires ssssssesessssssrrrrrrrrrrrerrsrsesesens 8 29 Tire Os UN vette rerna ends Easain 8 29 Tire VAD GUNG ates oat eters seteecaee tee denncteensetanes 8 32 Types OF TINGS lt es cea aebengeneeeresteeaaee eee 8 34 TAS 5G ANS goes E E EE E E 8 35 Changing wheels and tires 8 35 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with long service intervals to save you both time and money However some day to day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSAN s fine mechanical condition as well as its emission and engine performance It is the owner s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance as well as general maintenance is performed As the vehicle owner you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance You are a vital link in the main tenance chain SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE For your convenience both required and op tional scheduled maintenance items are de scribed and listed in your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals GENERAL MAINTENANCE General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day to day operation They are essential for proper vehi
85. condition Also check tires for proper inflation Lock all doors Position seats and adjust head restraints headrests Adjust inside and outside mirrors Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position See WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS in the 2 Instruments and controls section Starting and driving 5 11 STARTING THE ENGINE 1 Apply the parking brake 2 Move the selector lever to the P Park or N Neutral position P is recommended The starter is designed not to operate unless the selector lever is in either of the above positions 3 Push the ignition switch to the ON position Depress the brake pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine To start the engine immediately push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position e f the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restart ing depress the accelerator pedal a little approximately 1 3 to the floor and while holding crank the engine Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts e f the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine After 5 or 6 seconds stop cranki
86. consumer information section Select Units Select the Select Units key Choose US Mile F MPG or Metric km C L 100 km for your favorite display appearance Voice Recognition settings models with navigation system For details about the Voice Recognition settings see NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM models with navigation system later in this section Settings Camera Display of predictive course line Models with navigation system SAA2404 Settings gt Camera Models without navigation system 4 20 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems SAA2606 CAMERA settings if so equipped The CAMERA screen will appear when select ing the Camera key For the details about the camera system operation see REARVIEW MONITOR later in this section Predictive Course Lines When this item is turned on the predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the selector shift lever is in the R Reverse position Settings Image Viewer 1 Image_1 jpg Q 2 Image_2 jpg Q 3 Image _3 jpg 4 Image _4 jpg 5 Image_5 jpg 6 Image_6 jpg Full Screen Display 1 8 SAA2491 Image Viewer models with navigation system The image files in the USB memory will be displayed To display the Image Viewer push the SETTING button select the Other key and then select the Image Viewer key The i
87. does not include the actual phone numbers When the playback of the list is complete the system goes back to the main menu You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the s button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR session See the Record Name command in this section for information about recording custom voice tags for list entries that the system has difficulty pronouncing emh Record name The system allows you to record custom voice tags for contact names in the phonebook that the vehicle has difficulty recognizing This feature can also be used to record voice tags to directly dial an entry with multiple numbers Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the system Recent Calls Main menu Recent Calls Outgoing A Incoming Missed Use the Recent Calls command to access outgoing incoming or missed calls Outgoing A Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing calls made from the vehicle Incoming Use the Incoming command to list the incoming calls made from the vehicle Missed Use the Missed command to list the missed calls made to the vehicle that were not answered Connect Phone NOTE Add Phone command is not available when the vehicle is moving 4 130 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Main menu Connect Phone Add Phone A Select
88. does not operate properly after performing the procedure above have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer INTERIOR LIGHTS SIC4745 MAP LIGHTS Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on or off Instruments and controls 2 53 Maman 7 SIC2881 REAR PERSONAL LIGHTS The rear personal light has a three position switch A OFF DOOR ON When the switch is in the DOOR position the light illuminates when a door is opened The interior light timer is equipped so that the interior light stays on for approximately 15 seconds when e The ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or LOCK position 2 54 Instruments and controls e The driver s door is unlocked e The last open door excluding the lift gate is closed The interior light timer will be cancelled when e The driver s door is locked e The ignition switch is pushed to the ON position When the rear personal light switch is in the ON position the rear personal lights illuminate regardless of any condition When the switch is in the OFF position A the rear personal lights do not illuminate regardless of any condition OY ON DOOR OFF 0 de wey 0 SIC4746 INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH The interior light control switch has three positions ON DOOR and OFF ON position When the switch is in the ON position 4 the map lights and rear personal lights will illumi nate DOOR
89. driving because of the brightness Use the headlight aiming control switch to low er the light axis See XENON HEAD LIGHTS earlier in this section for additional information Daytime running light system Canada only The daytime running lights automatically illumi nate when the engine is started with the parking brake released The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the pa position Turn the headlight switch to the O position for full illumination when driving at night If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime running lights do not illuminate The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position 2 34 Instruments and controls WARNING When the daytime running light system is active tail lights on your vehicle are not on It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others SIC3585 Instrument brightness control The instrument brightness control operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position Pushing the control switch once will change the brightness to the night mode Pushing the control switch once will change the brightness to the day mode To adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights push the control switches
90. driving checks and adjustments section for the seat position memory function if so equipped CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and or da mages oy SSS1051 Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained To bring the seatback forward again move the switch 2 forward The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit See PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when 1 4 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park position Lumbar support if so equipped The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the occupants Push the front or back end of the switch to adjust the seatback lumbar area SSS1052 SSS1053 Seat lifter if so equipped 1 Pull up or push down the adjusting switch to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved 2 Tilt up or down the adjusting switch to adjust the front angle of the seat until the desired position is achieved for driver s seat SS
91. e Voice Recognition Settings Describes the available voice recognition settings e Adapting the System to Your Voice Tutorial adapting the system to your voice USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia lized which may take up to one minute When completed the system is ready to accept voice commands If the TALK amp switch is pushed before the initialization completes the display will show the message System not ready or a beep sounds Before starting To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice Recognition observe the following e Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands cor rectly e When the air conditioner is in the AUTO mode the fan speed decreases automati cally for easy recognition Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command Speak in a natural voice without pausing Voice Recognition between words ENTER 4 Phone Y Navigation J Information Audio WY Help Alternate Command Mode ON To exit hold the TALK switch SAA1859 SAA2548 Giving voice command 2 A list of commands appears on the screen 1 Push and release the TALK y switch and the system announces Please say a command located on the steerin
92. ee ees Headlight Switch cc cece eee eee rene eee Overdrive OFF switch sasccctsccecessveaswnters Power door lock switch eeeceeeeees Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWICNixxscisaesadassataeeremnespaaeeantiaasecnaws Turn signal SWiCNyc scectesnnteereoxdeeennpestt Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch T 3rd row seat si 0cce5ssduntoenedsaceecccdeee nia er TaGhHOMBGler scccccecess scctuserscepeeearseeeees Temperature display 0 eeeeeeeeeeeee Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature GANGS s1ts cewervenceces cere iedcssiensas Theft NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Engine Start ccecusaceecoswesninaecewssesenasensw ert Three way Catal ySt 2 2 0n2ee2eseccstascaeseeweeewes Tilt telescopic Steering xcowneeecceeeesedieccerve Tire Pressure Low tire pressure warning light Tire replacement indicator 00 10 6 1 46 Tires leat tr Gresser en nepeaierscnatadaresoyena ts 6 2 Low tire pressure warning system 5 3 Tire and Loading information label 8 30 9 10 Tire CHANING sasear ean Eren EAEE 8 35 Tire dressing savcrsvacecteeentsheremeertengeceaads 7 3 Tire pressure cvcxccadessad Mephceceuresdiedve tet 8 29 Tire pressure monitoring system OEM eepaaechhave we eceeseretseecenae 5 3 6 2 Tire FOLAMOM suseceatvsadoe conn eauwen es Gewese 8 35 Types of tires 8 34 Uniform tire quality grading 5 9 24 Wheel tire size 0 c
93. eeeeee eee 5 2 PUSH StAMINGt pecscetedtdccGecececscetesaghiedeeres 6 11 Push button ignition switch 0 5 8 5 9 R R dio 5014 sens eondecneaserecoseenesheaderaneenneoees 4 43 Car phone or CB radiOvetes ectsasdevereted 4 110 FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD changer areen eeo ea E 4 56 FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD player asssnsnrsssrrnsrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr rne 4 61 FM AM SAT radio with Compact Disc EPES E A EEE E 4 67 Rapid air pressure l0SS prnccevsetsmwecesessedecseeuds 5 7 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M ICSU perpenre e EEE E 9 26 Rear personal lights 226s 2 seceeuzesndenhenaw ert 2 54 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SING sede teas rere E mane e Er cee 2 30 Rear window wiper and washer switch 2 29 Rearview Monitor cee eee cece cnet eee eens 4 22 Recorders Event data ccccccceeeeee ee eaee 9 27 Registering your vehicle in another country 9 8 Remote controller DVD cce eee 4 108 Remote keyless entry system 55 3 20 Reporting safety defects ccceeeee eens 9 25 ROIOVE e oaa AA EE EER 5 6 Roof Roof rack ssccccccccccesrererrerrrrrrrrses 2 47 S Oi FON Seat secer se te rA 2 42 Safety Child seat belts oiccss sis cexereeceaetererseane cs 1 26 Reporting safety defects 0ee eee 9 25 Towing safety ace tcuscceceterewtsncs edeetenades 9 20 Satellite radio operation ceeeeee eee ee 4 68
94. engine coolant level 0 eeeeees 8 8 Changing engine Coolant cceeeeeee eee eee 8 8 EA Ol desea ae aeaea AE E accraucee 8 8 Checking engine oil level cceeeeeeee eee ee es 8 8 Changing engine oil and filter 00 eee eee 8 9 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid 8 11 Power steering fluid isicceueueces caccccnewadeetessenenesenes 8 11 Dra a a EEE 8 12 Window washer TUNG ssiissrersssiisassorrisriirererssiitinis 8 13 EIn ac E E E A PE A T 8 13 Jump Star 2242 Seesersecaneneereesssencesecaneeeeseres 8 15 Variable voltage control system 0eeeeeee ee 8 15 Drive DCM e2csessecccedsgaiendtete stececetenedaderaeensconedegess 8 15 Spark PUGS srasni a 8 16 Replacing spark plUgS ansecuicrdeter cca cemenbceneendees 8 16 IES E E E E T 8 17 Windshield wiper blades sc eeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 17 ACAI E O E N E A EA E A 8 17 FREDIACING srscssidisiiiterane riena EAn eai 8 18 Rear window wiper blade seeeeeeeeeee ees 8 19 Fae sare acai bs oie ee cab EAEE nee aneeneee 8 19 Self adjusting brakes ss ccidconitnadunepnnestraciennipaahass 8 19 Brake Dad Weal Warning wissen ensewstiesedeceueseeeesees 8 19 SU clo eee eee ee en ee eee ee 8 20 Engine compartment wiccieccnevereaseensegstuceaseteensses 8 20 Passenger compartment sssssssssssssesersrrrrrrren 8 21 Intelligent Key battery replacement 55 8 22 LOIN e E E E 8 24 g
95. following 1 Check the brake fluid level Add brake fluid as necessary See BRAKE FLUID in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself sec tion 2 If the brake fluid level is correct have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer Anti lock Braking System ABS warning indicator When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient if both the brake warning light and the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminate it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the brake system checked and if necessary re paired by a NISSAN dealer promptly See Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light earlier in this section WARNING e Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on Driving could be dangerous If you judge it to be safe drive care fully to the nearest service station for repairs Otherwise have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous e Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and or low brake fluid level may increase your stop ping distance and braking will re quire greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel e If the brake fluid level is below the minimum or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer Blind Spot Warning BSW sys tem warning light orange if so equipped If the light comes on in orange
96. for accumulation of sand dirt or salt If present wash with water as soon as possible CAUTION e NEVER remove dirt sand or other debris from the passenger compart ment by washing it out with a hose Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them Chemicals used for road surface deicing are extremely corrosive They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cables floor pan and fenders In winter the underbody must be cleaned periodically For additional protection against rust and corrosion which may be required in some areas consult a NISSAN dealer Appearance and care 7 7 MEMO 7 8 Appearance and care 8 Maintenance and do it yourself Maintenance requirement w 2c0esccsveneeraeeieeedeveusstencdds 8 2 Scheduled maintenance cseceeeeeeeeeee eee 8 2 General maintenance eseeeee eect eee eeeeeeeee 8 2 Where to go fOr Service 8 2 General maintenance ssssssssssssssssrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrren 8 2 Explanation of maintenance items 8 2 Maintenance precautions access tcedcsnracarseeteeustendusex 8 5 Engine compartment check locations 0 5 8 6 VOSODE enge suientccescteessatacangeagaeeosayreayeseas 8 6 Engine cooling SY SICIN cxsdscncenseactiecetcusecedensececonees 8 7 Checking
97. functionality of all VI DEO CD formats Parental level parental control DVDs with the parental control setting can be played with this system Please use your own judgement to set the parental control with the system Disc selection The following disc formats can be played with the DVD drive e DVD VIDEO e VIDEO CD e DTS CD models with navigation system Use DVDs with the region code ALL or the code applicable to your country The region code is displayed as a small symbol printed on the top of the DVD This vehicle installed DVD player can only play DVDs with an applicable region code 4 104 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 0 00 00 Wide Bla f coter O1GITAL 5 1 ch SAA2497 Front display DVD 9 01 002 00 12 28 FULL l Men gt PLAY SKIP STOP SKIP SAA3656 Rear display PLAYING A DVD DISC AUX or DISC button Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while watching the images Insert a DVD into the CD DVD slot with the labeled side up The DVD will be guided automatically into the slot When ejecting the DVD push the EJECT button Push the DISC AUX or DISC button on the instrument panel turn the display to the DVD mode and begin playing DVD automatically When a DVD is loaded it will be replayed automatically The front screen will be turned on when the DISC AUX or DI
98. go back one step Press and hold the s button for 5 seconds to quit the voice recognition system at any time GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition For additional command options refer to LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS later in this section Choosing a language For models with center multi function control panel The available voice commands are only applic able to the relevant language set in the LANGUAGE setting screen See HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON earlier in this section For models without center multi function control panel You can interact with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System using English Spanish or French To change the language perform the following 1 Press and hold the amp button for more than 5 seconds 2 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND lt lt button for the hands free phone system to enter the speaker adapta tion mode or press the PHONE END sema button to select a different language 3 Push the s button For information on speaker adaptation see SPEAKER ADAPTATION SA MODE later in this section 4 The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the language to Spanish in Spanish or French in French Use the following chart to select the language NOTE You must push the button or t
99. have any questions when installing a LRS0455 top tether strap child restraint on the rear seat consult your NISSAN dealer for de Booster seats of various sizes are offered by tails several manufacturers When selecting any booster seat keep the following points in mind BOOSTER SEATS e Choose only a booster seat with a label Precautions on booster seats certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian A WARNING Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 e Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be If a booster seat and seat belt are not sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat used properly the risk of a child being and seat belt system injured in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child s face and neck and the lap portion of the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 43 e Make sure the child s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat The seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears For example if a low back booster seat 1 is chosen the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears If the seatback is lower than the center of the child s ears a high back booster seat 2 should be used e lf the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle place your child in the booster seat and check the various ad
100. if the TEM PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident Maintenance and do it yourself 8 37 WARNING e The TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used for emergency use It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage e Drive carefully while the TEMPOR ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in stalled Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving e Periodically check spare tire infla tion pressure Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi 420 kPa 4 2 bar Always keep the pressure of the full size spare tire if so equipped at the recommended pressure for standard tires as in dicated on the Tire and Loading Information label e With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH 80 km h e When driving on roads covered with snow or ice the TEMPORARY USE 8 38 Maintenance and do it yourself ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and original tire used on the front wheels drive wheels Use tire chains only on the front original tires Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles Do not use more than on
101. indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected SSD1032 NOTE If you accelerate from a stop with a vehicle in the detection zone the other vehicle may not be detected Overtaking other vehicles The BSW indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 3 seconds The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly SSD1034 If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone then the BSW indicator light flashes and a chime will sound twice Starting and driving 5 21 NOTE When overtaking several vehicles in a row the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together 5 22 Starting and driving SSD1037 Entering from the side The BSW indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side NOTE The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detec tion zone If the driver activates the turn signal then the BSW indicator light flashes and a chime will sound twice NOTE If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone the BSW indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when another vehicle is de tected BSW temporarily not available
102. inspected by a NISSAN dealer e Do not activate the power lift gate if one or both of the lift gate gas stays are removed Damage to the lift gate or power lift gate mechanisms may occur AUTO CLOSURE If the lift gate is pulled down to a partly open position the lift gate will pull itself to the closed position Do not apply excessive force when the auto closure is operating Excessive force applied may cause the mechanism to malfunction CAUTION e The lift gate will automatically close from a partly open position To avoid pinching keep hands and fingers away from lift gate opening Do not let children operate the lift gate FUEL FILLER DOOR FUEL FILLER CAP WARNING e Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled Always stop engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling e Do not attempt to top off the fuel SPA2861 tank after the fuel pump nozzle LIFT GATE RELEASE shuts off automatically Continued OPENING FUEL FILLER DOOR refueling may cause fuel overflow resulting in fuel spray and possibly If the lift gate cannot be opened due to a discharged battery follow these steps To open the fuel filler door pull the fuel filler door opener handle Q a fire 1 Remove the cover 4 inside of the lift gate e Use only an original equipment type with
103. methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank e Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate Instruments and controls 2 29 and water If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor If this occurs turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms In approxi mately 1 minute turn the switch on again to operate the wiper 2 30 Instruments and controls SIC3666 The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper Q Intermittent INT intermittent operation not adjustable 2 Low ON continuous low speed opera tion Push the switch forward 8 to operate the washer Then the wiper will also operate several times REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH COD Y FRONT d Z SIC47148 To defog defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors if so equipped start the engine and push the switch 4 on The indicator light 2 will come on Push the switch again to turn the defrost
104. mode If the clock set mode is unchanged for approximately 10 seconds the system will automatically exit the clock set mode FM AM radio operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position FM AM button When the FM AM button is pushed while the audio system is off the audio system will turn on and the radio will turn on If another audio source is playing when the FM AM button is pushed the audio source will automatically turn off and the radio will turn on To change the radio bands push the FM AM button to select the band AM FM1 FM2 A v TUNE button When adjusting the broadcasting station fre quency manually push the TUNE button A or until the desired frequency is achieved A JZ SEEK button When adjusting the broadcasting station fre quency automatically push the SEEK button A or for less than 1 5 seconds When the system detects a broadcasting station it will Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 57 stop at the station SCAN searching Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low to high frequencies and stop at each broad casting station for 5 seconds Pushing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds SCAN tuning moves to the nex
105. mode This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn mode when you first receive the vehicle In hazard indicator and horn mode when the LOCK button 4 is pushed the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once When the UNLOCK p button is pushed the hazard indicator flashes once If horns are not necessary the system can be switched to the hazard indicator mode In hazard indicator mode when the LOCK amp button is pushed the hazard indicator flashes twice When the UNLOCK p button 2 is pushed neither the hazard indicator nor the horn operates Hazard indicator and horn mode Switching procedure ENT A buttons simultaneously for more than 2 seconds TE iain HAZARI TWICE HAZARD once to switch the mode from one to the other Using door handle or lift gate request switch OUTSIDE CHIME twice OUTSIDE CHIME once Remote keyless entry system When pushing the buttons to set the hazard HAZARD twice HAZARD once eae a Using fy or g button HORN once HORN none indicator mode the hazard indicator flashes 3 times Hazard indicator mode When pushing the buttons to set the hazard indicator and horn mode the hazard indicator O DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK flashes once and the horn chirps once Intelligent Key system HAZARD twice HAZARD none Using door handle or lift gate request switch OUTSIDE CHIME none OUTSIDE CHIME none HAZARD INDICATOR AND Remote keyless entry system HORN MODE HAZA
106. nasia 8 25 Headlight switch cccscctacctreneesecexeuaeeares 2 31 Xenon NEAGIIONS c 05scetereevesadesecere dees 2 31 Heated SGalS 5 vedas eres ceyeees ete dense reeteunveee 2 36 Heater Engine block heater ceeeeeeees 5 33 Heater and air conditioner operation 4 29 HomeLink Universal Transceiver 66 2 56 Hood release cc cextecwcccenertccdemessegsieecugeecs 3 24 Hook Coat NOGKS 2 occecsee deerecuit ccd bageeseve da 2 48 FIOM seneheacegvaness EEEE R S EEEE ERAT 2 36 Hydraulic pump electric power steering SYST M sdcccstenstesmarauudseiaecesswesrrmienenwibedes 5 28 l Ignition switch Push button cc cece 5 8 Immobilizer sySteM 00e cece eee ee eee eens 2 27 In cabin microfilter cisecieeeseczteredeersavesenss 4 43 Indicator Dot matrix display sesine 2 17 LIGNIS pecserene niinen EEE EENE 2 15 INFO ttoNse srne iiss asenin ane naai a EAER 4 8 Inside MIOT sssrdseresedericpriesandee saadensewasees 3 32 Inspection maintenance I M test 66 9 26 Instrument brightness control 055 2 34 Instrument PaNGl s cc nceeiieuevesieeveuere cee 2 3 2 41 Intelligent Key system s vvourscntyeeereveesen 3 2 3 12 Battery replacement 2 ceeeeeeees 8 22 Intelligent Key system warning light 2 12 Key operating range ssesresere eerren 3 14 Key operation excccatcs vp ereriecetensieeetectecs 3 15 Warning signals s is 3 18 In
107. of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed e Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead e NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels Aluminum alloy wheels Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used Salt could discolor the wheels if not removed CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels e Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels e Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature e Rinse the wheel to completely re move the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied CHROME PARTS Clean chrome parts regularly with a non abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish TIRE DRESSING NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber If a tire dressing is applied to the tires it may react with the coating and form a com pound This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint I
108. on the monitor screen e Avoid touching or scratching the monitor screen as it may become dirty or damaged e Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme temperature con ditions below 4 F 20 C and above 158 F 70 C e Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme humidity condi tions less than 10 or more than 75 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 109 CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a car phone or a CB radio in your NISSAN be sure to observe the following cautions otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the electronic control modules and electronic control system harness WARNING e A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving e If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion the hands free cellular phone operational mode if so equipped is highly recom mended Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation e Ifa conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so CAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in 20 cm away from the electronic control system harness Do not
109. or cover SDI2200 Side marker light 1 Remove the rubber cover 2 Remove the bulb as illustrated Can INSTALL SDI1679 Maintenance and do it yourself 8 27 SDI1500B Front map light Front fog light if so equipped SDI2031 Rear personal light Vanity mirror light 8 28 Maintenance and do it yourself WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire see FLAT TIRE in the 6 In case of emergency section TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving For more details see Low tire pressure warning light in the 2 Instruments and controls section TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS TEM TPMS in the 5 Starting and driving section and TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS in the 6 In case of emergency section Tire inflation pressure Check the pressure of the tires including the spare often and always prior to long distance trips The re
110. pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage See WHEELS AND TIRES in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or blows out while driving maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle road and traffic WARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury e The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire e Do not rapidly apply the brakes e Do not rapidly release the accelera tor pedal e Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel Remain calm and do not overreact Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle 6 Turn on the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see CHANGING A FLAT TIRE in the 6 In case of emergency section of
111. pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pres sure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel effi ciency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi
112. pretensioner activation load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing if necessary to reduce forces against the chest The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system See SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT later in this section for more details If the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration SRS air bag The warning labels 4 are located on the surface of the sun visors SPA1097 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning light display ing in the instrument panel monitors the circuits of the supplemental front impact air bag front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag roof mounted curtain side impact sup plemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner systems The monitored circuits include the air bag systems pretensioners and all related wiring When the ignition switch is in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illumi nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the SRS air bag syst
113. prevent the vehicle from moving Move the selector lever to P Park e Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when per forming any parts replacement or repairs e If you must work with the engine running keep your hands clothing hair and tools away from moving fans belts and any other moving parts e It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry such as rings watches etc before working on your vehicle e Always wear eye protection when ever you work on your vehicle e If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack If it is necessary to work under the vehicle support it with safety stands Keep smoking materials flame and sparks away from fuel tank and the battery The fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer be cause the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off CAUTION Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down Avoid direct contact with used en gine oil and coolant Improperly disposed engine oil and engine coolant and or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment Al ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid e Never leave the engine or the CVT related com
114. row seatbacks To use the hook on the seatbacks push the lower side of the hook and pull it out CAUTION Do not apply a total load of more than 9 SIC4737 ROOF RACK if so equipped Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof rack Do not load more than 99 Ib 45 kg on the roof rails Observe the maximum load limit shown on the crossbars or roof carriers when you attach them on the roof rails Contact a NISSAN dealer for crossbar or other equipment information Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or its Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear The GVWR and GAWR are located on the F M V S S or C V M S S certification label located on the driver s door pillar For more information regarding GVWR and GAWR see VEHICLE LOADING INFOR MATION in the 9 Technical and consumer information section WARNING e Drive extra carefully when the vehi cle is loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity especially if the Significant portion of that load is carried on the roof rack e Heavy loading of the roof rack has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sud den or unusual handling maneuvers e Roof rack load should be evenly distributed e Do not exceed maximum roof rack load weight capacity e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting In a sudden stop or coll
115. sccvesedereendesieteeeseteeeveies 2 22 Emission control information label 9 10 Emission control system warranty 9 25 Engine Before starting the engine 5 11 Break in SCnedles ccvcccsconeecscensiavenssces 5 26 Capacities and recommended MMe IUDICANIS lt c 2vaduceeedekovercusdeeumoswanaas 9 2 Changing engine coolant eeeee 8 8 Changing engine oil and filter 8 9 Checking engine coolant level 5 8 8 Checking engine oil level 2 0 0eee 8 8 Coolant temperature gauge 2 0 2 6 Emergency engine shut off 5 10 Engine block heater ceeeeee ees 5 33 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine Cooling system sc sscccctaderseewestecns 8 7 PAGING Ol ccec cceteceettcesmigcceuceceatecseness 8 8 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 5 Engine oil replacement indicator 2 20 Engine oil viscosity 212 ccvrruscescevatencdesisecn 9 5 Engine serial nUMber ssassn 9 9 Engine specifications sssi es ierre 9 7 Engine start operation indicator 2 18 If your vehicle overheats sse 6 12 Starting the engine s ssssssesrerrrerrrere 5 12 Entry exit function Automatic drive positioner 3 36 Event Data Recorders EDR a oa 9 27 Exhaust gas carbon monoxide 00008 5 2 E F M V S S C M V S S certification label
116. seat seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident 1 53 Status light The front passenger air bag status light ss Is located on the instrument panel After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the front passenger air bag status light illumi nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or illuminates depending on the front passenger occupied status The light operates as follows The light operates as follows e Unoccupied passenger seat The a light is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash e Passenger seat occupied by a small adult child or child restraint as outlined in this section The sera light illuminates to indi cate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash e Occupied passenger seat and the passen ger meets the conditions outlined in this section The sma light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is opera tional Front passenger air bag The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below as permitted by U S regulations If the front passenger air bag is OFF it will not inflate in a crash The driver air bag and other air
117. seconds after you push the ignition switch to OFF and open any door then close all the doors You can adjust the period of the automatic headlights off delay from O seconds OFF to 180 seconds The factory default setting is 45 seconds For automatic headlights off delay setting see Light Off Delay in the 4 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems section SIC4722 Be sure not to put anything on top of the photo sensor A located on the top of the instrument panel The photo sensor con trols the autolight if it is covered the photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the headlights will illuminate Headlight beam select 4 To select the low beam put the lever in the neutral position as shown 2 To select the high beam push the lever forward while the switch is in the gt position Pull it back to select the low beam 3 Pulling the lever toward you will flash the headlight high beam even when the head light switch is in the OFF position Battery saver system A chime will sound when the driver side door is opened with the light switch in the bazor Z position and the ignition switch in the ACC OFF or LOCK position When the headlight switch is in the zpa or 22 position while the ignition switch is in the ON position the lights will automatically turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch has been pushed to the OFF position When the headlight s
118. serious personal injury in the event of an accident Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints If the child restraint is not secured properly the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE To clean the seat belt webbing apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors the seat belts may retract slowly Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean dry cloth Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles tongues retractors flexible wires and anchors work properly If loose parts deterioration cuts or other damage on the webbing is found the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 25 CHILD SAFETY Children need adults to help protect them They need to be properly restrained In addition to the general information in this manual child safety information is available from many other sources including doctors teachers government traffic safety offices and community organizations Every child is different so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child There are three basic types of
119. shown on the screen are also available e menu returns to the previous screen e Pll plays pauses the music selected Next Previous Track and Fast Forward Rewind When the gt or mas button is pushed for more than 1 5 seconds while the iPod is playing the iPod will play while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the iPod will return to the normal play speed When the w or 44 button is pushed for less than 1 5 seconds while the iPod is playing the next track or the beginning of the current track on the iPod will be played The multi function controller can also be used to select tracks when the iPod is playing RPT REPEAT RPT RANDOM RDM When the RPT button is pushed while a track is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 85 Shuffle Off Repeat One Shuffle Off Repeat All Shuffle Off Repeat Off Shuffle Albums Shuffle Songs Repeat All Repeat Off Shuffle Albums Shuffle Songs Repeat Off Repeat All MUSIC BOX if so equipped The Music Box hard drive flash memory audio system can store songs from CDs being played The system has a 40 0 GB 9 3 GB for music storage capacity with navigation system or a 2 0 GB 800 MB for music storage capacity without navigation system The following CDs can be recorded in the Music Box audio system e CDs that co
120. side remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing it to the side 2 Draw out the extension sun visor from the main sun visor to block from further glare MIRRORS SPA2447 INSIDE MIRROR Adjust the height and the angle of the inside mirror to the desired position SPA2422A Type A Manual anti glare type The night position 4 will reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night Use the day position 2 when driving in daylight hours WARNING Use the night position only when ne cessary because it reduces rear view Clarity SPA2450 Type B Automatic anti glare type The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlights of the following vehicle The anti glare system will be automatically turned on when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position When the anti glare system is turned on the indicator light will illuminate and excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced Type A Push the l switch to make the inside rearview mirror operate normally and the indicator light will turn off Push the I switch again to turn the system on Type B Push the switch C to make the inside rearview mirror operate normally The indicator light will turn off Push the I switch D to turn the system on Do not allow any object to cover the sens
121. specific channels to skip while using the TUNE SEEK CATEGORY or Menu Categories feature e Favorite Artists amp Songs Stores the current artist or song that is being played Touch the Alert key to be reminded when the stored artist or song is playing ona station while listening to XM e Categories Selecting a category will go to the first channel in that category as defined by XM Radio e Direct Tune Inputs the channel number by using a keypad Text models without navigation system When the Text key is selected with the multi function controller on the display and then the ENTER button is pushed while the satellite radio is being played the text information listed below will be displayed on the screen e CH Name e Category e Name Title Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 69 e Other Compact Disc CD player operation The CD slot is located on the instrument lower panel Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position and insert the Compact Disc CD into the slot with the label side facing up The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing After loading the CD the number of tracks on the CD and the play time will appear on the display If the radio is already operating it will auto matically turn off and the CD will play If the system has been turned off while the CD was playing pushing the ON OFF button w
122. still performed the power steering may stop and the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning light will illuminate Stop the engine and push the ignition switch to the OFF position The temperature of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system will go down and the power assist level will return to normal after starting the engine The hydraulic pump electric power steering warning light will go off Avoid repeating such steering wheel operations that could cause the hydraulic pump electric power steering system to overheat You may hear a noise from the front of the vehicle when the steering wheel is operated This is not a malfunction If the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running it may indicate the hydraulic pump electric power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing Have the hydraulic pump electric power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer When the hydraulic pump electric power steer ing warning light illuminates with the engine running the power assist for the steering will cease operation but you will still have control of the vehicle At this time greater steering efforts are required to operate the steering wheel especially in sharp turns and at low speeds BRAKE SYSTEM BRAKING PRECAUTIONS The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits If one circuit malfunctions you will still have braking at two wheels
123. the _ button and select the Connect Phone key The system is searching for your phone Using your handset look for a Bluetooth device called MY CAR When requested by the handset enter the PIN 1234 Exiting screen cancels search Cancel SAA2520 When a PIN code appears on the screen operate the compatible Bluetooth cellular phone to enter the PIN code The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for the details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth or call NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on pairing NISSAN recom mended cellular phones When the connection process is completed the screen will return to the Phone menu display PHONE SELECTION Up to 5 cellular phones can be registered to the system To switch to connect another cellular phone push button and select the Con nected Phones key The registered cellular phones are shown on the list If you select a cellular phone that is different from the one currently connected the newly selected phone will be connected to the system VEHICLE PHONEBOOK This vehicle has two phonebooks available for hands free use Depending on the phone the system may automatically download the entire cell phone s phonebook into the Handset Phonebook For the details about downloading a phonebook see PHONE SETTING later in this
124. the amp button 8 The SA mode will be explained Follow the instructions provided by the system 9 When training is finished the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded 10 The system will announce that speaker adaptation has been completed and the system is ready The SA mode will stop if e The amp button is pressed for more than 5 seconds in SA mode e The vehicle is driven during SA mode e The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or LOCK position Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 131 Training phrases During the SA mode the system instructs you to say the following phrases The system will prompt you for each phrase phonebook transfer entry diaal30429 delete call back number Incoming Transfer entry 8 pause 9 3 2 pause 7 delete all entries call 72409 phonebook delete entry next entry dial star 2170 yes no select Missed dial85692 Bluetooth on Outgoing call3 1902 9 7 pause pause 3 0 8 cancel call back number call star 2095 delete phone dial8305 1 Record Name 4 3 pause 2 9 pause O delete redial number phonebook list names call805 41 correction connect phone dial 74018 previous entry delete dial9 7266 call 76301 4 132 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems e go back e cal56280 e dial66437 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system sh
125. the seats to the rearmost position and tilting up the seatback after use SSS1149 3RD ROW SEATS Reclining Pull the strap on the seatback A and lean back Release the strap at the desired angle The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit See PRECAU TIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE later in this section The seatback may also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is parked Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING After adjustment check to be sure the seat is securely locked Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly See PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE later in this section 1 7 HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNING Head restraints supplement the other vehicle safety systems They may pro vide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions Adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section Check th
126. the air conditioner only when necessary When cruising at highway speeds it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag Use the recommended viscosity engine oll See ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION in the 9 Technical and consumer information section PARKING PARKING ON HILLS WARNING Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P Park Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident Make sure the selector lever has been pushed as far forward as it can SSD0488 go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could un knowingly activate switches or con trols Unattended children could become involved in serious acci dents Firmly apply the parking brake 2 Move the selector lever to the P Park position Starting and driving 5 27 3 To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated e HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB A Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle fo
127. the following settings e Audio File Playback Switch to the audio playback mode This item is displayed only when the USB memory contains audio files e Play Mode Select the Normal or 1 Track Repeat play mode 10 Key Search Select the 10 Key Search key to open the number entry screen Input the number to be searched and select the OK key The specified folder file will be played Display To adjust the image quality of the screen select the preferred adjustment items DRC DRC Dynamic Range Compression auto matically adjusts the soundtrack volume level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers Audio Select the preferred language for audio Subtitle Select the preferred language for subtitle Display Mode Select the Normal Wide Cinema or Full mode BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO models with navigation system Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth Streaming Audio If you have a compatible Bluetooth device with streaming audio A2DP profile you can set up the wireless connection between your Bluetooth device and the in vehicle audio system This connection allows you to listen to the audio from the Bluetooth device using your vehicle speakers It also may allow basic control of the device for playing and skipping audio files using the AVRCP Blue tooth profile All Bluetooth Devices do not have the same level of controls for AVRCP P
128. the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver For the front passenger the occupant classification sensors are also monitored Based on information from the sensors only one front air bag may inflate in a crash depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted Additionally the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions depending on the information provided by the occupant classification sensors If the front passenger air bag is OFF the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated if the seat is unoccupied the light will not be illuminated but the air bag will be off See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section for further details One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper perfor mance of the system If you have any questions about your air bag system contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability you may also contact NISSAN Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner s Manual When a front air bag inflates a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause Irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Front air bags along with th
129. the small plastic clips as illustrated Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag CAUTION Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the mounting surface of the engine Failure to do so could lead to engine damage 7 Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oll 8 9 10 11 12 13 Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight resistance is felt then tighten additionally more than 2 3 turn Oil filter tightening torque 11 to 15 ft lb 14 7 to 20 5 N m Install the plastic cover Clean and re install the drain plug with a new washer Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench Drain plug tightening torque 22 to 29 ft Ib 29 to 39 N m Do not use excessive force Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening and install the oil filler cap securely See CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS in the 9 Technical and consumer information section for drain and refill capacity The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time Use these specifications for reference only Always use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine Start the engine and check for leakage around the drain plug and the oil filter Correct as required Turn the engine off and wait mor
130. the tone SAA2532 Getting Started Before using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system for the first time you can confirm how to use commands by viewing the Getting Started section of the User Guide 1 Select the Getting Started key 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the multi function controller Tutorials on the operation of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system If you choose Using the Address Book Finding a Street Address or Placing Calls you can view tutorials on how to perform these operations using NISSAN Voice Recognition Information User Guide 3 88066262200 Digits were not recognized correctly Please check the analysis of your speech for possible improvements Soft Good Loud Volume of voice bo Slow Good Fast eo Speed Early Good Late o Start of speaking SAA2534 Let s Practice This mode helps learn how to use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system 1 Select the Let s Practice key 2 After the message screen appears push the TALK switch on the steering wheel 3 Speak the displayed number after the tone The evaluation screen will be displayed and the result can be confirmed 4 136 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Information User Guide Tips on Speaking Commands Say commands when there are minimal background sounds Say voice commands clearly Av
131. to be added 3 Tighten cell plugs Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary see JUMP STARTING in the 6 In case of emergency section If the engine does not start by jump starting the battery may have to be replaced Contact a NISSAN dealer VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM CAUTION e Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely e Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery The variable voltage control system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator DRIVE BELT SDI2707 Alternator Drive belt auto tensioner Crankshaft pulley Air conditioner compressor WARNING Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt The engine could rotate unexpect edly AOD 1 Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear cuts fraying or looseness If the belt is in poor condition or loose have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 15 2 Have the belt condition checked regularly 8 16 Maintenance and do it yourself SPARK PLUGS WARNING Be
132. to the vehicle bumper or axle The safety chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the bumper Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners Trailer lights AA CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system a commercially available power type module converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light stoplight and turn signal circuits as a Signal source The module con verter must draw no more than 15 milllamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits Using a module converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle s electrical system See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain the proper equipment and to have it installed Trailer lights should comply with federal and or local regulations For assistance in hooking up trailer lights contact a NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer dealer Trailer brakes If your trailer is equipped with a braking system make sure it conforms to federal and or local regulations and that it is properly installed WARNING Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system Pre towing tips e Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose up or nose down
133. unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms Some examples of dangerous riding posi tions are shown in the illustrations e Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained SSS0099 Pre teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat if possible e Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child See CHILD RESTRAINTS earlier in this section for details SSS0009 SSS0100 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 49 Do not lean against the doors or windows Do not lean against the doors or windows SSS0833 1 50 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0140 SSS0162 WARNING Front seat mounted side impact sup plemental air bags and roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bags e The side impact and certain supple mental air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a front impact rear impact rollover or lower se verity side collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents The seat belts the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when yo
134. use of oil additives The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature Because of this it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high quality genuine NISSAN oil filter When replacing use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters Using an engine oil and filter other than the specified quality or exceed ing recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval Oil and filter change intervals depend Technical an
135. vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed pull to the side of the road in a safe area Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation See IF YOUR VEHI CLE OVERHEATS in the 6 In case of emergency section of this manual CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from impro per towing procedures are not covered by NISSAN warranties Total trailer load Tongue load Tongue load x 100 10to 15 Total trailer load ST10542 Tongue load When using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch keep the tongue load between 10 to 15 of the total trailer load within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following Towing Load Specification chart If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load T11012M MAXIMUM GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT GVW MAXIMUM GROSS AXLE WEIGHT GAW The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle passengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment In addition front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options Technical and consumer information 9 17 required to achieve the rating Addit
136. warning light OFF off indicator light g Blind Spot Warning BSW 9 11 3 system warning light orange BRAKE Brake warning light Charge warning light Engine oil pressure warning light p Hydraulic pump electric power steering warning light KEY Intelligent Key system warning a light Low tire pressure warning light a Master warning light A Seat belt warning light 2 if so equipped Continuously Variable Trans mission CVT position indicator Cruise indicator light 2 15 ssam SF Front passenger air bag status 9 15 a light E High beam indicator light 2 15 be Low beam indicator light 2 15 Malfunction Indicator Light 9 15 MIL Overdrive off indicator light 2 16 2 11 2 12 2 12 9 19 9 12 9 14 14 0 10 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supple mental restraint system OES anaes ae reece E AE E T EE 1 2 Front SCANS parisis ernn inrer ONAE NREN SEANAR PTErEEIRNE NANE 1 3 2nd TOW SCANS sesseerernsnernnrnrrnrunrrnrrrrnrrrrnnne 1 6 SPAL TOW Ge al eua Enea 1 7 Head restraints ccccccccceeeeeeseeeeeueeeeeeeeeeeneues 1 8 Adjustable headrests seeeeeee renee eee 1 11 PUSS S scercia ctateestebcrtdvaded saree tN 1 13 Flexible Seating qocct cde ces orasbuceeeabeseceneneasenee 1 14 oeat Cl Si cowo trian cucinns einen pee N 1 16 Precautions on seat belt usage 000 1 16 Pregnant WOMEN s2sisccieecseccced
137. weight If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load Do not exceed the 10 to 15 tongue weight specifica tion even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15 If the calculated tongue weight Is less than 10 reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION CHART Unit lb kg MODEL WEIGHT 8 500 3 856 RECOMMENDED EQUIPMENT 2 Sway Control Device SCD 1 All towing above 1 000 Ib 454 kg requires the use of trailer brakes NISSAN recommends the use of a tandem axle trailer whenever towing above 3 000 Ib 1 361 kg 2 A sway control device is recommended for all towing above 2 000 Ib 907 kg Sway control devices are not offered by NISSAN See a professional trailer hitch outlet for a properly designed sway control device for your trailer Technical and consumer information 9 19 TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from a NISSAN dealer Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds rough road surfaces or passing trucks WARNING Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings Your vehicle may be capable of t
138. where no obstacles exist Static Caused by thunderstorms electrical power lines electric signs and even traffic lights 4 44 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Satellite radio reception if so equipped When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced the satellite radio may not work properly This is not a malfunction Wait more than 10 minutes with the satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for the satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data The satellite radio mode requires an active XM Satellite Radio subscription The satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam The satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal If possible do not put cargo near the satellite antenna A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception iSe DIGITAL AUDIO SAA0480 Compact Disc CD player Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot This could damage the CD and or CD changer player Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and or CD changer During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the humidity If this occurs remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player complete
139. will start moving in the reverse direction and stop at the fully opened position Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 11 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM WARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should con tact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influ ences before use e The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed The FAA advises that radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks including the lift gate using the remote controller function or pushing the re quest switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse The operating environment and or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system 3 12 Pre driving checks and adjustments CAUTION e Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehi cle e Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio signals Environmental conditions may interfe
140. with auto light system eeeeeee 2 36 ON aE gates tom EE E eaten rune ates eee 2 36 Heated seats if So equipped ccccec cece seen eens 2 36 Blind Spot Warning BSW switch if so ie ea ene ee ee ee ee eee ee 2 38 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch 2 38 Power oulle vccccoracssdtemetccheadecoesaaeavendtacduanccasa 2 39 DLOVADS a6 sich ens naad tee auderaabexsnpngiasteveniexahasteandeassees 2 41 Cup Dolda genre saneecceateedattesuaysani ene ceencsetiessar 2 41 Sunglasses holder if so equipped 0008 2 43 Ee aE E EE E E ETE 2 44 Instrument lower box if so equipped 2 44 Console DOK csennni reei sn eR EEn ORA 2 44 Cargo floor bOX sssssssssssssesssssrsrsrrrrrrrrrrrrrrne 2 45 OOR ener a E E 2 46 Roof rack if So EQUIPPEd ceceeeeeeeeeee ease 2 47 GOIE MOOK Se veces er in teres EESE 2 48 Sunshade if SO equipped ccceeeeeeeaeaeeeeeaees 2 48 VVG OWS arois rennara AREE NETERA 2 48 Power WINdOWS ccccecccuccuccuuceuceuceaueeunenneans 2 48 Moonroof if so CEQUIPPEC ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 2 51 Automatic Moooi cece cecssenuvecceecdtecheerateanens 2 51 Front MONO Ossessione EEA 2 51 Rear moonroof sssssssrsrrsrssssssessrrrrrrrrrrrnee 2 52 If the front or rear moonroof does not operate 2 53 Interior NOMS och cocectescsndintesnecidaccuysadguatetebensstades 2 53 AO MONS E E A E E ET 2 53 Rear personal NQWIS 22cccceresi
141. 000 F 000000000000004 6 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX H 6 15 Down i7 O XXXXXXXXX 0 00 Repeat All SAA2611 Models without navigation system Audio file operation or PLAY When the DISC AUX or AUX button is pushed with the system off and the USB memory inserted the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and a USB memory Is inserted push the DISC AUX or AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode MA or Gr 7 Next Previous File and Fast Forward Rewind When the gt t or mas button is pushed for more than 1 5 seconds while a USB memory is being played the USB memory will play while forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the USB memory will return to normal play speed When the w or 44 button is pushed for less than 1 5 seconds while the USB memory is being played the next track or the beginning of the current track on the USB memory will be played The multi function controller can also be used to select tracks when the USB memory is being played 4 76 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Folder selection To change to another folder on the USB memory turn the FOLDER selector or choose a folder displayed on the screen using the multi function controller T REPEAT RPT RANDOM RDM When the RPT RDM button is pushed while the USB memory is played the play pattern can be ch
142. 2539 SAA2540 mand using a natural voice Speaking too 8 The system announces Please say the last 10 The system announces Dial or Change slow or too loudly may further decrease four digits or say change number Number recognition performance 9 Speak 6 2 0 0 11 Speak Dial 12 The system makes a call to 800 662 6200 Note e You can also speak 800 662 6200 10 continuous digits or 662 6200 7 con tinuous digits if the area code is not necessary However the 3 3 4 digit group ing is recommended for improved recogni tion See How to speak numbers earlier in this section 4 144 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Voice Recognition Voice Recognition Phone Y l SL 2 Phone Dial Number 4J Navigation Vehicle Phonebook 2 Information Handset Phonebook 4 Audio 4 Call Histo WY Help 4J International Call To exit hold the TALK switch To exit hold the TALK switch SAA1859 SAA2535 SAA2536 Example 2 Placing an international call to 2 The system announces Would you like to 4 Speak International Call the phone number 011 81 111 222 3333 access Phone Navigation Information or Help 1 Push the TALK y amp switch located on the g steering wheel 3 Speak Phone Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 145 Voice Recognition International Call Y
143. 3 Map IONS 2sesceeeeeraceectoseenuvecteteceiectetoues 2 53 Master warning light isses 2 14 Mechanical key Intelligent Key system 3 3 Memory storage Automatic drive positioner 3 37 Meter TH COMPUTE sis cccxtuetecstactecstiedenseseues 2 21 Meters and gaugeS icccecntscviecenedldideetexetenss 2 4 Instrument brightness control 5 2 34 Mirror INSIGS MIOT ncaeeencedttontereeertaensentebecees 3 32 Outside Mirrors 2204ee2tencttesbestantaugegntees 3 34 Vanity MIOT esetissisinieeen niei ana tices 3 35 Monitor Rearview monitor cceceeeeeeeees 4 29 Mood liQh Sic aaa e R a 2 55 Moonroot eeo EET 2 51 Multi function controller vi5 cvecsehesserenteewiewr lt ees 4 4 N New vehicle break in 0ccceeeeeeeee eee eees 5 26 NISSAN Mobile entertainment system MES 4 98 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System 2 27 NISSAN voice recognition system 4 134 O Odometer usses enneren rrene errenneren 2 5 Off road recovery s ssssrsrererrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrn 5 6 Oil Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants ssssessrrerrr ereere rren 9 2 Changing engine oil and filter 05 8 9 Checking engine oil level asaneenae nn 8 8 PNGING Oll ces cecseateuy ene aana kie iaa 8 8 Engine oil viscosity Jeucavicavenssececcoeiacsaeees 9 5 Oil filter replacement indicator 2 20 Operation Indicators for operation 2 18 Outside air temperature
144. 4 Install the license plate with screws sold separately Screws Use a screw of 1 4 inch 6 mm in diameter and approximately 5 8 inch 16 mm in length Screws ST10820 Technical and consumer information 9 11 VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION WARNING e Itis extremely dangerous to ride in a Cargo area inside the vehi cle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle e Curb Weight actual weight of your vehicle vehicle weight including standard and optional equipment fluids emergency tools and spare tire assembly This weight does not in clude passengers and cargo e GVW Gross Vehicle Weight curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo 9 12 Technical and consumer information GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle passengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment This information is located on the F M V S S C M V S S label GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating maximum weight load limit specified for the front or rear axle This informa tion is located on th
145. ATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with is found later in this section Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time unless otherwise specified Doors and engine hood Check that all doors and the engine hood operate properly Also ensure that all latches lock securely Lubricate hinges latches latch pins rollers and links if necessary Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials check lubrication frequently Lights Clean the headlights on a regular basis Make sure that the headlights stop lights tail lights turn signal lights and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely Also check headlight aim Road wheel nuts lug nuts When checking the tires make sure no wheel nuts are missing and check for any loose wheel nuts Tighten if necessary Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 7 500 miles 12 000 km Tires Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips If necessary adjust the pressure in all tires including the spare to the pressure specified Check carefully for damage cuts or excessive wear Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal valve core and cap when the
146. CAUTION Always carry the mechanical key in stalled in the key VALET HAND OFF When you have to leave a key with a valet give them the Intelligent Key itself after removing the mechanical key to protect your belongings To prevent the glove box from being opened during valet hand off follow the procedures below 1 Remove the mechanical key from the In telligent Key Lock the glove box with the mechanical key 3 Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet keeping the mechanical key in your pocket or bag Insert the mechanical key into the Intelligent Key when you retrieve your vehicle For glove box lock see STORAGE in the 2 Instruments and controls section 3 4 Pre driving checks and adjustments DOORS WARNING Always have the doors locked while driving Along with the use of seat belts this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors and will help keep out intruders Before opening any door always look for and avoid oncoming traffic Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could un knowingly activate switches or con trols Unattended children could become involved in serious acci dents SPA2527 B LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors simultaneously usin
147. CREEN models with navigation system earlier in this section o m Ful PSs Answer Answer Incoming Call 0 00 XXXXXXXXXXX Hold Call Reject Call 1 3 SAA2525 RECEIVING A CALL When you hear a phone ring the display will change to the incoming call mode To receive a call perform one of the following procedures listed below a Select the Answer key b Pushthe button on the steering wheel There are some options available when receiving a call Select one of the following displayed on the screen e Answer Accept an incoming call to talk e Hold Call Put an incoming call on hold e Reject Call Reject an incoming call To finish the call perform one of the following procedures listed below a Select the Hang up key b Pushthe button on the steering wheel Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 117 o m Ful Call in Progress 0 15 1 5 XXXXXXXXXXX SAA3587 DURING A CALL There are some options available during a call Select one of the following displayed on the screen if necessary e Hang up Finish the call e Use Handset Transfer the call to the cellular phone e Mute Mute your voice to the person e Keypad Using the touch tone send digits to the connected party for using services such as voicemail e Cancel Mute This will appear after Mute is selected Mute will be c
148. Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh or One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh e Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh NOT One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred and NOT One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred e Numbers can be spoken in small groups The system will prompt you to continuing entering digits if desired Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more six six two The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more six two zero zero U N You can say Star for and Pound for at any time in any position of the phone number Available only when using the Special Dialing command Example 1 555 1212 123 One five five five one two one two star one two three kkk 1 Say pound for Say star for available when using the Special Dialing command and the Send command during a call Say plus for available only when using the Special Dialing command Say pause for a 2 second pause available only when storing a phone book number See Making a call by entering a phone number later in this section and LIST OF V
149. IRE PRESSURE warning appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h For more details see WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS in the 2 Instru ments and controls section and TIRE PRES SURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS in the 5 Starting and driving section WARNING e If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sud den steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possi ble Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury Check the tire pres sure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may be flat If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wh
150. If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extre mely deteriorated the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illumi nate If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated the VDC warning light amp may illuminate When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warn ing light amp may illuminate Do not drive on these types of roads When driving on an unstable sur face such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the VDC warning light amp may illuminate This is not a malfunction Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface If wheels or tires other than the 5 32 Starting and driving NISSAN recommended ones are used the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warn ing light amp may illuminate The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing apply deicer through the key hole If the lock becomes frozen heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob ANTI FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the outside temperature will drop below 32 F 0 C check the anti freeze to assure proper winter protect
151. If the vehicle is in motion some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Initialization When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia lized which may take up to one minute If the wa button is pushed before the initialization completes the system will accept any com mand Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system observe the follow ing e Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly e Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command Otherwise the command will not be received properly e Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds e Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words Giving voice command To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition push and release the amp button located on the steering wheel After the tone sounds speak a command The command given is picked up by the microphone and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted e If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again say Help and the system will repeat them e fa command is not recognized the system announces Command not recognized Please say again R
152. KNOB To lock the door individually move the inside lock knob to the lock position 4 then close the door To unlock move the inside lock knob to the unlock position When locking the door without Intelligent Key be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle SPA2300 LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH Operating the power door lock switch will lock or unlock all the doors The switches are located on the driver s and front passenger s door armrests To lock the doors push the power door lock switch to the lock position with the driver s or front passenger s door open then close the door When locking the door this way be certain not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle To unlock the doors push the power door lock Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 5 switch to the unlock position 2 Lockout protection When the power door lock switch driver or front passenger is moved to the lock position with any door open all doors will lock and unlock automatically With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle and any door open all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS e All doors will be locked automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH 24 km h e All doors will be unlocked automatically whe
153. N dealer MOONROOF if so equipped WARNING In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof Always use seat belts and child restraints Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing CAUTION Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the moonroof before opening Do not place any heavy object on the moonroof or surrounding area AUTOMATIC MOONROOF The moonroof only operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position The automatic moonroof is operational for about 45 seconds even if the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position If the driver s door or the passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds power to the moonroof is canceled 0 9 TT B SIC4643 FRONT MOONROOF Sunshade The sunshade will open automatically when the front moonroof is opened However it must be closed manually Sliding When the A side of the switch is pushed the front moonroof will fully open When the side of the switch is pushed the front moonroof will close To stop the moonroof while closing release the switch Tilting To tilt up first close the moonroof Instruments and controls 2 51 Push the side of the switch The moonroof will automatically tilt up all the way To tilt down push the A side of the switch The roof will sto
154. OICE COMMANDS later in this section for more information 4 124 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems NOTE For best results say phone numbers as single digits The voice command Help is available at any time Please say the Help command to get information about how to use the system INFO e f you are controlling the telephone system by voice command for the first time or do not know the appropriate voice command speak Help The system announces the available commands e When you speak numbers you can speak both zero or oh for O Manual command selection Commands can be selected manually While the commands are displayed on the screen select a command by operating the Tune switch and then push the amp button Once a command is manually selected the voice command function is cancelled To return to voice command mode push the sa button to cancel the current operation and then perform the first procedure of voice command SAA1858 CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel wa e PHONE SEND Push the button to initiate a VR session or answer an incoming call You can also use the amp button to interrupt system feedback and give a command at once sma PHONE END While the voice recognition system is active press the s button to
155. ONOMY 2csceccusortnesovesetetenideawes 5 26 Fuel economy information display 4 9 Fuel octane Talnd ccavseascectveseceasutaueeenive 9 3 Fuel recommendation sss sesseere resres 9 3 F el filler Cap sariren 3 29 Fuel filler DOOlsascwustewdevne pene docmeeeecerses 3 29 Ces a eee ee eee 2 7 LOOSE FUEL CAP warning 3 31 FUSES oen o E ein iaeeenccenss 8 20 F sible INKS a achasauiccedotasonaesecsecuseevenetewx 8 20 G Garage door opener HomeLink Universal TANSCEWE xttnnovcaseensuesnsendekebevoewacexevedes 2 56 AS CAD arcane a eotreceettetrenectat ees eee 3 29 Cs ae ee eee nee eee ee ee rns eee 2 4 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 Fuel gauge 22 caves kosigeesdissccdacagheseedaaaed 2 7 Odometer eeren sess ere sacar ete y see AS 2 5 SPCCUOMEE sss ceretesessccdsadaeeestaadvavess 2 5 TACHOMCtSls 2 c2ciiedsacenncscaseseenkdiadseeexns 2 6 Tp COMPUTE 1 224 dectecetecssoeecetiitdetoes 2 21 General maintenance ccceeeeee eee ee eeees 8 2 Glove DOX scccrconsdecuseagetineteteaeeseactenawats 2 44 H Hands free phone system Bluetooth models with navigation system 4 110 Hands free phone system Bluetooth models without navigation system 4 121 Hazard warning flasher switch 5 2 35 Head FEStalitSiccthccetcceeteneveoececed t saceeskeces 1 8 Headlights Aiming COMUO2 cs socizentemsseesessageeetenes 2 33 Bulb replacement
156. Off Doky G PI I Speed Sensing Wiper Interval o oN ON G3 Settings gt Comfot 1 aed A7 ee O OCON TiN rno mieror uminon nN e F comser OD OF Tif imors OC It JEJ Speca Sensing wporrina D fi Ef Sstecive Dorme Co F F Down Cabin lighting when unlocking ddorsP SAA3149 Models without navigation system HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE SCREEN Vehicle functions are viewed on the display screen in menus To select each key item highlight the preferred item using the multi function controller and push the ENTER button Whenever a menu selection is made or menu item is highlighted different areas on the screen provide you with important information See the following for details 1 Header Shows the path used to get to the current screen i e push SETTING button gt choose Comfort menu item 2 Menu Selections Shows the options to choose within that menu screen 3 UP DOWN Movement indicator Shows that the multi function controller may be used to move UP DOWN on the screen and select more options 4 Menu Items Counter Shows the total number of items listed across all pages for the current menu i e 3 7 5 Footer Information Line Provides more information if available about the menu selection currently high lighted i e Adjust head lamp on time after shut off VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS models with center multi function control pan
157. RD twice HAZARD none Usi butt i Using or g button EAD One ORNS nano Push for more than 2 sec HAZARD once HORN once HAZARD 3 times Push ce for more than 2 sec L HAZARD INDICATOR MODE _ Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 23 HOOD When opening the hood 1 Pull the hood lock release handle 4 located below the instrument panel the hood will then spring up slightly 2 Locate the lever in between the hood and grille and push the lever sideways with your fingertips Raise the hood Remove the support rod 4 and insert it into the slot Hold the coated part A when removing or resetting the support rod Avoid direct contact with the metal parts as they may 3 24 Pre driving checks and adjustments accident e If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment to avoid injury do not open the hood SPA2858 be hot immediately after the engine has been stopped When closing the hood 1 Reset the support rod to its original position 2 Slowly move the hood down to latch the lock Push the hood down to lock the hood securely into place WARNING e Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an LIFT GATE WARNING Always be sure the lift gate has been closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving Do not drive with the l
158. RIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY in the 2 Instruments and controls section 5 10 Starting and driving PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS LOCK Normal parking position The ignition switch can only be locked in this position The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key ACC Accessories This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running ON Normal operating position This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories OFF The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position until the selector lever is moved to the P Park position CAUTION Do not leave the vehicle with the push button ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not run ning for an extended period This can discharge the battery EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving perform the following procedure e Rapidly push the push button ignition switch 3 consecutive times or e Push and hold the push button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds SSD0944 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS CHARGE If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation sta
159. S1176 If so equipped for driver s seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 5 mats rr afc t 1 2ND ROW SEATS Seat adjustment WARNING e The 2nd row seats are heavy Be careful when folding and unfolding e To avoid injury to yourself and others keep hands and body clear when folding SSS1158 Forward and backward Pull the lever 2 up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Release the lever to lock the seat in position Reclining To recline the seatback pull the lever up and lean back To bring the seatback forward pull the lever up and lean your body forward Release the lever to lock the seatback in position The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit See PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT 1 6 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system USAGE later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission in the P Park position Entry to the 3rd row seat The 2nd row seats can tilt and slide forward for easy entry exit to from the 3rd row seats To enter or exit the 3rd row seat pull up the lever 1 or 2 to tilt down the seatback and slide the seat forward Return and lock the 2nd row seats by sliding
160. SC button is pushed while a DVD is being played and it will turn off automatically after a period of time To turn it on again push the DISC AUX or DISC button again Adjust Front Rear display Front display To adjust the front display push the SETTING button while the DVD is being played select the Others key and then select the Display key To adjust the display ON OFF brightness tint color and contrast select the Display Adjust ment key and then select the preferred key for setting You can then adjust each item using the multi function controller After changes have been made press the BACK button to save the setting Rear display To adjust the rear display push the DISP Display button on the remote controller To adjust aspect color system 3D Y C filter and picture mode select each key using the joystick on the remote controller and tilt the joystick to right or left Push the BACK button to apply the settings and return to the previous display DVD operation keys To operate the DVD drive select the desired key displayed on the operation screen using the multi function controller il PAUSE Select the m key to pause the DVD To resume playing the DVD use the PLAY key To pause the DVD it is also possible to push the n button on the keypad of the remote controller gt pray Select the P key to start playing the DVD f
161. Samoa e Hawaii e Alaska e Pacific Voice Recognition Image Viewer Adjust comfort amp convenience settings SAA2489 Others settings models with navigation system The Others settings display will appear when pushing the SETTING button and selecting the Others key The following items are available e Comfort e Language amp Units e Voice Recognition e Image Viewer e Camera Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 17 Settings Comfort Auto Interior Illumination Light Sensitivity lt I e gt Light Off Delay gt gt Selective Door Unlock Intelligent Key Lock Unlock O ON 1 8 Cabin lighting when unlocking doors SAA3151 Models with navigation system Settings gt Comfort d e Z B Auto Interior Illumination O ON Light Sensitivity g Light Off Delay OC 45s _ Selective Door Unlock Oo ON E Intelligent Key Lock Unlock ON d o wy co co co co H Q O SAA3150 Models without navigation system Comfort settings Models with navigation system The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button selecting the Others key and then selecting the Comfort key This key does not appear on the display until the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position Models without navigation system The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button
162. Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment 1 3 Front power seat adjustment 1 4 Front Seals ocivcavecdecexes a i Eara 1 3 Seat belt s Child Salely cccuvsctseiieniecteereesesesetetacus 1 26 IANS aara rn E EE 1 26 Injured PEISONS s s s ceee 1 19 Larger Chilcren cisieicveredsoeenteerenteadest 1 27 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 16 Pregnant WOMEN scinciscnsisnmesticeeseanneese es 1 19 Seat belt cleaning tecnicos iscecsederstaecetiasses 7 6 Seat belt extenders nsnss esner areren 1 25 Seat belt hooks 020cesacewsewacsxaksesaebbeses 1 25 Seat belt maintenance ccceeee eee ees 1 25 Seat belt warning light and chime 2 14 Seat Dolls e aore a ee ee eee 1 16 Seat belts with pretensioners 1 58 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 24 Small children sc2scssaceeeercdscecsdcerresaccess 1 26 Three point type cccc0ceimeeorncetecexseiieecies 1 19 Seat s Driver side Memory ssssissrrrerrrrsrerrrn 3 36 Heated seats unanenn 2 36 SES e ERE E 1 2 Security system Vehicle security system 2 25 Security system NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Engine Staltendcs cee vesoshscecene scree 2 27 Selector lever Shift lock release cece eee ee eee eens 5 15 Servicing air CONItIONEr cece eee eee eens 4 42 SETTING button nsss deedaestectesentesxesnee 4 12 Shift lock release Transmission 0 000ee 5 15 Shif
163. Speaker Adaptation The voice recognition system Starts 4 Store delete or edit voice data for User 1 SAA2550 SAA2551 4 Select the user whose voice is memorized 6 Select a category to be learned by the by the system system from the following list 5 Select the Start Soeaker Adaptation Learn e Phone Commands ing key e Navigation Commands e Information Commands e Audio Commands e Help Commands The voice commands in the category are displayed Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 155 Settings Speaker Adaptation Sy Dial Number Enters a domestic phone number and dials it Alternate Command Mode ON To exit hold the TALK switch SAA2552 8 The system requests that you repeat a command after a tone 9 After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to 3y speak the command that the system requested 10 When the system has recognized the voice command the voice of the user is learned Push the y amp switch or BACK button to return to the previous screen If the system has learned the command cor rectly the voice command status on the right side of the command turns from None to Stored Continuous Learning Identify voice data by adding a name SAA2553 Speaker Adaptation function settings Edit User Name Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on the screen Delete Voice Data Resets the u
164. TO button The AUTO indicator light will illuminate If the A C indicator light illuminates push the A C button The A C indicator light will turn off Push the temperature control buttons A and W driver s side to set the desired temperature When the DUAL mode is turned off DUAL does not appear on the display Pushing the AUTO button changes both the driver s and front passenger s side temperature Pushing the DUAL button allows the user to independently change the front passenger s side temperature with the passenger side temperature control buttons A or Ww DUAL will appear on the display To cancel the separate temperature setting push the DUAL button DUAL will disappear from the display and the driver s side temperature setting will be applied to both the driver s and front passenger s sides 4 Models with Advanced Climate Control System ACCS Push the gj AUTO auto recircula tion button The indicator light on the AUTO auto recirculation button will illuminate In this mode the sensor Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 37 detects odors and gas to automatically switch between the air recirculation mode and the outside air circulation mode See Advanced climate control system later in this section for details Models without Advanced Climate Con
165. TTING BUTTON in the 4 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems section 2 LO continuous low speed operation 3 HI continuous high speed operation Push the lever up 4 MIST to have one sweep operation of the wiper Pull the lever toward you 6 to operate the washer Then the wiper will also operate several times The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed Q INT intermittent operation can be ad justed by turning the knob toward Slower or Faster When the speed sensing wiper interval function models with center multi function control panel is turned on the intermittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed For example when the vehicle speed is high the intermittent operation speed will be faster Note that the function is set to disabled as REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the rear window glass and obscure your vision Warm the rear window with the defroster before you wash the rear window CAUTION e Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds e Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty e Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some
166. Two digit number 60 This number known as the aspect ratio gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 R The R stands for radial 5 Two digit number 16 This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches Two or three digit number 94 This number is the tire s load index It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law H Tire speed rating You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating DOT XX XX XXX XXXX XX XXX XXX XXXX a ft tt 3 SDI1607 Example 2 TIN Tire Identification Number for a 2 new tire example DOT XX XX XXX XXXX DOT Abbreviation for the Department of Transportation The symbol can be placed above below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number Two digit code Manufacturer s identifi cation mark 3 Two digit code Tire size 4 Three digit code Tire type code Op tional 5 Three digit code Date of Manufacture 6 Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003 If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire Q Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber coated fabric in the tire Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire which include steel nylon p
167. When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal The foot brake should be used for this purpose Do not downshift abruptly on slip pery roads This may cause a loss of control Uy i V At ff Ieee zp SSD1175 Shifting To move the selector lever m Push the button A while depressing the brake pedal wz Push the button A gt Just move the selector lever After starting the engine fully depress the brake pedal push the selector lever button and move the selector lever from the P Park position to any of the desired shift positions Starting and driving 5 13 WARNING Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is in any position while the engine is not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage CAUTION Use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped P Park Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped The brake pedal must be depressed and the selector lever button pushed in to move the selec tor lever from N Neutral or any drive position to P Park Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake first then move the selector lever to the P Park position 5 14 Starting a
168. When the ignition switch is in the ON position the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning light illuminates After starting the engine the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning light turns off This indicates that the electric power steering system is operational If the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running it may indicate the hydraulic pump electric power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing Have the hydraulic pump electric power steering system checked by a NISSAN dealer See HYDRAU LIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM in the 5 Starting and driving section Intelligent Key system warning light After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position this light comes on for about 2 seconds and then turns off This light warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system If the light comes on while the engine is stopped it may be impossible to start the engine If the light comes on while the engine is running you can drive the vehicle However in these cases contact a NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as possible Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly
169. X XXX kPa XX PSI BE RECHARGE SPARE POUR PLUS DE DERECHANGE T XXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS SDI2197 Tire and Loading Information label Vehicle load limit See VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION in the 9 Seating capacity The maximum num Technical and consumer information ber of occupants that can be seated n in the vehicle 8 30 Maintenance and do it yourself Original size The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory Cold tire pressure Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear vehicle handling driveability tire noise etc up to the vehicle s GVWR Tire size see TIRE LABELING later in this section Spare tire size or compact spare tire size if so equipped SDI1949 Checking the tire pressure 1 Remove the valve stem cap from the tire Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways or air will escape If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage Remove the gauge Read the tire pressure on the gauge ste
170. a short time under heavy engine load CAUTION e Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E 85 fuel can damage fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty e E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline e U S government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate per centage for that region FOR GASOLINE ENGINES 1 API certification mark 2 API service symbol ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE COMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance see CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS earlier in this section NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API certification or Interna STI0505 tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC certification and SAE vis cosity standard These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the
171. able head restraint or headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 37 SSS0647 Forward facing step 4 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack SSS0638 Forward facing step 6 After attaching the child restraint test it before you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 1 1 38 Safety Seats seat belts
172. aces such as a garage Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time Keep the lift gate closed while driving otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment If you must drive with the lift gate open follow these precautions 1 Open all the windows 2 Set the amp gt air recirculation to off and the fan control to high to circulate the air If a special body camper or other equipment is added for recreational or other usage follow the manufac turers recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves refrig erators heaters etc may also gen erate carbon monoxide The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever The vehicle is raised for service You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system You have had an accident invol ving damage to the exhaust system underbody or rear of the vehicle e If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the lift gate or the body follow the manufacturer s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle THREE WAY CATALYST The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system Exhaust gases in the three way cat
173. acuesadasdtesesdeiseacss 1 19 Injured WCISONS se so secuhecracnoveensnnsacecensdestenerxs 1 19 Three point type seat belt eeeeeeee eee 1 19 Seat belt extenders ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 25 Seat belt maintenance ccccceeeeeeeee eee eeeeees 1 25 MUG SANG escheat a E R 1 26 WINANS secon ucecteiniceccennenbecscacnedeaioodearasgeaadace 1 26 Small children sccdsanst deed er raed eerndosiindradeneaaciunne 1 26 Larger MGV OR eee ccacteds renne anan ERANA RENN 1 27 Child restraints a4 cos carnadatdacnnentadacamewetatcutinnsteadngs 1 27 Precautions on child restraints 1 28 Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System LATCH orense S A 1 29 Top tether strap child restraint ccceeeeaee Rear facing child restraint installation using EGA aere shinecaseansmnisaad caannececeraadonvessites Rear facing child restraint installation using the SCCM DOI i re oe eee eer eee eer Forward facing child restraint installation using EE a PE E E E EE E Forward facing child restraint installation using the seat belts tacccustcccceeawsderentecusceucseevssreetcts Installing top tether strap 2nd row seats Installing top tether strap 8rd row seat Boock oe oer ieee ee ee ee eee Supplemental restraint SYSteM ccceeeee eee eee es Precautions on supplemental restraint system NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System front S S EOE ES A AE AEI E Front seat mounted side impact sup
174. adian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 e Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system e lf the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child s height and weight Always follow all recommended procedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward facing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle SSS1166 Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with the LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system compatible child restraints This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system With this system you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the following positions only e 2nd row seats e 3rd row seat Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LATCH lower anchor WARNING Failure to follow th
175. ain air bag systems Tampering with the air bag system may result in serious personal in jury For example do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatback or by installing addi tional trim material such as seat covers around the side air bags Work around and on the side air bag and curtain air bag systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer In stallation of electrical equipment 1 57 should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The Supplemental Restraint System SRS wiring harnesses should not be modified or discon nected Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side impact air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identifica tion When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS front seats WARNING e The pretensioners cannot be reused after activation They must be re placed together with the retractor and buckle as a unit e If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but a pretensioner is not activated be sure to have the pre tensioner system checked and if necessary replaced by a NISSAN dealer e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system This is to prevent damage
176. all distance immediately before the closed position that cannot be detected Make sure that all passen gers keep their hands etc clear from the lift gate opening before closing the lift gate Manual mode If power operation is not available the lift gate can be operated manually Power operation may not be available if multiple obstacles have been detected in a single power cycle or if the battery voltage is low When the power door main switch is in the OFF position the lift gate can be opened manually by pushing the lift gate opener switch If the power lift gate opener switch is pushed during power open or close the power operation will be canceled and the lift gate can be operated manually Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 27 Safe Mode If the gas stays of the lift gate 4 lose pressure the power lift gate safe mode is activated When the safe mode is activated the lift gate intermittently closes Then the lift gate will be pulled to the closed and latched position by a motor The power lift gate cannot be opened using the switches at any time in the safe mode Do not operate the lift gate again until it is checked by a NISSAN dealer 3 28 Pre driving checks and adjustments CAUTION e If the power lift gate does not stay open or if the lift gate unexpectedly closes at any time do not operate the lift gate There may be a pres sure loss in one or both of the lift gate gas stays Have the lift gate
177. alyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants WARNING e Do not breathe exhaust gases they contain colorless and odorless car bon monoxide Carbon monoxide is 5 2 Starting and driving WARNING The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot Keep people animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system com ponents Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire CAUTION Do not use leaded gasoline Depos its from leaded gasoline will ser iously reduce the three way catalyst s ability to help reduce ex haust pollutants Keep your engine tuned up Mal functions in the ignition fuel injec tion or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst causing it to overheat Do not keep driving if the engine mis fires or if noticeable loss of perfor mance or other unusual operating conditions are detected Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer e Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire dama ging the three way catalyst e Do not race the engine while warm ing it up e Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS TEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
178. ame amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality AAC M4A Advanced Audio Coding AAC is a lossy audio compression format Audio files that have been encoded with AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver a higher quality of sound than MP3 Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media Writing data once to the media is called a single session and writing more than once is called a multisession ID3 WMA Tag The ID3 WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title artist album title encoding bit rate track time duration etc ID3 tag information is displayed on the A ROOT e The playback order is the order in which the Album Artist Track title line on the display FOLDER files were written by the writing software so Windews and Windows Medot are ede the files might not play in the desired order tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of America and or other countries e Music playback o
179. anceled e Switch Call Select Switch Call to answer another incoming call By selecting Hang up you can end a call and can speak to a caller who is on hold again This function may not be usable depend ing on the model of phone To adjust the person s voice to be louder or quieter push the volume control switch or on the steering wheel or turn the volume control knob on the instrument panel while talking on the phone This adjustment is also available in the SETTING mode 4 118 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems O Ml Full E2 Settings Phone Volume Auto Downloaded Add or edit phonebook entries ssid or edit phonebook entries SAA2527 PHONE SETTING To set up the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to your preferred settings push the SETTING button on the instrument panel and select the PHONE key Edit Vehicle Phonebook To edit the vehicle phonebook use the same procedure as described in VEHICLE PHONE BOOK earlier in this section Delete Phonebook The vehicle phonebook entries can be deleted all at the same time or one by one Download Handset Phonebook Download the contacts registered in a Blue tooth cellular phone Availability of this function depends on each cellular phone The memory downloading procedure from the cellular phone also varies according to each cellular phone See cellular phone Owner s Manua
180. and FM radio Turn the radio TUNE knob for manual tuning e For XM Satellite Radio if so equipped Turn the radio TUNE knob to seek channels from all of the categories when any category is not selected 4 68 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems or SEEK tuning CATE GORY CAT e For AM and FM radio Push the SEEK button mas or w to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station e For XM Satellite Radio if so equipped Push the SEEK button mass or w to tune to the first channel of the next or previous category During satellite radio reception if so equipped the following notices will be displayed under certain conditions e NO SIGNAL No signal is received while the SAT tuner is connected e OFF AIR Broadcasting signed off e CHECK ANTENNA Antenna connection error e LOADING When the initial setting is performed e UPDATING When the satellite radio sub scription is not active SCAN tuning Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low to high frequencies and stop at each broad casting station channel for 5 seconds Pushing the button again during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station channel If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds SCAN tuning moves to the next station channel to Station memory operations 12
181. ange as follows To change the play mode push the RPT button repeatedly and the mode will change as follows Normal 1 Folder Repeat gt 1 Track Repeat gt All Random 1 Folder Random Normal USB Menu sss BAK Menu Movie Playback Playback Folder List SAA2502 Menu models with navigation system There are some options available during play back Select one of the following options that are displayed on the screen if necessary Refer to the following information for each item e Movie Playback Switch to the movie playback mode This item is displayed only when a USB memory contains movie files e Folder List Track List Displays the folder or track list The Movie Playback key is also displayed in this list screen and enables switching to the movie playback mode e Play Mode Select the preferred play mode Text models without navigation system When the Text key is selected on the screen using the multi function controller and then the ENTER button is pushed while a USB memory is being played the music information listed below will be displayed on the screen e Folder title e File title e Song title Album Title e Artist 0 00 00 Wide SAA2503 Movie file operation models with navi gation system Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the USB memory while watching the images PLAY When the DISC AUX button is pushed
182. ar all previously programmed Home Link buttons If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons please refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR CA NADIAN CUSTOMERS Prior to 1992 D O C regulations required hand held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds To program your hand held trans mitter to HomeLink continue to push and hold the HomeLink button note steps 2 through 4 under Programming HomeLink while you push and re push cycle your hand held transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly indicating successful pro gramming NOTE If programming a garage door opener etc it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener com ponents OPERATING THE HomeLink UNIVER SAL TRANSCEIVER HomeLink Universal Transceiver once pro grammed may now be used to activate the garage door etc To operate simply push the appropriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNO SIS If HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand held transmitter information e replace the hand held transmitter batteries with new batteries e position the hand held transmitter with its bat
183. arning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction For additional information see TIRE PRES SURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS in the 5 Starting and driving section For the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning see DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY later in this section WARNING If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch pushed ON have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible If the light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with un der inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If the light still illuminates while driv ing after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may be flat If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a Spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute The light wil
184. arnings and instructions for proper use and in stallation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision The child restraint must be used and installed properly Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Infants and children should never be held on anyone s lap Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another pas senger NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat If you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front seat see FORWARD FACING CHILD RE STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS later in this section Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child A rear facing child re straint must only be used in the rear seat Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle Some child re straints may not fit properly in your vehicle Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted Never use the anchor points for adult seat b
185. art the engine with the air cleaner removed Doing so could result in serious injury WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent Then rinse the blade with clear water If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper replace the blades CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision Maintenance and do it yourself 8 17 REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn 1 Pull the wiper arm 2 Release the lock tab 1 and then move the wiper blade 2 as illustrated 3 Remove the wiper blade Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place Contact a NISSAN dealer for wiper blade rubber replacement 8 18 Maintenance and do it yourself CAUTION After wiper blade replacement re turn the wiper arm to its original position otherwise it may be da maged when the hood is opened Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure SDI2693
186. ase take your vehicle to your NISSAN dealer to check the passenger seat advanced air bag system Until you have confirmed with your dealer that your passenger seat advanced air bag is working prop erly position the occupants in the rear seating positions 1 52 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U S regulations It is also permitted in Canada However all of the information cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed The driver supplemental front impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel The passenger supplemental front impact air bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove box The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper front air bag operation The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage air bag inflators The system monitors information from the Air bag Control Unit ACU seat belt buckle sensors and the occupant classification sensors weight sensors Inflator operation is based on
187. assigned numeric identi fier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Grace note service The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS Gracenote makes no representations or warran ties express or implied regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be unin terrupted Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTI CULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRIN GEMENT GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACE NOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES Copyright Music recognition technolo
188. at than in the front seat This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys tem Air bag system for the front passen ger See SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM later in this section 1 26 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system INFANTS Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint NISSAN recom mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation and use SMALL CHILDREN Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg should remain in a rear facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint Forward facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation and use LARGER CHILDREN Children wh
189. atback If necessary adjust or remove the head restraint or headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit If the head restraint or headrest is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the child restraint is removed See HEAD RE STRAINTS earlier in this section or AD JUSTABLE HEADRESTS earlier in this section for head restraint or headrest adjustment removal and installation informa tion If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint SSS0360B Forward facing step 3 3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for belt routing If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point rear seat installation only See IN STALLING TOP TETHER STRAP 2nd row seats later in this section and INSTAL LING TOP TETHER STRAP 8rd row seat later in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system
190. ated e The sliding doors can be opened by the instrument panel switch A or B even if the sliding door is locked or the power door main switch is in the OFF position OPERATING THE POWER SLIDING DOOR WITH THE INTELLIGENT KEY if so equipped The sliding doors can also be opened and closed by pushing the button on the Intelligent Key See INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM later in this section Sliding door one touch unlock open function if so equipped The sliding doors can be unlocked and opened with a one touch unlock open operation When closed the sliding door will not lock automati cally To lock the sliding doors manually lock the inside knob before closing the sliding door or push the LOCK button on the Intelligent Key after the door is closed See REMOTE KEY LESS ENTRY SYSTEM later in this section OPERATING SLIDING DOOR BY POWER ASSIST To operate pull the inside or outside door handle until you hear the buzzer the door will automatically open or close If the door handle is operated while the sliding door is moving the door will reverse directions and stop at either the full open or closed position SLIDING DOOR AUTO REVERSE FUNCTION If an obstacle is detected while the power sliding door is being operated the door will reverse directions and return to the full open or full closed position If you touch the sensor of the sliding door while the sliding door is closing automatically the door
191. ater in this section Turn signal hazard indicator lights The light flashes when the turn signal switch lever or hazard switch is turned on Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF This indicates that the vehicle dynamic control system and traction control system are not operating AUDIBLE REMINDERS Key reminder chime A chime will sound if the driver side door is opened while the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC position Make sure the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position and take the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle Light reminder chime A chime will sound when the driver side door is opened with the light switch in the pazor Z position and the ignition switch in the ACC or OFF position Turn the light switch off when you leave the vehicle The chime will also sound for 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position with the fog lights on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position Parking brake reminder chime The chime will sound if the vehicle is driven at more than 4 MPH 7 km h with the parking brake applied Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warn ings When a brake pad requires replacement it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion This scraping so
192. ation To operate the rear air conditioning system using the front air conditioner control panel push REAR button the indicator light on the REAR button will illuminate and EAR will appear on the display e Temperature control Push the temperature control buttons A and W driver s side to set the desired temperature e Fan speed control Push the fan speed control 8 button or gg P button to manually control the fan speed e Air flow control Push the MODE button to change the air flow mode The air outlet is fixed at foot level a The air outlet is fixed at both the head and foot level The air outlet is fixed at the head level NOTE Pushing the A C button when the rear air conditioning system is turned on and REA Goes not appear on the display will turn off the rear air conditioning system except when the air flow is set to the position Rear Heating A C off 1 Push the REAR button to display EAR on the front display when the rear air conditioning system is on 2 Switch the air flow mode to wv by pressing the MODE button 3 Push the AUTO button The AUTO indicator light will illuminate 4 Ifthe A C indicator light illuminates push the A C button The A C indicator light will turn off 5 Push the temperature control buttons A and W driver s side t
193. ation US or Tire Safety Information Cana da in the Warranty Information Booklet Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire use the same size tread design speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped See SPECIFICA TIONS in the 9 Technical and consumer information section for recommended types and sizes of tires and wheels WARNING The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands construc tion bias bias belted or radial or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride braking handling ground clearance body to tire clearance tire chain clearance speedometer calibration headlight aim and bum per height Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury If the wheels are changed for any reason always replace with wheels which have the same off set dimen sion Wheels of a different off set could cause premature tire wear degrade vehicle handling character istics and or interference with the brake discs drums Such interfer ence can lead to decreased braking efficiency and or early brake pad shoe wear See WHEELS AND TIRES in the 9 Technical and consumer information section of this manual for wheel off set dimen sions When a Spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for appr
194. ation 4 INFO vehicle and navigation information button and apply the parking brake to view P 4 8 the images on the front center dis 5 SETTING button P 4 12 play screen using devices connected 8 STATUS status display button P 4 7 to the auxiliary input jacks 9 OFF brightness control and display ON OFF button P 4 7 Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C and above 158 F 70 C Operating this system under these condi tions may result in system malfunctions 4 2 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems o o NOJ oS ZS 3 4 e DISP 3 OFF SAA3613 SAA3025 Models without navigation system With navigation system INFO vehicle information button P 4 8 When you use this system make sure the STATUS status display button P 4 7 engine is running call ae ong evens If you use the system with the engine not 34 brightness UP button P 4 7 running ignition ON or ACC for a long fd ECON button P 4 8 time it will discharge the battery and the SETTING button P 4 1 2 engine may not start Multi function controller P 4 4 OFF brightness control and display ON OFF button P 4 7 yy brightness DOWN button P 4 7 SAA3614 Without navigation system Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 3 HOW TO USE MULTI
195. ation of elec trical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The Supplemental Restraint System SRS wiring harnesses should not be modified or disconnected Un authorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system e A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identifica tion When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual 1 56 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS1092 FRONT SEAT MOUNTED SIDE IM PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND ROOF MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE IM PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYS TEMS The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails These systems are designed to meet voluntary guide lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out of position occupants However all of the information cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar t
196. ative cable before e Only touch the plastic base when replacing bulbs When xenon headlights are on they handling the bulb Never touch the produce a high voltage To prevent an glass envelope electric shock never attempt to modify Pi wa or disassemble Always have your xe e Aiming is not necessary after repla non headlights replaced at a NISSAN cing the bulb When aiming adjust dealer For additional information see ment is necessary contact a HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL NISSAN dealer SWITCH in the 2 Instruments and controls section Use the same number and wattage as originally installed as shown in the chart Maintenance and do it yourself 8 25 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS See a NISSAN dealer for replacement NOTE Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts Headlight Low beams Xenon D2S High beam Halogen HB3 Low beam Halogen H11 Front turn signal park light 25 Front fog light if so equipped H8 Front side marker light T10 Rear combination light turn signal WY21W stop tail W21 5W back up W16W License plate light T10 Front map light Rear personal light Vanity mirror light if so equipped Step light High mounted stop light Cargo light Glove box light 8 26 Maintenance and do it yourself Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A B C D E or F When replacing a bulb first remove the lens and
197. ats WARNING To ensure proper operation of the passenger s advanced air bag system please observe the following items Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9 Ibs 4 kg on the seatback or in the seatback pocket Do not hang anything from the head restraint Do not store cargo behind the seat that can press into the seatback Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear seat If the front seat does contact the rear seat the air bag system may deter mine a sensor malfunction has oc curred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash If a forward facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel If the child restraint does contact the in strument panel the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag may deploy in a collision Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illumi nate See CHILD RESTRAINTS earlier in this section for informa tion about installing and using child restraints Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status light If you notice that the front passen ger air bag status light is not operating in accordance with the above description ple
198. ay the next three digits Dial or say Change Number International Call To exit hold the TALK switch To exit hold the TALK switch To exit hold the TALK switch Manual Controls SAA2536 SAA2537 SAA2538 6 The system announces Please say the next 4 Speak Dial Number 5 Speak 8 0 0 three digits or dial or say change number Selecting the Manual Controls key switches the screen to the keypad to input 7 Speak 6 6 2 the phone number manually Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 143 e You can only say a phone number using the 3 3 4 grouping 7 digits and 10 digits using this command Please use the International Voice Recognition Dial Number Y l Voice Recognition Dial Number Y l Call command for all other formats Sel e GEO e e Hyon eey Chn Neier chain phon number entry the system will automatically 4 Change Number sd a 28 request that you repeat the number using j a wee Help the 3 3 4 format In this case please say the Manual Controls Manual Controls area code first and then follow the prompts Say the last four digits or say Change Please say Dial or say Change plumber Mumbar e Do not add a 1 in front of the area code To exit hold the TALK switch To exit hold the TALK switch when speaking phone numbers e f the system does not recognize your command please try repeating the com SAA
199. battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the entry exit function will not work though this function was set on before In such a case after connecting the battery or replacing with a new fuse open and close the driver s door more than two times after the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK position from the ON position The entry exit function will be activated MEMORY STORAGE Two positions for the driver s seat and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory Follow this procedure to use the memory system 1 Move the selector lever to the P Park position 2 Push the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Adjust the driver s seat and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operat ing each adjusting switch For additional information see SEATS in the 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section and OUTSIDE MIRRORS earlier in this section 4 Push the SET switch and within 5 seconds push the memory switch 1 or 2 The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will stay on for approximately 5 seconds after pushing the switch If memory is stored in the same memory switch the previous memory will be deleted Linking Intelligent Key to a stored mem ory position The Intelligent Key can be linked to a stored memory position with the following procedure 1 Follow one of the steps for storing a memory p
200. be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and dis played objects Lt _ z5 SAA2019 Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance For example the display shows 3 ft 1 m to the place A but the actual 3 ft 1 m distance on the hill is the place Note that any object on Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 25 the hill is viewed in the monitor closer than it appears the hill is viewed in the monitor further than it appears SAA2020 Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown further than the actual distance For example the display shows 3 ft 1 m to the place A but the actual 3 ft 1 m distance on the hill is the place Note that any object on 4 26 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems SAA2021 Backing up near a projecting object The predicted course lines A do not touch the object in the display However the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course SAA2022 Backing up behind a projecting object
201. brakes function correctly PARKING BRAKE BREAK IN Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and or drums rotors are replaced in order to assure the best braking performance This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS WARNING The Anti lock Braking System ABS is a sophisticated device but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces Remember that stopping distances on slippery sur faces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS Stopping distances may also be longer on rough gravel or snow covered roads or if you are using tire chains Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you Ultimately the driver is responsible for safety Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness When replacing tires install the specified size of tires on all four wheels When installing a spare tire make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Starting and driving 5 29 Tire and Loading Information label See TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL in the 9 Technical and consumer infor mation section of this manual For detailed information see
202. button for SEEK TRACK ON OFF button VOL volume control knob FM AM band select button CD button AUX auxiliary button 13 AUX IN jack 14 TUNE SCROLL CONTROL dial 15 ENTER SETTING button FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER Audio main operation Head unit The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and high frequency ranges automatically in both radio reception and CD playback ON OFF Volume control Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position and then push the ON OFF button while the system is off to turn on the last audio source i e FM or CD which was playing immediately before the system was turned off While the system is on pushing the ON OFF button turns the system off Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume SETTING button Push the button to change the selecting mode as follows Bass Treble Fade Balance Spd Sen Vol Clock BRIGHTNESS Push the TUNE SCROLL control dial to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level Use the TUNE SCROLL control dial also to adjust Fade or Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers CONTRAST To change the Speed Sensitive Volume Spd Sen Vol mode from off 0 to 5 and push the TUNE SCROLL control dial until the desired mode is displayed Turn the TUNE SCROLL control dial to adjust the brig
203. button to delete all of the characters e OK Completes character inputs Touch screen maintenance If you clean the display screen use a dry soft cloth If additional cleaning is necessary use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth Never spray the screen with water or detergent Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 5 SAA3673 MENU OPTIONS models with naviga tion system The start menu can be displayed using the menu control switch on the steering wheel mounted controls 1 While the MAP or STATUS screen is displayed push and hold the menu control switch until the Menu Options screen appears 2 Highlight the preferred item by tilting the menu control switch up or down and then push the menu control switch to select it Menu Options Destination SAA2476 Available items Destination Route These items are for the navigation system See the separate Navigation System Owner s Man ual for details Info Displays the information screen It is the same screen that appears when you push the INFO button Settings Displays the settings screen It is the same screen that appears when you push the SET TING button 4 6 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings Comfort Auto Interior Illumination Light Sensitivity G re B Light
204. buttons eeN The rear seat passengers can adjust the rear air conditioning system using the control switches located on the ceiling above the rear seats The rear control buttons do not function when REAR is shown on the front display To activate the rear control buttons push the REAR button on the front air conditioner control panel and cancel the rear air conditioner control mode REAR will disappear from the front display OFF button Turns off the rear air conditioning system Fan speed control buttons Adjust rear fan speed MODE button Changes the rear air flow TEMP buttons Adjust the rear temperature Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 35 e DUAL stilli 14 SAA3595 1 Temperature control buttons driver side 5 Display 2 lt gt air recirculation button 6 et REAR rear window defroster button See 3 gf AUTO auto recirculation button models REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR with Advanced Climate Control System DEFROSTER SWITCH in the 2 Instruments a Outside air circulation button models and controls section without Advanced Climate Control System 7 Temperature control buttons passenger side 4 2 FRONT front defroster button 8 MODE manual air flow control button 4 36 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 9 10 11 12
205. cal key Confirm that the security indicator light comes on The security indicator light stays on for about 30 seconds The vehicle security system is now pre armed After about 30 seconds the vehicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase The security light begins to flash once every approximately 3 seconds If during this 30 second pre arm time period the door is unlocked or the ignition switch is pushed to ACC or ON the system will not arm Even when the driver and or passengers are in the vehicle the system will activate with all doors and lift gate locked with the ignition switch in the LOCK position When pushing the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position the system will be released Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the follow ing alarm e The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently e The alarm automatically turns off after approximately 1 minute However the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again The alarm is activated by e Unlocking the door or opening the lift gate without using the button on the Intelligent Key the door handle request switch or the mechanical key Even if the door is opened by releasing the door inside lock knob the alarm will activate How to stop an activated alarm The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by pushing the unlock button on the Intelligent Key the door handle request
206. ce radio reception quality Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state of the art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception These circuits are designed to extend reception range and to enhance the quality of that reception However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle even when the finest equipment is used These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area and do not indicate any mal function in your NISSAN radio system Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement Buildings terrain signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 43 MAXIMUM SIGNAL DISTANCES FM 25 to 30 miles 40 to 48 km e AM 60 to 130 miles 97 to 209 km SAA0306 FM radio reception Range FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30 miles 40 to 48 km with monaural single channel FM having slightly more range than stereo FM External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station r
207. ce the filter in accordance with the maintenance schedule in the NISSAN Service and Mainte nance Guide To replace the filter contact a NISSAN dealer The filter should be replaced if air flow is extremely decreased or when windows fog up easily when operating heater or air conditioning system Models with Advanced Climate Control System ACCS The climate control system is equipped with a natural grape seed polyphenol filter which collects and neutralizes dirt pollen dust etc To make sure that the air conditioner heats defogs and ventilates efficiently replace the filter in accordance with the maintenance schedule in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide To replace the filter contact a NISSAN dealer The filter should be replaced if the air flow decreases significantly or if windows fog up easily when operating the heater or air conditioner AUDIO SYSTEM AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Radio Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position and push the radio band select button to turn on the radio If you listen to the radio with the engine not running the ignition switch should be pushed to the ACC position Radio reception is affected by station signal strength distance from radio transmitter build ings bridges mountains and other external influences Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influen
208. ch or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement How to speak numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands Refer to the following examples General rule Only single digits O zero to 9 can be used For example if you would like to say 500 five zero zero can be used but five hundred cannot Examples e 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero Improving Recognition of Phone numbers You can improve the recognition of phone numbers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers For example when you try to call 800 662 6200 say eight zero zero first and the system will then ask you for the next three digits Then say six six two After recognition the system will then ask for the last four digits Say six two zero zero Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition performance When speaking a house number speak the number O as zero If the letter o Oh is included in the house number it will not be recognized as the number O zero even if you 4 138 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems speak oh instead of zero Please speak Zero for the number 0 zero oh for the letter o oh Command List Category Command Operates the Phone
209. child restraint systems e Rear facing child restraint e Forward facing child restraint e Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the child s size Generally infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 Ibs 9 kg should be placed in rear facing child restraints Forward facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward facing child restraint WARNING Infants and children need special pro tection The vehicle s seat belts may not fit them properly The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones In an accident an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury Always use appropriate child restraints All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children See CHILD RESTRAINTS later in this section A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHildren system or with the vehicle seat belt See CHILD RESTRAINTS later in this section for more information NISSAN recommends that all pre teens and children be restrained in the rear seat Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear se
210. chime sounds twice 1 Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position 2 Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key while any door including the lift gate is 3 16 Pre driving checks and adjustments open 3 Doors will not lock by pushing the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle However when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle doors can be locked with another registered Intelligent Key CAUTION e After locking the doors using the request switch make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles e When locking the doors using the request switch make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your posses sion before operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle e The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system When the driver s side door is open the doors are locked and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds NOTE The doors may not lock when the Intelli gent Key is in the same hand that is operating the requ
211. ck of the list can be stopped at any time by pushing the s button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR session Phonebook phones with automatic phonebook download function NOTE Phonebook commands are not available when the vehicle is moving Main menu List names A Record Name For phones that support automatic download of the phonebook PBAP Bluetooth profile the Phonebook command is used to manage entries to the vehicle phonebook You can say the name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for each phone paired with the system Each name can have up to 4 locations phone numbers associated with it When a phone is connected to the system the phonebook is automatically downloaded to the vehicle This feature allows you to access your phonebook from the Bluetooth system and call contacts by name You can record a custom voice tag for contact names that the system has difficulty recognizing For more information see Record Name in this section Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 129 NOTE Each phone has its own separate phone book You cannot access Phone A s phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B List names A Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book The system recites the phone book entries but
212. ck side of the front center console 2 42 Instruments and controls glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight The heat may da mage the glasses SIC3589 Soft bottle holder SUNGLASSES HOLDER if so Soft bottle holders are located on the front equipped doors and sliding doors WARNIN CAUTION 4 S Keep the sunglasses holder closed e Do not use bottle holder for any while driving to prevent an accident other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly To open the sunglasses holder push 1 injure people during sudden braking or an accident A CAUTION e Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers e Do not use for anything other than glasses e Do not leave glasses in the sun Instruments and controls 2 43 SIC4647 GLOVE BOX WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident ora sudden stop To open the glove box pull the handle 4 To close push the lid in until the lock latches To lock 2 unlock 3 the glove box use the mechanical key For the mechanical key usage see KEYS in the 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments section 2 44 Instruments and controls SIC4729 INSTRUMENT LOWER BOX if so equipped To open the box pull the knob To close push the lid in until the lock latches SIC4730 Front CONSOLE BOX Front To open the box pull the knob To close push the lid in until the loc
213. cle operation It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as pre scribed 8 2 Maintenance and do it yourself Performing general maintenance checks re quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools These checks or inspections can be done by yourself a qualified technician or if you prefer a NISSAN dealer WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction have the systems checked and serviced by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN technicians are well trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins service tips and in dealership information systems They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economical way GENERAL MAINTENANCE During the normal day to day operation of the vehicle general maintenance should be per formed regularly as prescribed in this section If you detect any unusual sounds vibrations or smell be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly In addition you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required When performing any checks or maintenance work see MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS later in this section EXPLAN
214. commended tire pressure specifications are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label under the Cold Tire Pressure heading The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar Tire pressures should be checked regularly because e Most tires naturally lose air over time e Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds The TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating the tires to the recom mended COLD tire pressure See TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert in the 5 Starting and driving section Incorrect tire pressure including un der inflation may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling WARNING Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident The Gross Vehicle Weight rating GVWR is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certification la bel The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life unsafe operating condi tions due to premature tire fail ure or unfavorable hand
215. condition check for improper tongue load overload worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition e Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving e Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low e Load the trailer so approximately 60 of the trailer load is in the front half and 40 is in the back half Also make sure the load is balanced side to side e Check your hitch trailer tire pressure vehicle tire pressure trailer light operation and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle e Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal state or local regulations If not install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle e Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle s behavior you should practice turning stopping and backing up in an area which Is free from traffic Steering stability and braking performance will be somewhat different than Technical and consumer information 9 21 under normal driving conditions Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadver tently becoming unlatched Avoid abrupt starts acceleration or stops A
216. cted through a Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual This system supports the Bluetooth Audio Distribution Profile A2DP AVRCP Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Blue tooth SIG Inc and licensed to Clarion Co Ltd J Bluetooth Music Box if so equipped Recording Note that data that is lost and not stored to the hard drive flash memory due to system damage improper operation or malfunction is not under warranty Vehicle owners are not permitted to record music without permission of the owner of the copyright except for personal use Check if the music is appropriately recorded to the hard drive flash memory after record ing when the compact disc cannot be rerecorded Some music cannot be recorded depending on the disc condition due to high speed recording being used Jumping sounds may be recorded when a compact disc is recorded while driving on rough roads and excessive vibration occurs A mark indicating jumping sounds is dis played if jumping sounds are recorded No sounds may be recorded if jumping sounds occurs or the disc is in poor condition Tracks that include Serial Copy Manage ment System SCMS are not recorded If a compact disc is scratched or dirty it may not be recorded jumping sounds may occur or it may take a long time to record Automatic title download The title information that is automatically downl
217. d care CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRI BUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION e The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections cavities and other areas e Damage to paint and other protective coat ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corro sion Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing where atmospheric pollution exists or where road salt is used Temperature A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated Air pollution Industrial pollution the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION e Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean e Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible e Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation e Check the underbody
218. d consumer information 9 5 upon how you use your vehicle Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes e repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures e driving in dusty conditions e extensive idling e towing a trailer e stop and go commuting Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for the maintenance schedule AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE COMMENDATIONS The air conditioning system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a and the oil NISSAN A C system oil Type S or the exact equivalents CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner 9 6 Technical and consumer information system components The refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a in your NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth s ozone layer Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth s atmosphere certain governmental regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air condition ing system service A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioning system refrigerant Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioning system SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x S
219. d on the vehicle are operational If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position If the light still remains on and or the engine will not start see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Instruments and controls 2 27 service as soon as possible Please bring all Intelligent Keys that you have when visiting a NISSAN dealer for service 2 28 Instruments and controls WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident Warm windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield CAUTION e Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds e Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty e Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank e Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water the factory default setting To turn this function on and off see HOW TO USE SE
220. d then the positive cable A 0O Replace the vent caps if so equipped Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid PUSH STARTING Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing CAUTION Continuously Variable Transmission CVT models cannot be push started or tow started Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage In case of emergency 6 11 IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS CAUTION Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire To avoid the danger of being scalded never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot When the radiator cap is removed pressurized hot water will spurt out possibly causing serious injury Do not open the hood if steam is coming out If your vehicle is overheating indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading or if you feel a lack of engine power detect abnormal noise etc take the following steps l Move the vehicle safely off the road apply the parking brake and move the selector lever to the P Park position Do not stop the engine 2 Turn off the air conditioner Open all the windows move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed 6 12 Incase of emergency 3 Get out of the vehicle Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiato
221. d to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system compo nents and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war ranty For additional information see CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS in the 9 Technical and consumer information section ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION e Engine oil with API Certification Mark e Viscosity SAE 5W 30 See CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS in the 9 Technical and consumer information section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation COLD TIRE PRESSURES The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver s door For additional information see WHEELS AND TIRES in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section NEW VEHICLE BREAK IN PROCE DURES RECOMMENDATION During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km of vehicle use follow the recommendations out lined in the BREAK IN SCHEDULE in the 5 Starting and driving section of this Owner s Manual Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle Printing February 2011 O3 Publication No OM1E OE52U0 Printed in Japan TOOUM 1 JAOD
222. de If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing pushing the ON OFF button will start the iPod AUX button Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position Then push the AUX button to switch to the iPod mode If another audio source is playing and the iPod is connected pushing the AUX button changes to the iPod mode If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing pushing the ON OFF button will start the iPod iPod MENU button When the iPod MENU button is pushed while the iPod is connected the interface for iPod operation is shown on the audio display The items on the menu list can be scrolled by pushing the i or while the iPod is operational To select an item push ENTER The display can be changed as follows Ce Artists Albums Songs gt mud Audiobooks Composers Genres For more information about each item see the iPod Owner s Manual ro Next Previous Track and Fast Forward Rewind When the or button is pushed for more than 1 5 seconds while the iPod is playing the iPod will play while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the iPod will return to the normal play speed When the i or e button is pushed for less than 1 5 seconds while the iPod is playing the next track or the beginning of the current track on the iPod will be played The multi function cont
223. display 2 23 Outside Mirrors ciicct cess caateesececssiaesdeta cess 3 34 Overdrive OFF switch isccccicticcctideeviaewcees 5 14 Overheat If your vehicle overheats 6 12 Owner s Manual Service Manual order IMTOMMANONeccnacttseeccsneseas eeeeaundsbanxacensese 9 27 P Panic FIG weeceeeseceetoetechouctrsccresecenmenecet 3 22 Parking Brake break in cc cee cce cece cece eee tees 5 29 Parking brake operation 0eeeeee eee 5 16 Parking on hills 5 27 Phone Bluetooth hands free phone system models with navigation system 4 110 Bluetooth hands free phone system models without navigation system 4 121 Car phone or CB radio ssss eseese 4 110 Power Front seat adjustment cecceeeee ees 1 4 Power door lock 02 ners iseseccsteveeviactreeessn 3 4 Power OUlCli 0 4css ser vespaectitssseeed paereeees 2 39 Power sliding COG x ccsexcs ctameresecterees doves 3 9 Power steering fluid n se 8 11 Power WINdOWS ici ccisccionat oretaxaewskavaesees 2 48 Precautions Audio operation icnsaxdededs dee kSucenenwxexeds 4 43 Braking precautions s s s 5 29 Child HESITAIN Seseccsseeutwseeviesiccseerteccers 1 28 Cruise control sccccesseeuione whee weeseccieteeny 5 24 Maintenance sp cecrseceeoorcanbieteerecticseuion 8 5 Seat belt usage 00 cece cece eee eee 1 16 Supplemental restraint system 5 1 46 When starting and driving 2
224. ds may cause the system to malfunction e While playing VIDEO CD media this DVD player does not guarantee complete functionality of all VI DEO CD formats Display settings To adjust the front display mode push the SETTING button while the DVD is being played To adjust the display ON OFF brightness tint color and contrast select the Display Adjust ment key and then select each key Then you can adjust each item using the multi function controller After changes have been made push the BACK button to save the setting 0 00 00 Wide Bla f occ ey O1GITAL O 1 ch SAA2497 Type A STANDARD Ble ooer OI1GITAL SAA3091 Type B 4 72 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Playing a DVD DISC AUX DVD button Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while watching the images Push the DISC AUX DVD button on the instru ment panel and turn the display to the DVD mode When a DVD is loaded it will be replayed automatically The operation screen will be turned on when the DISC AUX button located on the instrument panel is pushed while a DVD is being played and it will turn off automatically after a period of time To turn it on again push the DISC AUX DVD button again DVD operation keys When the DVD is playing without the operation screen being shown you may use the touch screen to select items
225. duce the risk the procedures must be followed precisely CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle To avoid or reduce the risk the procedures must be followed care fully SIC0697 If you see the symbol above it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen O 3 If you see a symbol similar to those above in an illustration it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle S amp ms Wg Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those above indicate movement or action t t Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those above call attention to an item in the illustration CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constitu ents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids con tained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Cali fornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI SORY Some vehicle parts such as lithium bat teries may contain perchlorate material The following advisory is provided Per chlorate Material special handling may apply see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate
226. dy or blinks while the engine is running it may indicate a potential emission control The malfunction indicator light may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing or if the vehicle runs out of fuel Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly and that the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons 11 4 liters of fuel in the fuel tank After a few driving trips the 4 light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection maintenance test See READINESS FOR INSPECTION MAINTENANCE I M TEST in the 9 Technical and consumer information section Instruments and controls 2 15 Operation The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways e Malfunction indicator light on steady An emission control system has been detected Check the fuel filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The 4 light should turn off after a few driving trips If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle t
227. e push the RDM button repeatedly and the mode will change as follows Normal All Random 1 Folder Random gt Normal 4 64 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems SAA3600 iPod player operation Connecting iPod The USB outlet connector is in the front center console box Connect the iPod cable to the USB connector The battery of the iPod is charged while the connection to the vehicle Depending on the version of the iPod the display on the iPod shows a NISSAN or Accessory Attached screen when the connec tion is completed When the iPod is connected to the vehicle the iPod music library can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls iPod and iPhone are a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Compatibility The following models are available e Fifth generation iPod firmware version 1 2 1 or later e iPod Classic firmware version 1 1 or later e First generation iPod touch firmware ver sion 2 1 or later e First generation iPod nano firmware ver sion 1 3 1 or later e Second generation iPod nano firmware version 1 1 3 or later e Third generation iPod nano firmware ver sion 1 1 or later Make sure that the iPod firmware version is updated Audio main operation Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position Then push the AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod mo
228. e which contains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands Information User Guide eeu Started Help on Speaking SAA2531 h Push the INFO button on the instrument panel 2 Select the Others key 3 Select the Voice Recognition key 4 Select the User Guide key 5 Select a preferred item You can skip steps 1 and 3 above if you say Help Available items e Getting Started Describes the basics of how to operate the NISSAN Voice Recognition system e Lets Practice Mode that allows practicing by following the instructions of the system voice e Using the Address Book Tutorial for entering a destination by using the Address Book e Finding a Street Address if so equipped Tutorial for entering a destination by street address e Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation e Help on Speaking Displays useful tips of speaking for correct command recognition by the system Note that the Command List feature is only available when Alternate Command Mode is active Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 135 Information User Guide Using Voice Recognition With voice recognition you can use voice commands to control navigation audio phone and other functions To start the voice recognition system push the TALK switch on the steering wheel Then say a command after
229. e F M V S S C M V S S label GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rat ing The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle passengers cargo and trailer Vehicle Capacity Weight Load limit Total load capacity maximum total weight limit specified of the load passengers and cargo for the vehicle This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label e Cargo capacity permissible weight of cargo the subtracted weight of occu pants from the load limit VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as The combined weight of occu pants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information label Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Capacity on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label To get the combined weight of occupants and cargo add the weight of all occu pants then add the total luggage weight Examples are shown in the following illustration Example Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Occupants Luggage Trailer Tongue Pemamingaivailable Weight R X a oT T cargo and luggage load capacity 2 150 lbx2 300lb 30lbx2 60lb 300 Ib 740 Ib 70kg 135kg 14kg 27
230. e adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint Do not use the seat if the head restraint SSS1160 SSS0992 has been removed If the head restraint was removed reinstall and properly The illustration shows the seating positions Components adjust the head restraint before an ee ee The head re 4 Head restraint occupant uses the seating position l l oo l 2 Adjustment notches Failure to follow these instructions A Indicates the seating position is equipped can reduce the effectiveness of the with a head restraint 3 Lock knob head restraints This may increase the 4 Stalks risk of serious injury or death in a collision 1 8 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0997 SSS0993 SSS0994 Adjustment To raise the head restraint pull it up To lower push and hold the lock knob and push Adjust the head restraint so the center is level the heao restraint down with the center of your ears Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 9 Removal Use the following procedure to remove the adjustable head restraints 1 Pull the head restraint up to the highest position Push and hold the lock knob Remove the head restraint from the seat 4 Store the head restraint properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle 5 Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occ
231. e and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision e When installing a child restraint system in the 3rd row center posi tion both the center seat belt con nector tongue and buckle tongue must be secured See Attaching 3rd row center seat belt earlier in this section 1 34 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Sas a on Ss SSS0100 Rear facing step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the CHILD SAFETY earlier in this section and CHILD RESTRAINTS earlier in this section before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats 1 Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat Always follow the restraint manufacturer s instructions Rear facing step 2 2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for belt routing SSS0655 SSS0656 Rear facing step 3 Rear facing step 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 4 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the extended At this time the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt is in the Automatic Locking Retrac
232. e in a safe location and then operate the navigation system 4 amp WARNING e ALWAYS give your full attention to driving e Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident 4 4 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings Navigation Audio Phone SAA2473 Touch screen operation With this system the same operations as those for the multi function controller are possible using the touch screen operation Selecting the item Touch an item to select it To select the Audio settings touch the Audio area 4 on the screen Touch the BACK button to return to the previous screen Settings Volume amp Beeps ey SAA2474 Adjusting an item Touch the or button to adjust the settings Touch the or button to move to the previous or next item Touch the or button to move to the previous or next page Phone Phonebook m Yul SAA2475 Inputting characters Touch the letter or number 4 There are some options available when inputting characters e Uppercase Shows uppercase characters e Lowercase Shows lowercase characters e Symbols Shows symbols such as the question mark e Space Inserts a space e Delete Deletes the last character that has been input with one touch Push and hold the
233. e multi function controller For information on the Background Color key refer to the separate Navigation System Own ers Manual Color Theme Choose the theme color of the menu screen from Black Blue or Red Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 15 Settings gt Display Auto Day Display 3 Brightness contest id Background Color H SAA2115 Display settings models without navi gation system The Display screen will appear when pushing the SETTING button on the control panel Display To turn off the screen push the ENTER button and turn the ON indicator off When any mode button is pushed with the screen off the screen turns on for further operation The screen will turn off automatically 5 seconds after the operation is finished To turn on the screen set this item to the ON position or push the e button Brightness Contrast Background Color To adjust the brightness contrast and back ground color of the screen select the appro priate Brightness Contrast or Background Color key and push the ENTER button You can then adjust the brightness and contrast using the multi function controller Switch the background color to the daytime mode or the nighttime mode by pushing the ENTER button 4 16 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 1 6
234. e power lift gate is being operated the operation may stop In this case if the conditions above are met the power lift gate operation will return to normal Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 25 SPA2547 SPA2860 SPA2851 Power door main switch The power lift gate operation can be turned on or off by the power door main switch on the instrument panel When the power door main switch is pushed to the OFF position the power operation is not available by the power lift gate switch on the lift gate and lift gate opener switch SPA2859 SPA2852 Lift gate opener switch Power lift gate switch Lift gate 3 26 Pre driving checks and adjustments Power open When the lift gate is fully closed the lift gate will fully open automatically by e pushing the power lift gate switch on the instrument panel for more than 1 second e pushing the lift gate opener switch e pushing the power lift gate button on the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds when the lift gate starts opening NOTE The lift gate can be opened by the power lift gate switch A or the lift gate button even if the lift gate is locked or the power door main switch is in the OFF position The lift gate will unlock and open Power close When the lift gate is fully opened the lift gate will fully close automatically by e pushing the power lift gate switch on the instrument
235. e radiator The sensor may be affected by road or engine heat wind directions and other driving conditions The display may differ from the actual outside temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or bill boards Instruments and controls 2 23 SETTING gt MAINTENANCE ALERT gt OPTIONS WHENTER NEXT Setting Setting cannot be made while driving A message Setting can only be operated when stopped is also displayed on the dot matrix crystal display The J switch and switch are used in the setting mode to select and decide a menu SKIP Push the J switch to move to the warning check mode Push the switch to select other menus 2 24 Instruments and controls ALERT Alert menu can be set to notify the following items e TIMER Select this submenu to specify when the TIMER indicator activates e ICY Select this submenu to display the low outside temperature warning To return to the top page of the setting mode select BACK MAINTENANCE The maintenance intervals of the following items can be set or reset for the reminders e OIL Select this submenu to set or reset the distance for changing the engine oll e FILTER Select this submenu to set or reset the distance for replacing the oil filter e TIRE Select this submenu to set or reset the distance for replacing tires e OTHER Select this submenu and set or reset the distance f
236. e seat See SEATS earlier in this section 2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage e The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact A slow pulling motion permits the belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat e If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position firmly pull the belt and release it 1 20 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor SSS0290 3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown 4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest The three point type seat belts have two modes of operation e Emergency Locking Retractor ELR e Automatic Locking Retractor ALR The Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during impacts The Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode locks the seat belt for child restraint installation When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle
237. e spare tire at the same time Do not tow a trailer while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed CAUTION Do not use tire chains on a TEM PORARY USE ONLY spare tire Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the Original tire ground clearance is reduced To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught 9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 9 2 Fuel recommendation sssssssssssssessrrrrrrrrrrrrrrne 9 3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 5 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations aos ct reece cece cetnideeeppeaenemecee 9 6 DD CCHICAUONS ecer a ea 9 7 ENOO aga reece ee ane E EAA 9 7 Wheels and TINGS fc ccecetressacksscectasietstareszoresecusee 9 7 Dimensions and weights 2 0eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 9 8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another COUN lt 2c lt scensctetdestinsesees eandeedhdeesyessadecsee 9 8 Vehicle identification cccceeeeeeeee eee e reese eeeees 9 8 Vehicle Identification Number VIN plate 9 8 Vehicle identification number chassis number 9 9 Engine serial number ssececenncedennedosireeeascneenoretand 9 9 F M V S S C M V S S certification label
238. e than 10 CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT FLUID minutes Check the oil level with the dipstick Add engine oil if necessary A CAUTION After the operation e Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid 1 Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground NS 2 Do not mix with other fluids 2 Dispose of waste oil and filter properly e Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 will damage the CVT which is not Abs WARNING covered by the NISSAN new vehicle e Prolonged and repeated contact limited warranty with used engine oil may cause skin cancer When checking or replacement is required we ONGe f i recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing e Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible e Keep used engine oil out of reach of children POWER STEERING FLUID Check the fluid level in the reservoir The fluid level should be checked when the fluid is cold at fluid temperatures of O to 30 C 32 to 86 F The fluid level can be checked with the level gauge which is attached to the cap To check the fluid level remove the cap The fluid level should be between the MAX 1 and MIN 2 lines If the fluid is below the MIN line add Genuine NISSAN E PSF Remove the cap and fill through the opening Maintenance and do it yourself 8 11 CAUTION Do not overfill Use of a power steering fluid other than Ge
239. e the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position 1 24 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING After adjustment release the ad justment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident Seat belt hooks When the 2nd or 3rd row seat belts are not in use and when folding down the 2nd or 3rd row seats hook the 2nd and 3rd outer seat belts on the seat belt hooks SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If because of body size or driving position it is not possible to properly fit the lap shoulder belt and fasten it an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available that can be purchased The extender adds approximately 8 in 200 mm of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required WARNING Only NISSAN seat belt extenders made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts should be used with the NISSAN seat belts Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender Such unnecessary use could result in
240. e use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the head and chest of the front occupants They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body Even with NISSAN advanced air bags seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants Because of this the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the air bag module during inflation The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system OFF PASSENGER AIR BAG gt rv SSS0676 Front passenger air bag status light Front passenger air bag and status light WARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions Read this section carefully to learn how it operates Proper use of the
241. e warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction 5 4 Starting and driving Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s operation and the outside temperature Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature check the tire pressure for all four tires For additional information see Low tire pres sure warning light in the 2 Instruments and controls section and TIRE PRESSURE MON ITORING SYSTEM TPMS in the 6 In case of emergency section WARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sud den steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possi ble Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury Check the tire pres sure for all four tire
242. e warnings and instructions for proper use and installa tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors The child restraint will not be secured prop erly Inspect the lower anchors by insert ing your fingers into the lower anchor area Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material The child restraint will not be secured prop erly if the lower anchors are ob structed 1 29 SSS0637 LATCH lower anchor location LATCH lower anchor location The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH anchors SSS1177 3rd row seat 1 30 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0643 LATCH webbing mounted attachment Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be connected to anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle With this system you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint Check your child restra
243. ease both buttons The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen you should change the codes of any non rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink Consult the Owner s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information When your vehicle is recovered you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information FCC Notice This device complies with FCC rules part 15 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This Instruments and controls 2 59 device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC MDC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the device DOC ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I D CB2V67690 2 60 Instruments and controls MEMO Instruments and controls 2 61 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments ING E A E E E A E O 3 2 Intelligent Key system sssssssssssessrrrrrrrrrrr
244. eat belt tongue 2 Both the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must be securely latched for proper seat belt opera tion SSS0241 WARNING Always fasten the connector tongue and the seat belt in the order shown Always make sure both the connec tor tongue and the seat belt tongue are secured when using the seat belt or installing a child restraint Do not use the seat belt or child restraint with only the seat belt tongue attached This could result in serious personal injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop 1 22 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS1164 Stowing 3rd row center seat belt When folding down the 3rd row seat the 3rd row center seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position as follows 1 Hold the connector tongue 1 so that the seat belt does not retract suddenly when the tongue is released from the connector buckle Release the connector tongue by inserting a suitable tool such as key A into the connector buckle 2 Insert the seat belt tongue into the retractor base first 2 3 Then secure the connector tongue into the retractor base 3 WARNING Do not unfasten the 3rd row center seat belt connector except when folding down the rear seat SSS1165 Attaching 3rd row center seat belt Always be sure the 3rd row center seat belt connector tongue and connector buckle are attached Disconnect only when folding down the 3rd ro
245. ece cece eee ee eee e eee aes 9 7 Wheels and Tie Grcctccccstsmeessrerveveretewss 8 29 Top tether strap child restraints 4 1 31 Touch screen system ac ccccecsceoreceeceecupeceeeees 4 4 Towing Flat TOWING 6 cect ee a A EEEa 9 23 Tow truck towing xascceuereentedecveseteeeneuee 6 13 Towing a trailer 9 15 Towing safety ssssisersarrarrarrarrrerrn 9 20 TPMS Tire pressure monitoring system 5 3 TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert 5 5 TPMS Tire pressure warning system 6 2 Trailer towing 2cccxwre ss esecdusscdecedecwessadeneees 9 15 Transceiver HomeLink Universal Transceiver 222 s00nsacrrevejsevnetdetsecnsesiare desea 2 56 Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission CVT MUNG sisser irera iain naa EEA E EEA 8 11 Driving with CVT Continuously Variable Transmission 5 12 Transmission selector lever lock release 5 15 Transmitter See remote keyless entry SYST eaucistrciooec gare rew rede eesii ener 3 20 Traveling or registering your vehicle in another COUNTY i ossaa e Eiin aa a EE AEE AEE EEE A tans 9 8 Trip COMPUTE sineeran E EEEE 2 21 Trip OdOMEtE coiir eenaa EAEE 2 22 Turn signal switch caeccerenceemeetesdicecaeieceeces 2 35 U Underbody cleaning scccicreceeevecdev eee erences 7 3 Uniform tire quality grading wvecesede veces eeeuyeur 9 24 USB memory operation 0000 4 63 4 75 V Vanity MINO penres sarira ni ere N a EEEREN 3 35 Vanity mirro
246. eception even if the FM station is within 25 miles 40 km The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver FM signals follow a line of sight path exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light For example they will reflect off objects Fade and drift As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter the signals will tend to fade and or drift Static and flutter During signal interference from buildings large hills or due to antenna position usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter static or flutter can be heard This can be reduced by lowering the treble setting to reduce the treble response Multipath reception Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals direct and re flected signals reach the receiver at the same time The signals may cancel each other resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound AM radio reception AM signals because of their low frequency can bend around objects and skip along the ground In addition the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth Because of these characteristics AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver Fading Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas
247. ecessary e Never use blocks on or under the To remove the wheel cover use the jack rod 4 jack as illustrated e Do not start or run the engine while Apply cloth between the wheel and jack rod vehicle is on the jack as it may to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover cause the vehicle to move e Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack 6 6 Incase of emergency SCE0585 Jack up point Place the jack directly under the jack up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown The jack should be used on level firm ground Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground To lift the vehicle securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as shown above Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire SCE0504 In case of emergency 6 7 Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use See specific instructions under the heading WHEELS AND TIRES in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section 1 6 8 Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub Carefull
248. ecognition performance Settings Others Language amp Units Image Viewer Adjust voice recognition settings SAA2529 Activating Alternate Command Mode When the Standard Mode is active perform the following steps to switch to the Alternate Command Mode 1 Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel 2 Highlight the Others key 3 Highlight the Voice Recognition key Settings Voice Recognition Change the mode of voice recognition SAA2543 4 Highlight the Alternate Command Mode key 5 The confirmation message is displayed on the screen Push the OK key to activate the Alternate Command Mode Displaying command list If you are controlling the system by voice commands for the first time or do not know the appropriate voice command perform the follow ing procedure for displaying the voice command list available only in Alternate Command Mode Information Voice Recognition BACK Display the commands of voice recognition SAA2544 Push the INFO button on the instrument panel Select the Others key Select the Voice Recognition key Select the Command List key Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 147 Information Command List Information Command List eC Information Commands Vehicle Phonebook Audio Commands Handset Phonebook Helo C F International Call aE Incoming Calls Push the
249. ect the occupants Because of this the force of the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against these air bag modules during inflation The side air bags will deflate quickly after the collision is over The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational WARNING e Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats Also do not place any objects an umbrella bag etc between the front door finisher and the front seat Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if side air bag inflates Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Right after inflation several side air bags and curtain air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may severely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of side air bag and curtain air bags This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system suspension system or side panel This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curt
250. ed ANTENNA Window antenna The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear side window This vehicle is equipped with the mobile entertainment system which enables you to play a Digital Versatile Disc DVD or USB providing the images and sounds both in the front and rear display screens CAUTION Do not place metalized film near the rear side window glass or attach any metal parts to it This may cause poor reception or noise When cleaning the inside of the rear window be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna Lightly wipe along the antenna with SAA3602 Satellite antenna if so equipped WARNING The driver must not attempt to operate or view the Mobile Enter tainment System MES while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation Do not attempt to modify the system to display a movie on the front a dampened soft cloth screen while the vehicle is being driven Doing so may distract the driver and may cause a collision and serious personal injury or death There is a satellite antenna on the rear part of the vehicle roof CAUTION e The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material e Use a damp soft cloth when clean 4 98 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems ing the Mobile Enter
251. ed in this section Check the 2 aS rad 3 adjustment after someone else uses SSS1161 SS1198 the seat Do not attach anything to the adjustable headrest stalks or remove The illustration shows the seating positions Components the adjustable headrests Do not use equipped with adjustable headrests 1 Adjustable headrest the seat if the adjustable headrests m Indicates the seating position is equipped have been removed If the headrest with an adjustable or E E A j eo ajuetient note was removed reinstall and properly 3 Lock knob adjust the headrest before an occupant uses the seating position Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the adjustable head rests This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision 4 Stalks Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 11 i SSS1123 SSS1124 To raise the headrest pull it up to the lock To lower push and hold the lock knob and push position the headrest down 1 12 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system gir SSS1125 Removal Use the following procedure to remove the headrests 1 2 3 4 Pull the headrest up to the highest position Push and hold the lock knob Remove the headrest from the seat Store the headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle Install and properly adjust the headrest before an occupant uses the seating posi t
252. ed to prevent it Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 121 from being dialed When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice during a call Immediately after the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of time Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection dis ruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual The Blue tooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones If the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System seems to be malfunctioning see Trouble shooting guide later in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for troubleshooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone Owner s Manual regarding battery charging cellular phone antenna etc This wireless hands free car kit is based on Bluetooth technology Frequency 2402 MHz 2480 MHz Output Power 4 14 dB
253. ee 3 18 Warning SIQNEIS civic scterassecesccendadereeedeivecracnes 3 18 Troubleshooting guide 0 seeeeeeeeeeee neers 3 19 Remote keyless entry system 0 eeeee eee eee 3 20 How to use remote keyless entry system 3 21 PIC OG EA E E A E acsascuctanancaneer 3 24 E al e eee et ee E 3 25 Operating manual lift gate cceeeeeeee eee eens 3 25 Operating power lift gate if so equipped 3 25 PULO COSU O eacredyet seca teen eectenesaenseeacecueemsehenst 3 28 Lift gate releaSe cece eee eee eect eee eee eee 3 29 Fuekiler OO Ol miccceecanoncenscaeta aectaneamemescunssanasecee 3 29 Opening fuel filler GOOr ccccceeeeeee eee eeeeees 3 29 Fueltiller CAO sce oo cccaateenteaeeeetsanecentetenyvececes 3 29 Tit eleSCODIC steering sic ce cencincsceverecesetaeectensacseates 3 31 Tilt or telescopic operation cceeeeee sees 3 31 SUN VISOLS A N A E E A A E 3 32 INE OS A E A EE EET EEE E E A 3 32 Inside MiITOF assaannannennnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrrnrrrnrrnrrrnrrns 3 32 Outsidg IIT Ol st erneer EAN Ea 3 34 Automatic drive positioner if so equipped 3 36 VEUSA r E E 3 35 Enty exi TUNGU sisane 3 36 Communication mirror if so equipped 5 3 36 Memory Storage se cect iiir 3 37 System operation ccee eee ee cece cece eee eee eee ees 3 38 KEYS A key number plate is supplied with your keys Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
254. eeeeeeeeees 4 62 4 70 COMPASS scckctewectceseqntcdtneccebiaesdecseueuoeers 2 7 Console DOM i paciees cee a E aeeoeess 2 44 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT TUNG E ee cn ved E E T ET 8 11 Controls Control panel button 08 4 2 Coolant Capacities and recommended IUCIIUDVIGANIS c22s ccccctanesareeewennekaeenenenss 9 2 Changing engine coolant 2 eeeee 8 8 Checking engine coolant level 65 8 8 Corrosion PrOl6CliON cawns ook tuc cane sverncexsewacedas 7 6 Cruise control icc hocx lt scavnnsvsseaakeeveuxaneebaedes 5 24 CUD holders lt 1 55s cieweevsoetacetenesveexnceeeeeed 2 41 CVT Driving with CVT Continuously Variable Transmission 5 12 D Daytime running light system 2 34 Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWItCh ceceee eee eee eae 2 30 Dimensions and weights sx cc22echevecnseweteeesexs 9 8 DISP DURON censier an ory eTEN PEKER 4 8 Dot matrix liquid crystal display 2 17 Drive belt eurrerrerirrra treor a EN 8 15 Drive positioner osceteceeeeeiorserurteczoreeeieest 3 36 Driving Cold weather driving sssssesesrsreserrrrn 5 32 10 2 Driving with CVT Continuously Variable Transmission 5 12 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 DVD player NISSAN mobile entertainment 4 98 E ECON DUON cerris eers takasi E EE 4 8 Economy FUG rirerire n ss 5 26 Elapsed time sere
255. eel is replaced the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not ori ginally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire follow the instructions below Stopping the vehicle 1 Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic Turn on the hazard warning flashers Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake Move the selector lever to the P Park position Turn off the engine Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person nel that you need assistance Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place away from traffic and clear of the vehicle WARNING Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the transmis sion is shifted into the P Park position Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope ice or slippery areas This is hazardous Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle Wait for professional road assistance MCEOO01A Blocking wheels Place sui
256. el HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON To display the status of the audio fuel con sumption and navigation system if so equipped push the STATUS button The following information will appear when the STATUS button is pushed repeatedly Audio and fuel economy Audio and Naviga tion system if so equipped HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON TROL AND DISPLAY ON OFF BUTTON Push the 3 OFF button to switch the display brightness to the daytime mode or the nighttime mode and to adjust the display brightness using the multi function controller while the indicator is displayed at the bottom of the screen e Models without navigation system The display brightness can also be adjusted using the brightness UP button or brightness DOWN button Push and hold the 6 OFF button for more than 2 seconds to turn the display off Push the button again to turn the display on Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 7 HOW TO USE DISP BUTTON Push the DISP button to show the display setting screen See Display settings models with navigation system later in this section or Display settings models without navigation system later in this section HOW TO USE ECON BUTTON models without navigation system Push the ECON button to show fuel economy information See HOW TO USE INFO BUT TON later in this section HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON The display scree
257. elts or harnesses A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat Keep seatbacks as upright as 1 28 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system possible after fitting the child restraint Infants and children should al ways be placed in an appropri ate child restraint while in the vehicle e When the child restraint is not in use keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt In a sudden stop or collision loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle CAUTION A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system referred to as the LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil dren system Some child restraints include rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors For details see Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System LATCH later in this section If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint the vehicle seat belts can be used Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and small children of various sizes When selecting any child restraint keep the following points in mind e Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Can
258. em When this item is turned to ON the rear display opens When the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position the rear display is flipped down automatically When the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position the rear display is closed automatically if ON is selected The rear display can also be opened or closed using the remote controller See NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM MES later in this section SAA2486 Display settings models with navigation system The display as illustrated will appear when pushing the SETTING button and selecting the Display key Display Adjustment To adjust the display settings select the Dis play Adjustment key The following settings are available e Display To turn off the screen push the ENTER button and turn the Display indicator off The other method is to push and hold the 43 OFF button for more than 2 seconds When any mode button is pushed with the screen off the screen turns on for further operation The screen will turn off automatically 5 seconds after the operation is finished To turn on the screen set this item to the ON position or push and hold the 26 OFF button e Brightness Contrast Background Color To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen select the Brightness or Contrast key Then you can adjust the brightness to and the contrast to using th
259. em then oper ates normally but without anti lock assistance If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self test or while driving have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH 5 to 10 km h The speed varies according to road conditions When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly However the pulsa tion may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM The Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion Under certain driving con ditions the VDC system helps to perform the following functions e Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle e Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed traction control function e Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle i
260. ems are Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag and curtain air bag and or pretensioner systems need servicing e The supplemental air bag warning light remains on approximately 7 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position e The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently e The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Under these conditions the front air bag side air bags and curtain air bags or pretensioner systems may not operate properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag and curtain air bag and or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible 1 59 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO CEDURE The front air bags side air bags and curtain air bags and pretensioners are designed to activate on a one time only basis As a reminder unless it is damaged the supplemental air bag warning light will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred Repair and replacement of these systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer When maintenance work is required on the vehicle the front
261. en from entering the vehicle and cleans the air inside of the vehicle with positive and negative ions that are emitted from the ventilator After 5 minutes the sensor detects exhaust gas and automatically alternates between the recir culation mode and outside air circulation mode Turning the system off Push the ON OFF button Rear air conditioning system To control the rear air conditioning system independently with the front air conditioner control panel push the REAR button When the rear air conditioning system control is on the indicator light on the REAR button will illuminate and EAR will appear on the display In this state the rear air conditioning system can be adjusted with the front air conditioner control panel However if no operation is conducted for approximately 10 seconds after the REAR button is pushed the front air conditioner control panel will automatically switch to the front air conditioning mode To cancel the rear air conditioning mode and switch back to the front air conditioning mode push REAR button one more time Automatic operation 1 Push the REAR button to display EAR on the front display when the rear air conditioning system is on 2 Push the AUTO button The AUTO indicator light will illuminate 3 Push the temperature control buttons A and W driver s side to set the desired temperature Manual oper
262. enu USB e Tilting up down for less than 1 5 seconds will skip up down to the next or previous track e Tilting up down for more than 1 5 seconds will skip up down to the next or previous folder number e Pushing the menu control switch will show the USB Menu Music Box if so equipped e Tilting up down for less than 1 5 seconds will skip up down to the next or previous track e Tilting up down for more than 1 5 seconds will skip up down to the next or previous album folder if playing compressed audio files e Pushing the menu control switch will show the Music Box Menu Bluetooth Audio models with navigation system e Tilting up down for less than 1 5 seconds will skip up down to the next or previous track BACK switch models with navi gation system Push this switch to go back to the previous screen or cancel the selection if it is not completed Volume control switches Push the upper or lower side switch to increase or decrease the volume Source select switch Push the audio source switch to change the mode as follows e Models with navigation system AM gt FM gt SAT gt CD DVD gt Music Box USB iPod Bluetooth Audio Models without navigation system AM gt FM gt CD gt Music Box gt USB iPod gt SAT Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 97 NISSAN MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM MES if so equipp
263. epeat the command in a Clear voice e If you want to go back to the previous command you can say Go back or Correction anytime the system is waiting for a response e You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying Cancel or Quit The system announces Cancel and ends the VR session You can also push and hold the s button for 5 seconds on the steering wheel at any time to cancel the VR session Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system e lf you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback push the volume control switch or on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback You can also use the radio volume control knob In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the amp button on the steering wheel To use the system faster you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu For example press the yx button and after the tone say Call Redial Note The combined com mand of Call and a Name cannot be used Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 123 How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands Refer to the rules and examples below e Either zero or oh can be used for 0
264. er off It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS if so equipped WARNING AX HIGH VOLTAGE e When xenon headlights are on they produce a high voltage To prevent an electric shock never attempt to modify or disassemble Always have your xenon headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer e Xenon headlights provide consider ably more light than conventional headlights If they are not correctly aimed they might temporarily blind an oncoming driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident If headlights are not aimed correctly immediately take your ve hicle to a NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly When the xenon headlight is initially turned on its brightness or color varies slightly However the color and brightness will soon stabilize e The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on off opera tion It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals for example when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal Even when the daytime running lights are active Canada only the xenon headlights do not turn on This way the life of the xenon head lights is not reduced If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out the brightness will drast
265. er stored in the cellular phone s memory To enter a phone number by voice command For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers earlier in this section for more information To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Say Transfer entry The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth commu nication link The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN re commended cellular phones The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry choose Store The system confirms the name location and number Delete Entry Use the Delete Entry command to delete one entry from the phonebook After the system acknowledges a command say the name to delete or say List Names to choose an entry List Names C Use the List Names command to hear all the names in the phonebook The system recites the phonebook entries but does not include the actual phone numbers When playback of the list is complete the system returns to the main menu Playba
266. er than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti freeze Coolant blue is used fol low the coolant manufacture s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to 34 F 37 C The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genu ine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system The life expectancy of the factory fill coolant is 105 000 miles 168 000 km or 7 years Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Cool ant blue including Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Cool ant green or the use of non distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill cool ant Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for more details Maintenance and do it yourself 8 7 SDI2691 CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold If the coolant level is below the MIN level 2 open the reservoir cap and add coolant up to the MAX level If the reservoir is empty check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 4 If the cooling system frequently requires coolant have it checked by a NISSAN dealer 8 8 Maintenance and do it yourself CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT Major cooling system
267. est switch to lock the door Put the intelligent key in a purse pocket or your other hand CAUTION The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions e When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel e When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin e When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets e When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials Unlocking doors 1 Push the door handle request switch A or the lift gate request switch once while carrying the Intelligent Key with you 2 The hazard indicator flashes once and the outside chime sounds once The corre sponding door or the lift gate will unlock 3 Push the request switch again within 1 minute 4 The hazard indicator flashes once and the outside chime sounds once again All the doors and the lift gate will unlock Automatic relock All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch while the doors are locked If during this 1 minute time period the request switch is pushed all doors will be locked automatically after another 1 minute e Opening any door including the lift gate e Pushing the ignition switch Power lift gate open 1 Carry the Intelligent Key 2 Push the lift gate opener switch The lift gate will unlock and automatically ope
268. f vehicles Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 2 through 8 OFF PASSENGER AIR BAG gt rv SSS0676 Forward facing step 10 10 If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light ss should illuminate If this light is not illuminated see Front passenger air bag and status light in this section Move the child restraint to another seating position Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted the ALR mode child restraint mode is canceled Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 41 2 Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the back of each seatback behind the child restraint 3 Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack Make sure the head restraint or headrest does not contact the top tether strap If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap on the rear seat consult your NISSAN dealer for details SSS1168 2nd row seat 3rd row seat INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP 2nd INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP 8rd row seats row seat First secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors or the seat belt as applicable A WARNING 1 If nece
269. f you choose to use a tire dressing take the Appearance and care 7 3 following precautions e Use a water based tire dressing The coat ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an oil based tire dressing e Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread grooves where it would be difficult to remove e Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread grooves e Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom mended by tire dressing manufacturer 7 4 Appearance and care CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean soft cloth dam pened in mild soap solution then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather Before using any fabric protector read the manufacturer s recommendations Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens WARNING Do not use water or acidic cleaners hot steam cleaners on the seat This can and damaging to the leather sur faces and should be removed promptly Do not use saddle soap car waxes polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergent
270. f you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident check for the cause and have it corrected immediately Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold with the engine off Check the lines for proper attachment leaks cracks etc Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt insects leaves etc that may have accumulated Make sure the hoses have no cracks deformation rot or loose connections Underbody The underbody is frequently ex posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust It is very important to remove these substances other wise rust will form on the floor pan frame fuel lines and around the exhaust system At the end of winter the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumu late For additional information see CLEANING EXTERIOR in the 7 Appearance and care section Windshield washer fluid Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or mainte nance work on your vehicle always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle The following are general precautions which should be closely observed WARNING e Park the vehicle on a level surface apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to
271. ff and the VDC warning light will not flash The VDC system is auto matically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the off position then back to the on position See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC warning light in the 2 Instruments and controls section and Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light in the 2 Instruments and controls section The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction WARNING e The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slip pery surfaces and always drive care fully e Do not modify the vehicle s suspen sion If suspension parts such as shock absorbers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recom mended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated the VDC Starting and driving 5 31 system may not operate properly This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance and the VDC warning light amp may illuminate
272. ffect The amount of Plasmacluster ions increases according to the amount of air flow When the air flow is high 2 is displayed on the screen and when the air flow is low the indication in the screen changes to acu Plasmacluster and Plasmacluster ions are regis tered trademark of Sharp corporation Automatic air intake control with exhaust gas outside odor detection sensor This vehicle is equipped with an exhaust gas detection sensor When the automatic air intake control is activated the sensor detects industry odors such as pulp or chemicals and exhaust gas such as gasoline or diesel When such odors or gas are detected 7 will appear on the display and the system auto matically changes from the outside air circulation mode to the recirculation mode The automatic air intake control can be activated 4 40 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems when the gf AUTO auto recirculation button is pushed the indicator light on the qG AUTO auto recirculation button will illuminate under the following conditions e The air flow control is not in the front defogger mode the indicator light on the front defogger Q amp y FRONT button is turned off e The outside temperature is about 32 F 0 C or above When the automatic air intake control is ON for the first 5 minutes the recirculation mode is selected to prevent dust dirt and poll
273. for less than 1 5 seconds Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 59 To eject all the CDs push the CD EJECT a button for more than 1 5 seconds When this button is pushed while a CD is being played the CD will eject and the system will turn off If the CD comes out and is not removed it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it AUX Auxiliary input AUX IN jack The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape CD player MP3 player or laptop computer AUX Auxiliary button Push the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack When the AUX button is pushed with no device plugged into the jack the audio system does not change to the AUX mode NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo mini plug cable when connecting your music device to the audio system Music may not play properly when a monaural cable is used oe SS 6 PUSH o NOFF OFF CD RDM random play button Radio SCAN tuning button Radio station preset select buttons CD RPT repeat play button Radio CAT category REW rewind button for SEEK TRACK iPod MENU button 4 60 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 10 11 12 SEEK CAT SAA2779 CD EJECT button Radio CAT category FF fast forward
274. from USB Device models with navigation system Transfer Titles from USB models with out navigation system Update the in vehicle Gracenote Database using a USB memory Search for the title from information acquired from the Internet Visit www nissanusa com gracenote for de tails Transfer Missing Titles to USB Transfer the information for an album re corded without titles to a USB memory Visit www nissanusa com gracenote for details Update Gracenote from HDD models with navigation system Update Miss ing Titles models without navigation system Search for the title using the database on the hard drive flash memory Music Box Music Box Settings Music Box Used Free Space Q Automatic Recording SAA2517 Models with navigation system r Music Box gt Music Box Settings 0 00 Music Box Used Free Space jel Delete Tracks from Music Box B Automatic Recording H Recording Quality H Gracenote Database Version B SAA2438 Models without navigation system Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 91 Music Box settings To set the Music box hard drive flash memory to your preferred settings select the Menu key during playback and the Music Box Settings key with the multi function controller and then push the ENTER button Music Box Used Free Space Information about Saved Album Saved Track and Remaining Time is displayed A
275. from the LOCK position and the key cannot be recognized by the system You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key Use the registered key See INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM in the 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments section for more details 3 SHIFT P warning This warning appears when the ignition switch Is pushed to stop the engine with the selector lever in any position except the P Park position If this warning appears move the selector lever to the P Park position or push the ignition switch to the ON position An inside warning chime will also sound See INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM in the 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments section 4 PUSH warning This warning appears when the selector lever is moved to the P Park position with the ignition switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT P warning appears To push the ignition switch to the OFF position perform the following procedure SHIFT P warning Move the selector lever to P gt PUSH warning Push the ignition switch ignition switch position is turned to ON PUSH warning gt Push the ignition switch ignition switch position is turned to OFF 5 Key battery discharge indicator This indicator appears when the key battery is running out of power If this indicator appears replace the battery with a new one See INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT in the 8 Mai
276. from the displayed video You may also use the multi function controller to select an item from the displayed video When the operation screen is being shown use the multifunction controller or touch screen to select an item from the displayed menus il PAUSE Select the m key to pause the DVD To resume playing the DVD use the PLAY key gt tay Select the p gt key to start playing the DVD for example after pausing the DVD CI STOP Select the mi key to stop playing the DVD CTE Next Previous Chapter Select the pp or e4 key to skip the chapter s of the disc forward backward The chapters will advance go back the number of times this key is selected gt al Commercial Skip Type A This function is only for DVD VIDEO DVD VR Select the p or key to skip forward or backwards by the set amount as defined in the DVD Settings menu Top Menu Type A Menu Type B When the Top Menu key is selected in the screen while a DVD is being played the top menu specific to each disc will be displayed For details see the instructions on the disc DVD Setting Key Title Menu Angle Mark SAA2498 Type A example A DVD gt Settings sisi DVD gt A DVD gt Settings sisi oo UP A Title Menu SCC dM mao oC On swe G oN osym O fF e e Po oN a SAA3087 Type B example Monitor heater a
277. function Operates the Navigation function Displays the vehicle Information function Operates the Audio function Displays User Guide e Phone Command Command Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Vehicle Phonebook Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone Call history Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken Change Number Corrects the recognized phone number available during phone number entry Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 139 Navigation Command Command Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book Address Searches for a location by the street address specified and sets a route to the location Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination Information Command Command Fuel Economy Maintenance Traffic Information Where am I Displays your current location e Audio Command Command AM FM XM Music Box CD Starts to play a CD
278. function controller can also be used to select tracks when the Blue tooth audio play mode screen is shown on the display Bluetooth audio will be indicated on the header of the screen 4 82 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems REPEAT RPT RANDOM RDM To change the play mode push the button repeatedly and the mode changes as follows Normal Shuffle All Tracks Shuffle Group Repeat 1 Track Repeat All Tracks gt Repeat Group Normal Operation keys To operate a Bluetooth audio device select a key displayed on the operation screen using the multi function controller gt Play Select the key to start playing when pausing Select this key again to pause the audio play ul Pause Select the key to pause the Bluetooth audio device Select this key again to resume playing Play Mode The play mode setting display will appear when the Menu key is selected Choose the preferred play mode from the following items e Shuffle Choose Shuffle OFF Shuffle All Tracks and Shuffle Group e Repeat Choose from Repeat OFF Repeat 1 Track Repeat All Tracks and Repeat Group Settings Bluetooth BACK Bluetooth Q SAA2511 Bluetooth settings To set up the Bluetooth device system to the preferred settings push the SETTING button and select the Bluetooth
279. g the mechanical key e Turning the driver s door key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle O will lock all doors e Turning the driver s door key cylinder once to the front of the vehicle will unlock the driver s door After returning the key to the neutral position turning it to the front again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors e You can switch the lock system to the mode that allows you to open all the doors when the key is turned once See HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON in the 4 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems section OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY if so equipped The driver s door key operation also allows you to open and close the window that is equipped with the automatic open close function See POWER WINDOWS in the 2 Instruments and controls section To open the windows turn the driver s door key cylinder to the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second The door is unlocked and the window keeps opening while turning the key This function can also be performed by pushing and holding the door UNLOCK button of the key See REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYS TEM later in this section To close the windows turn the driver s door key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second The door is locked and the window keeps closing while turning the key SPA2847 LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
280. g the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle road and traffic 1 Remain calm and do not overreact 2 Do not apply the brakes 3 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 4 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 5 If there is nothing in the way steer the vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle speed is reduced Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced 6 When it is safe to do so gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface When all tires are on the road surface steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane e f you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle road or traffic conditions gra dually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a blow out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under inflated tires Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle especially at highway speeds Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by main taining the correct air
281. g wheel 3 After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to 23y speak a command Operating tips e Voice commands cannot be accepted when the iconis e The list displayed can be scrolled by tilting the menu control switch on the steering wheel e f the command is not recognized the Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 153 system announces Please say again Repeat the command in a clear voice e Push the BACK button once to return to the previous screen e f you want to cancel the command push and hold the TALK y amp switch for 1 second The message Voice canceled will be announced e To skip the voice guidance function and give the command immediately press the TALK w switch to interrupt the system Re member to speak after the tone e f you want to adjust the volume of the system feedback push the volume control switch or on the steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement How to speak numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands Refer to the following examples General rule Only single digits O zero to 9 can be used For example if you would like to say 500 five zero zero can be used but five hundred cannot Phone numbers Speak phone numbers according to the follow ing examples e 1
282. ght ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics TEMPERATURE A B AND C The temperature grades A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sus tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading either separately or in combi nation can cause heat build up and possible tire failure EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY Your NISSAN is covered by the following emission warranties For USA e Emission Defects Warranty e Emissions Performance Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In formation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it has beco
283. gy and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technol ogy and related content delivery For more information please visit www gracenote com CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2009 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2009 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade marks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote SES l lt SIS SAA3601 AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS if so equipped The auxiliary input jacks are located in the center console NTSC PAL compatible devices such as video games camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks Compatible audio devices such as some MP3 players can also be connected to the system through the auxiliary jacks The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica tion purposes e Yellow video input e White left channel audio input Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 93 e Red right channel audio input Before connecti
284. h switch When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position modes of the trip computer can be selected by pushing the J switch Each time the J switch is pushed the display will change as follows The current and average fuel consumption mode shows the current and average fuel consump tion Instruments and controls 2 21 Average fuel consumption MPG 1 100 km or km l and speed MPH or km h Fuel consumption The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset Resetting is done by pushing the switch for longer than 1 second The average speed is also reset at the same time The display is updated every 30 seconds At about the first 1 3 mile 500 m after a reset the display shows Speed The average speed mode shows the average 2 22 Instruments and controls vehicle speed since the last reset Resetting is done by pushing the switch for longer than 1 second The average fuel consumption is also reset at the same time The display is updated every 30 seconds The first 30 seconds after a reset the display shows kk 1 T me 00 00 mies 000 0 SIC4701 Elapsed time and trip odometer miles or km Elapsed time The elapsed time mode shows the time since the last reset The displayed time can be reset by pushing the switch for longer than 1 second The trip odometer is also reset at the same time Trip odometer T
285. hat pre teens and chil dren be properly restrained in a rear seat NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat If this is not possible the occupant classification sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints Failing to properly secure child restrains and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF See CHILD RESTRAINTS earlier in this section for proper use and installation If the front passenger seat is not occupied the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash However heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation because of the object being detected by the occupant classification sensors Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation such as if a child is standing on the seat or if two children are on the seat contrary to the instructions in this manual Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly Using the passenger air bag status light you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat occu pied The light will not illuminate when the front passenger seat is unoccupied If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
286. he keypad of the remote controller gt PLAY SKIP STOP SKIP SAA3656 Rear screen models with navigation system 4 106 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems TitleMenu CS S CSC S Pads OSI CO swe SIP ospy OC gt O me OOO Oooo o o Down Y SAA3087 Front screen models without navigation system DVD 01 001 00 01 11 WIDE SAA3657 Rear screen models without navigation system Setting keys Select the Settings key with the multi function controller and push the ENTER button to adjust the following settings The items indicated with can also be set from the rear display Push the DVD button on the remote controller while a DVD is being played Select the preferred item using the joystick on the remote controller and push the ENTER e button Key DVD VIDEO models with navigation system Keys for the DVD menu operation are displayed Oxo Move the cursor to select a DVD menu Enter Enter the selected menu Move Change the display location by moving the operation key Back Return to the previous screen gt Hide Hide the operation key Title Menu front Menu rear DVD VI DEO Menus specific to each disc will be shown For details see the instructions attached to the disc Title Search DVD VIDEO A scene that belongs to a specified title will be displayed each time the
287. he sa button within 5 seconds to change the language Push s MODE PHONE END to select Push we lag TALK PHONE SEND to select Current lan guage English English English French 5 Ifyou decide not to change the language do not press either button After 5 seconds the VR session will end and the language will not be changed Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 125 nounces the next set of available commands Say Special Dialing to dial more than 10 When prompted for a Passkey code enter Connecting procedure 1234 from the handset The Passkey code NOTE 1234 has been assigned by NISSAN and digits or any special characters The connecting procedure must be per cannot be changed l formed when the vehicle is stationary If 4 Say the number you wish to call starting with the area code in single digit format If the system has trouble recognizing the correct phone number try entering the number in the following groups 3 digit area code 3 The system asks you to say a name for the phone If the name is too long or too short the the vehicle starts moving during the pro 4 cedure the procedure will be cancelled Main menu Connect Phone A Add Phone Initiate from handset Name phone D Push the amp button on the steering wheel The system announces the available com mands Say Connect Phone
288. he vehicle than there are seat belts If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened it may in dicate a malfunction in the system Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer No changes should be made to the seat belt system For example do not modify the seat belt add mate rial or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury Once a seat belt pretensioner has activated it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor See a NISSAN dealer Removal and installation of the pretensioner seat belt system com ponents should be done by a NISSAN dealer All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any colli sion by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN recommends that all seat belt as semblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no da mage and continue to operate prop erly Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision Always follow the restraint manufacturer s inspection instruct
289. he service operator carefully read the following precautions WARNING e Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed e Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck CAUTION e When towing make sure that the transmission axles steering system and drivetrain are in working condi tion If any unit is damaged dollies must be used e Always attach safety chains before towing For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle RV see FLAT TOW ING in the 9 Technical and consumer information section of this manual In case of emergency 6 13 rear wheels on the ground if you do not use towing dollies Always release the parking brake SCE0976 TOWING RECOMMENDED BY the drivetrain If it is necessary to NISSAN tow the vehicle with the rear wheels NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be raised always use towing dollies towed with the driving front wheels off the under the front wheels ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as e When towing CVT models with the illustrated front wheels on towing dollies e Push the ignition switch to the CAUTION i ACC or ON position and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device e Never tow Continuously Variable Transmission CVT models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground forward e Move the selector lever to the N or backward
290. he trip odometer mode shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven since the last reset Resetting is done by pushing the switch for longer than 1 second The elapsed time is also reset at the same time RANGE 0000 miles SIC4702 Distance to empty dte miles or km The distance to empty dte mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The dte is constantly being calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption The display is updated every 30 seconds The dte mode includes a low range warning feature If the fuel level is low the warning is displayed on the screen When the fuel level drops even lower the dte display will change to e f the amount of fuel added is small the display just before the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position may continue to be displayed When driving uphill or rounding curves the fuel in the tank shifts which may momenta rily change the display OUTSIDE TEMP FICY 37 F SIC4703 Outside air temperature ICY F or C The outside air temperature is displayed in F or C in the range of 22 to 140 F 30 to 60 C The outside air temperature mode includes a low temperature warning feature If the outside air temperature is below 37 F 3 C the warning is displayed on the screen The outside temperature sensor is located in front of th
291. heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 133 NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM models with navigation system NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands free operation of the Phone Navigation Information and Audio systems in one of two modes Standard Mode or Alternate Command Mode In Standard Mode commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system You can complete your desired operation by simply following the prompts given by the system See NISSAN VOICE RECOG NITION STANDARD MODE later in this section for details For advanced operation you can use the Alternate Command Mode See NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION ALTERNATE COM MAND MODE later in this section for details When this mode is active an expanded list of commands can be spoken after pushing the TALK switch and the voice command menu prompts are turned off Review the expanded command list which is available when this mode is active Note that in this mode the recognition success rate may be affected as the number of available commands and the ways of speaking each command are increased To switch one mode to another see each mode description later in this section To improve the recognition success rate when Alternate Command Mode is active try using the Speaker Adaptation Function available in that mode Otherwise it is recommended that Alternate Command Mode be turned off and S
292. ht High beam indicator light Low beam indicator light Malfunction Indicator Light MIL oo urg Overdrive off indicator light Security indicator light Turn signal hazard indicator lights Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light e OFF if so equipped CRYSTAL DISPLAY later in this section WARNING LIGHTS ABS or OQ Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light When the ignition switch is in the ON position the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off This indicates the ABS is operational If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer If an ABS malfunction occurs the anti lock function is turned off The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assis tance See BRAKE SYSTEM in the 5 Starting and driving section or Brake warning light This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch Is in the ON position the light comes on when the parking brake is applied Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch Is in the ON position the light warns of a low brake fluid level If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied stop the vehicle and perform the
293. htness and contrast of the screen to the preferred level Clock adjustment Push the ENTER SETTING button until Setting Clock and On screen Clock appear on the display Then turn the TUNE SCROLL control dial to turn the clock on or off 1 Push the ENTER SETTING button until Setting Clock and Clock Adjust appear on the display 2 Turn the TUNE SCROLL control dial to adjust the hour Push the ENTER SETTING button Turn the TUNE SCROLL control dial to adjust the minute 5 Push the ENTER SETTING button gt The display will return to the regular clock display after 5 seconds Switching the display Pushing the AUX button will switch the displays as follows iPod USB AUX gt iPod USB FM AM radio operation radio FM AM band select Pushing the radio band select button will change the band as follows AM FM1 FM2 AM When the radio band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the channel last played The last channel played will also come on when the ON OFF button is pushed to ON Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 61 If another audio source is playing when the radio band select button is turned on the audio source will automatically be turned off and the last radio channel played will come on When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio wi
294. i cally decrease the light will start blinking or the color of the light will become reddish If one or more of the above signs appear contact a NISSAN dealer SIC3668 HEADLIGHT SWITCH Lighting Q Turn the switch to the a position The front park side marker tail license plate and instrument lights will come on 2 Turn the switch to the 4O position Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on Instruments and controls 2 31 Autolight system if so equipped The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically To set the autolight system 1 Make sure the headlight switch is in the AUTO position 4 Push the ignition switch to the ON position 3 The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off To turn the autolight system off turn the switch to the OFF pa or 4O position 2 32 Instruments and controls The autolight system can turn on the headlights automatically when it is dark and turn off the headlights when it is light The headlights will also be turned on automa tically at twilight or in rainy weather when the windshield wiper is operated continuously if so equipped If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position and one of the doors is opened and this condition is continued the headlights remain on for 5 minutes Automatic headlights off delay You can keep the headlights on for up to 180
295. ic Air CONOINONG i ceccntccenomecenstusneceouce ss 4 36 Door IOC cps paeron uE REA cteestemeness 3 6 Drive positioner s s s 3 36 MOONKOGE ys ceninge erena eea 2 51 Seat POSWONE ccnsvectecevewaretsedecevenedes 3 36 AUX Auxiliary button su cwsseeeesecees 4 60 4 63 AUX Auxiliary input 0eeee eee 4 60 4 63 Avoiding collision and rollover vies veeceresvvewece es 5 6 B Back door See lift gate ceeeeeeees 3 25 Batte ccs ec coreete hi ticertwess se EE SAREE 8 13 Battery saver system 6 ceeee eee ees 2 33 Intelligent Key cn cedcceisesenieeserredentgegares 8 22 Variable voltage control system 8 15 Before starting the engine 0 0e 5 11 Blind Spot Warning BSW system 5 17 Blind Spot Warning BSW system warning WCHL des ee eee peeareeced omen tent A E 2 11 Bluetooth hands free phone system models with navigation system 006 4 110 Bluetooth hands free phone system models without navigation system 55 4 121 Bluetooth streaming audio 0seeeees 4 79 Booster seats cc1ec iceerceceevemscenddddeecesece 1 43 Brake Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 29 Brake fluid ne sserrre rars kicen a 8 12 Brake system cievaiestevsadoecees sessgaleeeses 5 29 Parking brake operation s s s 5 16 Warning NAG iscssscicesecesceteessssciedecess 2 11 Break in schedule ccoedscacetsmeesdercreeceeivesens 5 26 Brightness control
296. ication label If weight ratings are exceeded move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings TOWING A TRAILER WARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling braking and perfor mance and may lead to accidents CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged e For the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 MPH 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo Re member that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle s engine drivetrain steer ing braking and other systems A NISSAN Towing Guide U S only is available on the website at www nissanusa com This guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required Technical and consumer information 9 15 for proper towing MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the Towing Load Specifica tion chart The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight e When towing a trailer load of 1 000 Ibs 454 kg or more trailers with a brake system MUST be used The
297. icle is stuck in mud or snow the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the VDC system off To turn off the VDC system push the VDC OFF switch The indicator will illuminate OFF Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system See VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM in the 5 Starting and driving section POWER OUTLET T A CAUTION aad e Use power outlet with the engine To use the power outlet pull the cover as illustrated running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Avoid using power outlet when the air conditioner headlights or rear window defroster is on Before inserting or disconnecting a plug be sure the electrical acces sory being used is turned OFF When not in use be sure to close the cap Do not allow water to contact the outlet SIC4723 SIC4724 CAUTION The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt 120W 10A power draw Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit Push the plug in as far as it will go If good contact is not made the plug may overheat or the internal tem perature fuse may open
298. idnnrrtadixeantdnsies Most common factors contributing to vehicle CONOS Ol ionendctnssascwuencetebrexdacecaanacteanitinocddecenes Environmental factors influence the rate of COMPOSI isc rant a donesdacunevans pide wievddiecece ee piiaseened To protect your vehicle from CorroSion 66 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle it is important to take proper care of it To protect the paint surface wash your vehicle as soon as you can e after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain e after driving on coastal roads e when contaminants such as soot bird droppings tree sap metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface e when dust or mud builds up on the surface Whenever possible store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area When it is necessary to park outside park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover WASHING Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of water Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean lukewarm never hot water 7 2 Appearance and care CAUTION e Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent Some car washes especially brushless ones use some acid for cleaning The acid may react with some plas
299. ift gate open This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle See EXHAUST GAS carbon mon oxide in the 5 Starting and driv ing section of this manual Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could un knowingly activate switches or con trols Unattended children could become involved in serious acci dents Always be sure that hands and feet are clear of the gate frame to avoid injury while closing the lift gate SPA2881 OPERATING MANUAL LIFT GATE To open the lift gate unlock it and push the lift gate opener switch A Pull up the lift gate to open The lift gate can be unlocked by e pushing the unlock button gg on the Intelligent Key twice e pushing the lift gate request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key e pushing the door handle request switch twice while carrying the Intelligent Key e pushing the power door lock switch to the unlock position e inserting the mechanical key into the driver s door key cylinder and turning it to the rear of the vehicle twice To close the lift gate pull down until it securely locks OPERATING POWER LIFT GATE if so equipped The power lift gate system can be operated when all of following conditions are satisfied e The vehicle is stopped e Battery voltage is normal e The lift gate is unlocked e The selector lever is in the P Park position If the conditions are interrupted when th
300. ilable in Alaska Hawaii and Guam It may take some time to receive the activation signal after subscribing the XM Satellite Radio After receiving the activation signal an available channel list will be automatically updated in the radio For XM push the ignition switch from LOCK to ACC to update the channel list Audio main operation Head unit The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and high frequency ranges automatically in both radio reception and CD playback ON OFF Volume control Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position and then push the ON OFF button while the system is off to turn on the last audio source i e FM or CD which was playing immediately before the system was turned off While the system is on pushing the ON OFF button turns the system off Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal ance To adjust Bass Treble Balance and Fade push the Audio control knob When the display shows the setting you want to change Bass Treble Balance and Fade rotate the Audio control knob to set the desired setting For the other setting methods see HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON earlier in this section This vehicle has some sound effect functions as follows e Speed Sensitive Vol For more details see VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS models with center multi function control panel earlier in this section Monitor heater air condit
301. iles are played the playback time may not be displayed correctly Supported file systems 4 50 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Specification chart for FM AM SAT radio with Compact Disc CD player Supported media CD CD R CD RW DVD ROM 5 DVD R DVD RW DVD R DL USB2 0 CD CD R CD RW DVD ROM 5 DVD R DVD RW DVD R DL ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Romeo Joliet ISO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported Supported file systems Files saved using the Live File System component on a Windows Vista based computer are not supported UDF Bridge UDF1 02 ISO9660 UDF1 5 UDF2 0 VDF1 5 VDF2 0 packet writing is not supported USB memory FAT16 FAT32 MPEG Audio Layer 3 MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz 48 kHz 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR WMA7 WMAB WMAE Supported WMA 2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz 48 kHz versions 1 32 kbps 192 kbps VBR 4 MPEG AAC AAC 5 Sampling frequency 8 kHz 96 kHz 16 kbps 320 kbps VBR 4 ID3 tag VER1 0 VER1 1 VER2 2 VER2 3 VER2 4 MP3 only Tag information Song title and Artist name WMA tag WMA only Models with navigation system Folder levels 8 Folders 512 including root folder Files 5 000 Folder levels ae Models without navigation system Folder levels 8 Folders and files 999 Max 255 files for one folder OSEE Models with navigation system 100 characters Text character number limitation a M
302. ill automatically turn on sensing the out side air temperature to defog the wind shield Do not select the air recirculation mode for the best defogging perfor mance 4 38 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems NOTE Do not set the temperature too low when the front defogger mode is on the indi cator on the front defroster gy FRONT button is illuminated Doing so may fog up the windshield Manual operation The manual mode can be used to control the heater and air conditioner to your desired settings Fan speed control Push the fan speed control button gg P to increase the fan speed Push the fan speed control button to decrease the fan speed Push the AUTO button to change the fan speed to the automatic mode Air flow control Push the MODE button to change the air flow mode Air flows from the center and side ventilators u vw Air flows from the center and side ventilators and foot outlets af Air flows mainly from the foot outlets way Air flows from the defogger and foot outlets Temperature control Push the temperature control buttons A and W to set the desired temperature The temperature can be set within the range of 60 to 90 F 18 to 32 C Air recirculation Push the air recirculation lt gt button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle The indicator light on the a
303. ill start the CD Do not use 3 1 in 8 cm discs or PLAY When the DISC AUX or DISC CD play button is pushed with the system off and the CD loaded the system will turn on and the CD will start to play When the DISC AUX or DISC button is pushed with the CD loaded and the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the CD will start to play Menu models with navigation system When the Menu key on the display is selected while the CD is being played the menu screen will be displayed The following menu options are available e Folder List CD with compressed audio files Displays the folder list e Track List Displays the track list e Play Mode Select a play mode from the following items Normal 1 Folder Repeat CD with compressed audio files 1 Track Repeat 1 Disc Random 1 Folder Random CD with compressed audio files 4 70 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems e Record to Music Box for CD Select to choose specific songs on the CD to record to the Music Box e Title Text Priority for CD Set the priority to CDDB Compact Disc Data Base to acquire track information from the Gracenote Database or set the priority to CD TEXT to acquire the information from CDs e Automatic Recording for CD When this item is turned on the Music Box hard drive flash memory automatically starts recording when a CD i
304. ill not illuminate regardless of the condition CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery MOOD LIGHTS SIC4747 Map lights The mood lights A located in the following positions will illuminate whenever the headlight switch is in the zpa or 4O position e next to the map lights e under the instrument panel e under the driver s power window switch Instruments and controls 2 55 VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened When the cover is closed the light will turn off The lights will turn off after 15 minutes when the lights remain illuminated to prevent the battery from becoming dis charged 2 56 Instruments and controls CARGO LIGHTS SIC2925 When the switch is in the DOOR position A the light illuminates while the lift gate is opened When the lift gate is closed the light will turn off When the switch is in the OFF position the light will turn off The lights will turn off after 15 minutes when the lights remain illuminated to prevent the battery from becoming dis charged HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER if so equipped HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand held transmitters into one built in device HomeLink Universal Transceiver e Will opera
305. ill soon recover Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on an iPod An iPod nano 1st generation may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it Is connected during a seek operation In this case please manually reset the iPod An iPod nano 2nd generation will con tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using the iPod nano 2nd generation iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Compressed Audio Files MP3 WMA AAC Explanation of terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files MP3 conversion of an audio track can reduce the file size by approximately a 10 1 ratio Sampling 44 1 kHz Bit rate 128 kbps with virtually no perceptible loss in quality The compression reduces certain parts of sound that seem inaudible to most people WMA Windows Media Audio WMA is a compressed audio format created by Micro soft as an alternative to MP3 The WMA 4 48 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the s
306. ill start the USB memory PLAY When the AUX button is pushed with the system off and the USB memory inserted the system will turn on Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 63 If another audio source is playing and a USB memory is inserted push the AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode Next Previous File and Fast Forward Rewind When the i or button is pushed for more than 1 5 seconds while a USB memory is being played the USB memory will play while forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the USB memory will return to normal play speed When the i or s button is pushed for less than 1 5 seconds while the USB memory is being played the next track or the beginning of the current track on the USB memory will be played Folder selection To change to another folder in the USB memory turn the folder selector or choose a folder displayed on the screen using the multi function controller REPEAT RPT When the RPT button is pushed while the USB memory is played the play pattern can be change as follows To change the play mode push the RPT button repeatedly and the mode will change as follows Normal 1 Folder Repeat gt 1 Track Repeat gt Normal RDM RANDOM RDM When the RDM button is pushed while a USB memory is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows To change the play mod
307. ill turn on Heater operation Heating This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets 1 Push the outside air circulation aa button to switch to the outside air circulation mode The indicator light turns on 2 Push the air flow control button to change to the sp mode 3 Push the fan speed control buttons to set the desired fan speed 4 Push the temperature control buttons to set the desired temperature between the middle and the hot position Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center ventilators 1 Push the outside air circulation aad button to switch to the outside air circulation mode The indicator light turns on 2 Push the air flow control button to change to the 7 4 mode 3 Push the fan speed control set the desired position amp buttons to Bi level heating This mode directs cool air from the side and center vents and warm air from the foot outlets When the temperature is set to the maximum hot or cool position the air between the ventilators and the foot outlets is the same temperature 1 Push the outside air circulation aad button to switch to the outside air circulation mode The indicator light turns on 2 Push the air flow control button to change to the sp mode 4 32 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 3 Push the fan speed control buttons to set the desired fan speed 4 P
308. in size and load rating to the original equipment tires If you do not it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Generally snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire If you install snow tires they must be the same size brand construction and tread pattern on all four wheels For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction cap abilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires TIRE CHAINS Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location Check the local laws before instal ling tire chains When installing tire chains make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer s suggestions Use only SAE Class S chains Class S chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance Vehicles that can use Class S chains are designed to meet the SAE standard minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device tire chains or cables The minimum clearance
309. inate Some examples are e Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle e lf a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle e Ifa computer or similar equipment or a DC AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle FCC Notice For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interfer ence including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert When adding air to an under inflated tire the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure Vehicle set up 1 Park the vehicle in a safe and level place 2 Apply the parking brake and place the selector lever in the P Park position 3 Place the igni
310. indicator will be displayed and each track will play for about 10 seconds in succession To stop at the current track push the button again for more than 1 5 seconds A v TUNE FF REW FOLDER but ton When the amp or button is pushed for more than 1 5 seconds while a CD is being played the CD will be played while forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the CD will return to the normal play speed When the or button is pushed for less than 1 5 seconds while a CD with MP3 or WMA is being played the first track in the next or the previous folder will be played 1 to 6 CD select buttons To change to another CD already loaded in the CD changer push the corresponding CD select button 1 to 6 button When the RPT button is pushed while a CD is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows CD _ RPT ALL DISCS RPT 1 DISC RPT 1 TRACK CD with MP3 or WMA _ RPT ALL DISCS RPT 1 DISC RPT 1 TRACK RPT 1 FOLDER RDM RDM random button To change the play sequence push the button to select the mode CD T RDM ALL DISCS RDM 1 DISC RPT ALL DISCS CD with MP3 or WMA RDM ALL DISCS RDM 1 DISC RPT ALL DISCS RDM 1 oun RDM All the tracks of the CD will be played continuously in random order The display indicates RDM amp cD EJECT button To eject the CD selected by the CD select button push the CD EJECT button
311. ing Add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning In the winter season add a windshield washer antifreeze Follow the manufacturer s instructions for the mixture ratio Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of window washer fluid Recommended fluid Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concen trate Cleaner amp Antifreeze or equivalent CAUTION e Donot substitute engine anti freeze coolant for window washer solution This may result in damage to the paint e Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank e Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water BATTERY Keep the battery surface clean and dry Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer disconnect the negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharging it WARNING Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks Hydrogen gas generated by the batter
312. int for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE STRAINT If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires the use of a top tether strap it must be secured to an anchor point WARNING e In the 3rd row seat a child restraint with a top tether strap can only be used in the center position Do not place in an outboard seating posi tion and attempt to angle the tether strap to the center position LATCH rigid attachment The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments or seat belts See TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE STRAINT later in this section for installation instructions e Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circum stances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses e Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage the top tether strap during a collision Your child could When installing a child restraint carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the
313. ion Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 151 Information User Guide 1 8 SAA2547 Displaying user guide You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide which contains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands 1 Push the INFO button on the instrument panel 2 Select the Others key using the multi function controller and push the ENTER button 3 Highlight the Voice Recognition key using the multi function controller and push the ENTER button 4 Highlight the User Guide key using the multi function controller and push the EN TER button 5 Highlight an item using the multi function controller and push the ENTER button Available items e Getting Started Describe the basics of how to operate the NISSAN Voice Recognition system e Lets Practice Mode that allows practicing by following the instructions of the system voice e Using the Address Book Refer to Navigation System Owner s Man ual e Finding a Street Address if so equipped Refer to Navigation System Owner s Man ual e Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation e Help on Speaking Displays useful tips for how to correctly speak commands in order for them to be properly recognized by the system 4 152 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems
314. ion 2 Doors will not lock while any door is open Unlocking doors 1 Push the UNLOCK p button once 2 The hazard indicator flashes once The driver s door will unlock 3 Push the UNLOCK button again within 1 minute 4 The hazard indicator flashes once again All the doors and the lift gate will unlock All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the UNLOCK p button 2 while the doors are locked If during this 1 minute time period the UNLOCK p button 2 is pushed all doors will be locked auto matically after another 1 minute e Opening any door including the lift gate e Pushing the ignition switch Opening windows if so equipped The UNLOCK gg button operation also allows you to open the window that is equipped with the automatic open close function See POWER WINDOWS in the 2 Instruments and controls section To open the windows push the door UNLOCK g button for about 3 seconds after the door is unlocked To stop opening release the UNLOCK Q button Windows cannot be closed using the button on the Intelligent Key If the window open operation is stopped in mid operation while pushing the UNLOCK button release and push the UNLOCK mq button again until the window opens completely The door windows can be opened or closed by turning the mechanical key in a door lock See Pre drivi
315. ion lt SSS1126 Install l mo co Align the headrest stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure that the headrest is facing the correct direction The stalk with the adjustment notch must be installed in the hole with the lock knob Push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down Properly adjust the headrest before an occupant uses the seating position SPA1456 SSS1162 Front and 2nd row seats ARMRESTS The armrest angle can be adjusted freely Front and 2nd row seats Q Pull the armrest between A and To use the armrests on any seat pull them down 2 Pull it down to to the resting position 3 Pull up the armrest slowly it can be secured between and Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 13 FLEXIBLE SEATING WARNING Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold down position In a collision people riding in these areas without proper re straints are more likely to be ser iously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any cargo is on the rear seats Head restraints and headrests should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protectio
316. ion e Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat posi tioning aid See Floor mat posi tioning aid later in this section The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn SAI0038 Front example Floor mat positioning aid This vehicle includes front floor mat brackets to act as floor mat positioning aid NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model The front floor mats have grommet holes in them Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floorwell Periodically check to make certain that the mats are properly positioned SAIO058 Bracket positions The illustration shows the location of the floor mat brackets Appearance and care 7 5 SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution Allow the belts to dry completely before using them See SEAT BELTS in the 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section WARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor NEVER use bleach dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts since these materials may se verely weaken the seat belt webbing 7 6 Appearance an
317. ion For additional information see EN GINE COOLING SYSTEM in the 8 Main tenance and do it yourself section BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery To maintain maximum efficiency the battery should be checked regularly For additional information see BATTERY in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti freeze drain the cooling system including the engine block Refill before operating the vehicle For details see ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section TIRE EQUIPMENT SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement How ever the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy condi tions If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads NISSAN recommends the use of MUD amp SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels Consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type size speed rating and availability information For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than
318. ion Maintenance I M test of the emis sion control system The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns Usually the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition Before taking the I M test check the vehicle s inspection maintenance test readiness condition Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine If the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds the I M test condition is not ready If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds the I M test condition is ready Contact a NISSAN dealer to set ready condi tion or to prepare the vehicle for testing EVENT DATA RECORDERS EDR This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whethe
319. ion switch is pushed to the OFF position This is not a malfunction METER RING ILLUMINATION AND NEEDLE SWEEP The ring illumination surrounding meters and gauges illuminates when the driver s door is closed after getting into the vehicle with the Intelligent Key carried in When the engine is started the indicator needles will sweep in the speedometer and tachometer and the ring illumination will be brightened gradually This function can be turned off See TRIP COMPUTER later in this section SIC3571 Speedometer SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour MPH and kilometers per hour km h SIC4632 Odometer twin trip odometer Odometer twin trip odometer The odometer Q and twin trip odometer are displayed when the ignition switch is in the ON position The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips Changing the display Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 8 on the right side of the combination meter panel changes the display as follows TRIP A gt TRIP B gt TRIP A Resetting the trip odometer Pushing the TRIP RESET switch for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero Instruments and controls 2 5 SIC4633 TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM Do not rev the engine into the red zone
320. ional pas sengers cargo and or optional equipment such as the trailer hitch will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR Front GAWR Rear GAWR Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR and Towing capacity All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops highway weigh stations building supply centers or salvage yards To determine the available payload capacity for tongue load use the following procedure 1 Locate the GVWR on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label 2 Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer 3 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum tongue load To determine the available towing capacity use the following procedure 1 Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the Towing Load Specification chart found 9 18 Technical and consumer information later in this section 2 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum towing capacity To determine the Gross Trailer Weight weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo that are normally in the trailer when it is towed Make sure the Gross trai
321. ioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 67 Switching the display e Models with satellite radio Pushing the DISC AUX button will switch the displays as follows iPod USB CD DVD gt Music Box gt Bluetooth Audio if so equipped gt AUX gt iPod USB e Models without satellite radio Pushing the DISC button will switch the display as follows CD DVD gt Music Box gt CD DVD Pushing the AUX button will switch the display as follows USB iPod AUX FM AM SAT if so equipped radio op eration When the radio band select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the channel last played The last channel played will also come on when the ON OFF button is pushed to ON If another audio source is playing when the radio band select button is turned on the audio source will automatically be turned off and the last radio channel played will come on When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception radio FM AM band select Pushing the radio band select button will change the band as follows AM FM1 FM2 AM radio SAT band select if so equipped Pushing the radio band select button will change the band as follows XM1 gt XM2 gt XM3 XM1 The satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam TUNE Tuning e For AM
322. ions and replacement re commendations The child restraints 1 18 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system should be replaced if they are damaged PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips not the waist and place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never run the lap shoulder belt over your abdominal area Contact your doctor for specific recommendations INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts depending on the injury Check with your doctor for specific recommendations THREE POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WARNING e Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly 1 19 SSS0292 Fastening the seat belts 1 Adjust th
323. ir conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 73 DVD settings Select the Settings key to adjust the following settings Key DVD VIDEO Type A Keys for the DVD menu operation are displayed Mo Move the cursor to select a DVD menu Enter Enter the selected menu Move Change the display location by moving the operation key Back Return to the previous screen 43 gt Hide Hide the operation key Title Menu DVD VIDEO Some menus specific to each disc will be shown For details see the instructions on the disc Title Search DVD VIDEO DVD VR The scene with the specified title will be displayed each time the side or side is selected Group Search VIDEO CD A scene in the specified group will be displayed each time the side or side is selected 10 Key Search DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD CD DA DVD VR Select the 10 Key Search key to open the number entry screen Input the number to be searched and select the OK key The specified Title Chapter or Group Track will be played Select No VIDEO CD Select the Select No key to open the number entry screen Input the number to be searched and select the OK key The specified scene will be played Angle DVD VIDEO If the DVD contains different angles such as moving images the current image angle can be switched to another one Select the Angle key The angle wil
324. ir recirculation lt gt button will illuminate The air recirculation mode cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode Outside air circulation e Models with Advanced Climate Control System ACCS Push the air recirculation lt gt button twice to draw outside air into the passenger compartment The indicator light on the air recirculation lt gt button will turn off e Models without Advanced Climate Control System ACCS Push the outside air circulation aad button to draw outside air into the passen ger compartment The indicator light on the outside air circulation a gt button will turn on Automatic air intake control e Models with Advanced Climate Control System ACCS Push the gj AUTO auto recirculation button to switch to the automatic air intake control mode The indicator light on the gp AUTO auto recirculation button will illuminate In this mode the sensor detects odors and gas to automatically switch between the air recirculation mode and the outside air circulation mode See Ad vanced climate control system later in this section for details e Models without Advanced Climate Control System ACCS To switch to the automatic control mode push the intake air control button for about 2 seconds The indicator lights both air recirculation lt gt and outside air circula tion a gt buttons
325. ire 3 pronged extension cord rated for at least 10A Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI pro tected grounded 110 VAC outlet Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury MEMO Starting and driving 5 35 MEMO 5 36 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency Emergency engine shut off cxsssezunevansintecemecseneueses 6 2 POSTE eae A E E E ene 6 11 EER i AEE E EE 6 2 If your vehicle overheats ssssssssssssssesersrrrrrrrr 6 12 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 6 2 Towing your vehicle es siicccanasinsceredueseessmennecwnediwodes 6 13 Changing a flat tire 0 0 cece eee eee ee eee teen eee 6 3 Towing recommended by NISSAN 2 45 6 14 IANS SVAN c2dtec ete deepen EER 6 10 Vehicle recovery freeing a stuck vehicle 6 15 EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving perform the following procedure e Rapidly push the push button ignition switch 3 consecutive times or e Push and hold the push button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds 6 2 Incase of emergency FLAT TIRE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS TEM TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK T
326. is occurs remove the USB device and dehu midify or ventilate the USB player comple tely e The USB player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment tempera ture is extremely high Decrease the tem perature before use e Do not leave USB memory in a place prone to static electricity or where the air condi tioner blows directly The data in the USB memory may be damaged e The vehicle is not equipped with a USB memory stick e A USB device cannot be formatted with this Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 47 system To format a USB device use a personal computer Partitioned USB devices may not be played correctly Some characters used in other languages Chinese Japanese etc are not displayed properly on the vehicle center screen Using English language characters with a USB device is recommended Do not connect a USB device if a connector or cable is wet Allow the cable and or connectors to dry completely before con necting the USB device If the connector is exposed to fluids other than water evapora tive residue may cause a short between the connector pins Large video podcast files cause slow responses in an iPod The vehicle center display may momentarily black out but it will soon recover If an iPod automatically selects large video podcast files while in the shuffle mode the vehicle center display may momentarily black out but it w
327. ision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury CAUTION Use care when placing or removing items from the roof rack If you cannot comfortably lift the items onto the roof rack from the ground use a ladder or Instruments and controls 2 47 COAT HOOKS The coat hooks are equipped beside the rear personal lights CAUTION Do not place items which are more than 2 Ib 1 kg on the hook 2 48 Instruments and controls SUNSHADE if so equipped SIC4659 CAUTION Do not pull the sunshade in any direc tion other than the up This may da mage the sunshade Sunshades are equipped on the 2nd and 3rd row seat windows To raise the sunshade pull the knob A up and hang the sunshade on the hooks To store the sunshade remove the sunshade from the hooks and lower it WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS WARNING e Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows Use the win dow lock switch to prevent unex pected use of the power windows e Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could un knowingly activate switches or con trols and become trapped in the window Unattended children could become involved in serious acci dents The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position If the driver s o
328. justments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with your child Always follow all recommended procedures LRS0464 All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat 1 44 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Booster seat installation CAUTION Do not use the lap shoulder belt Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety Child restraints and Booster seats sections earlier in this section before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat ls SSS0640 If you must install a booster seat in the front seat move the seat to the rear most position Position the booster seat on the seat Only place it in a forward facing direction Always follow the booster seat manufacturer s instructions LRS0454 Front passenger position The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable If necessary adjust or remove the head restraint or headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit If the head restraint or headrest i
329. k latches SIC4721 2nd row center console 2nd row center console Pull up on lever A to open the console box lid To remove the 2nd row center console box 1 Pull up on handle on rear of console and tilt the console up 2 Move the console box toward the rear of the vehicle and lift out To reinstall the 2nd row center console box 1 Tilt the console box forward and install the front of the console box so that the hook engages the slot in the base 2 Push down the rear of the console box to lock the console in place 3 oa L Y Q Sy al CARGO FLOOR BOX To open the cargo floor box lid pull the strap SIC4731 To hold lid open secure the strap to the hook on the under side of cargo floor box lid WARNING To prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop do not drive with the cargo floor box lids open Always remove the strap from hook and close the cargo floor box lids before driving Instruments and controls 2 45 Instruments and controls HOOKS Ib 4 kg to the hook Cargo area The 4 hooks are located on the right and left side of the cargo area WARNING e Always make sure that the cargo is properly secured Use the suitable ropes and hooks e Unsecured cargo can become dan gerous in an accident or sudden stop CAUTION Do not apply a total load of more than 7 Ib 3 kg to the hook Seatbacks The hooks are located on the front and 3rd
330. ke pedal while pushing the RESUME ACCELERATE or SET COAST switch and reset at the cruising speed the cruise control will disengage Turn the MAIN switch off once and then turn it on again e The cruise control will automatically cancel if the vehicle slows more than 8 MPH 18 km h below the set speed e f you move the selector lever to the N Neutral position the cruise control will be canceled To reset at a faster cruising speed use one of the following methods e Depress the accelerator pedal When the vehicle attains the desired speed push and release the SET COAST switch e Push and hold the RESUME ACCELERATE switch When the vehicle attains the desired speed release the switch e Push then quickly release the RESUME ACCELERATE switch Each time you do this the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To reset at a slower cruising speed use one of the following methods e Lightly tap the brake pedal When the vehicle attains the desired speed push the SET COAST switch and release it e Push and hold the SET COAST switch Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed e Push then quickly release the SET COAST switch Each time you do this the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h Starting and driving 5 25 To resume the preset speed push and release the RESUME ACCELERATE switch The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle s
331. kg 135 kg 336 kg 3 Occupants Luggage Remaining available X cargo and luggage am load capacity 150Ibx2 300lb 30 lb x2 60 Ib Uaa 70kg 135kg 14kg 27kg 472 kg eeepants Luggage Remaining available R x R LEC cargo and luggage load capacity 150 Ib x 5 750 b 30 Ib x 5 150 b 500 Ib 70 kg 340 kg 14 kg 70 kg 227 kg ST10445 6 Steps for determining correct load limit il Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 lbs or 640 340 5 x 70 300 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer Technical and consumer information 9 13 load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the a
332. l can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2 000 Ib 907 kg Class Il hitch Class Il trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3 500 Ib 1 588 kg CAUTION Use hitches designed for your vehi cle when towing Check with your NISSAN dealer for availability of suitable genuine NISSAN hitches The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the im pact absorbing bumper Do not use axle mounted hitches Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system brake system etc to install a trailer hitch To reduce the possibility of addi tional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear where practi cal remove the hitch and or recei ver when not in use After the hitch is removed seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes water or dust from entering the passenger compartment Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted Tire pressures When towing a trailer inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label e Trailer tire condition size load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers specifications Safety chains Always use a suitable chain between your vehicle and the trailer The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch not
333. l remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not ori ginally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS CAUTION The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH 25 km h the TPMS may not operate correctly Be sure to correctly install the specified size of tires to the four wheels Instruments and controls 2 13 Master warning light When the ignition switch is in the ON position the master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal display e No key warning e Low fuel warning e Low washer fluid warning e Parking brake release warning e Door lift gate open warning e Loose fuel cap warning e Check tire pressure warning See DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DIS PLAY later in this section Seat belt warning light and chime The light and chime remind you to fasten seat belts The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position and will remain illuminated until the driver s seat belt is fastened At the same time the chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds unless the driver s seat belt is securely fastened The seat belt warning light for the front passenger will ill
334. l change each time the side or side is selected Angle Mark DVD VIDEO When this item is turned on an angle mark will be shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene can be seen from a different angle Menu Skip DVD VIDEO DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly when the Menu Skip key is turned on Note that some discs may not be played directly even if this item is turned on 4 74 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems CM Skip DVD VIDEO Type A Select the CM Skip key Choose the setting time from 15 30 or 60 seconds by selecting the side or side DRC DVD VIDEO DVD VR DRC Dynamic Range Compression automati cally adjusts the soundtrack volume level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers DVD Language DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD Select the DVD Language key to open the number entry screen Input the number corre sponding to the preferred language and select the OK key The DVD top menu language will be changed to the one specified Display To adjust the image quality of the screen select the preferred adjustment items Audio Select the preferred language for audio Subtitle DVD VIDEO DVD VR Select the preferred language for subtitles Display Mode DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD DVD VR Select from the Full Wide Normal or Cinema m
335. l counterclockwise to make the sound quieter AUDIO AUDIO button To change the audio settings push the AUDIO button to select the mode while the CD or radio iS on Push the AUDIO button until the desired mode appears on the display The display will change as follows BASS TREBLE FADE BALANCE gt BEEP Push the SEEK TRACK FILE button or TUNE FF REW FOLDER button to adjust the audio settings BASS to decrease to increase TREBLE to decrease to increase FADE F to front fade R to rear fade BALANCE R to right balance L to left balance BEEP When this item is turned on a beep will sound each time a button is operated Once the audio settings are set to the desired level push the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or CD display appears If the audio settings mode is unchanged for approximately 5 seconds the audio settings mode will automatically return to the normal mode Push the DISP button or SCRL button to return to the normal mode button Clock display on off Push the CLOCK button for less than 1 5 seconds to turn the clock on or off Clock adjustment 1 Push and hold the CLOCK button until the clock display starts to flash 2 Push the SEEK TRACK FILE button to adjust the hours 3 Push the TUNE FF REW FOLDER button to adjust the minutes 4 Push the CLOCK button again or push DISP button or SCRL button to exit the clock set
336. l for details Volume The following kinds of phone volume can be set Pushing the button and selecting the Volume key can also operate the same settings e Ringtone Incoming Call Outgoing Call To increase or decrease the volume select the Ringtone Incoming Call or Out going Call key and adjust it with the multi function controller e Automatic Hold When this function is activated an incoming phone call is automatically held e Vehicle Ringtone When this function is activated a specific ringtone that is different from the cellular phone will sound when receiving a call Auto Download When this item is activated the phonebook of a hands free phone is automatically downloaded at the same time that the hands free phone is connected Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 119 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are encountered try the following solutions Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number 1 until the problem is resolved 1 Ensure that the command is valid See NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM models with navigation system later in this section page 4 134 2 Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone te a ineecolmane 3 Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the a
337. l lock simultaneously How ever when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position doors cannot be locked To unlock pull the inside lock knob to the unlock position E h T ni UT SPA2387 SPA2104 Opening Closing the sliding door The sliding door will be latched at the fully opened closed position CAUTION Do not put your hands or feet on the To open close the sliding door manually pull the harness A or the bracket This door handle or the inside door handle may cause damage to the vehicle or personal injury Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 7 SPA2701 CAUTION Before closing the sliding door make sure that no objects are placed on the door step Otherwise the harness A could be damaged 3 8 Pre driving checks and adjustments SLIDING DOOR AUTO CLOSURE FUNCTION if so equipped The auto closure function will operate when the sliding door is not fully closed WARNING When the auto closure function is operating keep hands and feet away from the sliding door to prevent inju ries SPA2819 CHILD SAFETY SLIDING DOOR LOCK The child safety sliding door locks help prevent sliding doors from being opened accidentally especially when small children are in the vehicle When the levers are in the lock position Q the child safety sliding door locks engage and the sliding doors can only be opened by the outside door handles To disengage move the leve
338. lacement ssssesrssrsarrarrarrenrr err 8 24 Vanity mirror lights saesae 2 56 Warning indicator lights and audible PEMINGES ceitccevsdncererxeceusdsuscceedacesans 2 10 Xenon headlights ccdapecousevedchens oe reiencee s 2 31 Lights Exterior and interior light replacement Loading information See vehicle loading information 066 9 12 Lock Automatic door lOCKS vescse lt esenucstensxsawedene 3 6 Door IOGKS esrar eea 3 4 Liftgate lOOK sem iririre e 3 25 Power door OCK irreiriresr errereen eriti 3 4 Locking with mechanical key eeee 3 4 Loose fuel cap warning sssssissrererenns 2 19 3 29 Low outside temperature warning 2 20 Low tire pressure warning light 55 2 12 Low tire pressure warning system See tire pressure monitoring system TPMS 5 3 M Maintenance Batley e sneen ir vetusueeeien vercewserrecsder 8 13 General maintenance 0ccceeeeeeeeeeees 8 2 10 4 Indicators for maintenance 0eeee 2 20 Inside the VEHICICs cicosssccieeessecawnseetewea es 8 3 Maintenance precautions eeeeeeeees 8 5 Maintenance requirements 2 000 8 2 Outside the vehicle ccccceeeeee eens 8 2 Seat belt maintenance cceeee eens 1 25 Malfunction indicator light MIL 0 66 2 15 Manual air conditioner oo ssi2iisevcvcaseeisesaeceses 4 31 Manual front seat adjustment 0006 1
339. ld be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects e When backing up the vehicle up a hill objects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear When backing up the vehicle down a hill objects viewed in the monitor are SAA1897 closer than they appear Use the 1 Visually check that the parking space is safe inside mirror or glance over your before parking your vehicle shoulder to properly judge dis 2 The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on tances to other objects the screen A when the selector lever is moved to the R Reverse position The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and 4 24 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems SAA1898 3 Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines enter the parking space 4 Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines 0 parallel to the parking space while referring to the predicted course lines 5 When the vehicle is parked in the space completely move the selector lever to the P Park position and apply the parking brake DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The distance guide line and the vehicle width guide line should
340. lease consult the manual for your Bluetooth Device for more details Once your Bluetooth device is connected to the in vehicle audio system it will automatically reconnect whenever the device is present in the vehicle and you select Bluetooth Audio from your audio system You do not need to manually reconnect for each usage Regulatory information FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 79 Bluetooth trademark Bluetooth is a trademark owned J Bluetooth by Bluetooth SIG Inc and li Settings Settings Bluetooth Display censed to Clarion Co L
341. ler weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings Example Gross Vehicle Weight GVW as weighed on a scale including passengers cargo and hitch 5 520 Ib 2 503 kg Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR from F M V S S C M V S S certification label 5 818 Ib 2 639 kg Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR from Towing Load Specification chart 8 500 Ib 3 856 kg Maximum Trailer towing capacity from Tow ing Load Specification chart 3 500 lb 1 588 kg 5 818 Ib 2 639 kg GVWR 5 520 lb 2 503 kg GVW B Available for tongue 298 Ib 135 kg weight 8 500 Ib 3 856 kg GCWR 5 520 lb 2 503 kg GVW 2 980 Ib 1 351 kg Capacity available for towing 998 Ib 135 kg 9 980 Ib 1 351 kg Available tongue weight Available capacity 10 tongue weight The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be tween 10 to 15 of the trailer
342. les Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interfer ence including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 103 BEFORE OPERATING THE DVD MO BILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Precautions Start the engine when using the DVD entertain ment system WARNING The driver must not attempt to operate the DVD system or wear the head phones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation CAUTION e Only operate the DVD while the vehicle engine is running Operating the DVD for extended periods of time with the engine OFF can dis charge the vehicle battery e Do not allow the system to get wet Excessive moisture such as spilled liquids may cause the system to malfunction e While playing VIDEO CD media this DVD player does not guarantee complete
343. lied Continuously Variable Transmission CVT P Park position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P Park position without applying any brakes Parking brake Check the parking brake operation regularly The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied If the parking brake needs adjustment see a NISSAN dealer Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system for example buckles anchors adjusters and retractors operate properly and smoothly and are installed securely Check the belt webbing for cuts fraying wear or damage Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters seatback recliner etc to ensure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position Check that the head restraints headrests move up and down smoothly and that the locks if so equipped hold securely in all latched positions Steering wheel Check for changes in the steering conditions such as excessive free play hard steering or strange noises Warning lights and chimes Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly Maintenance and do it yourself 8 3 Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wiper
344. ling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident Load ing beyond the specified capa city may also result in failure of other vehicle components Before taking a long trip or whenever you heavily load your vehicle use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level For additional information re Maintenance and do it yourself 8 29 garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Cana da in the Warranty Information REVSSONEENTS SUR LES REUSE LECHARGNEN see owens al ADDITIONAL Booklet FRONT a SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL x NOMBRE DE SI GES TOTAL VOIR LEMANUEL REAR X DELUSAGER ARRIERE POUR PLUS DE RENSEIGHEMENTS The combined weight of occupants SPARE and cargo should never exceed XX kg or XX lbs DE RECHANGE Le poids total des occupants et des marchandises ne doit jamais d passer XX kg cu XX lb TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL x FRONT x REAR xX NOMBRE DE SI GES TOTAL AVANT ARRIERE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XX kg or XX Ibs Toids total des occupants et des marchandises ne doit jamais d passer XX kg ou XX Ib SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE pee TAILLE PRESSION DES PNEUS FROID SEE OWNER S MANUAL FRONT FOR ADDITIONAL AVANT P XXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX PSI INFORMATION REAR YOIR LE MANUEL xl DE LUSAGER P XXX XXRX
345. ll any liquids on the USB memory CD DVD e e Handle a CD DVD by its edges Never touch Refer to the USB memory Owner s Manual for the surface of the disc Do not bend the the details disc e Always place the discs in the storage case SAIS WIN WENGE SAA1854 when they are not being used odels with navigation system e To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion Do not use a conventional record cleaner or Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 95 C SOURCE SAA1855 Models without navigation system 1 Source select switch 2 Menu control models with navigation system or audio tuning switch models without navigation system switch 3 Volume control switch 4 BACK switch STEERING WHEEL MOUNTED CON TROLS FOR AUDIO if so equipped Menu control switch models with navi gation system or audio tuning switch models without navigation system While the display is showing a MAP navigation systems only STATUS or Audio screen tilt the switch upward or downward to select a station track CD or folder For most audio sources tilting the switch up down for more than 1 5 seconds provides a different function than tilting up down for less than 1 5 seconds AM and FM radio e Tilting up down for less than 1 5 seconds will skip up down to the next or previous preset station e
346. ll automatically change from stereo to monaural reception TUNE Tuning Turn the radio TUNE SCROLL control dial for manual tuning Or SEEK tuning Push the SEEK button or to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station SCAN tuning Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low to high frequencies and stop at each broad casting station for 5 seconds Pushing the button again during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 seconds SCAN tuning moves to the next station 1 to Station memory operations 12 stations can be set for the FM band 6 each for FM1 and FM2 and 6 stations can be set for the AM band 1 Choose the radio band using the radio band select button 2 Tune to the desired station using the SEEK CAT SCAN button or the radio TUNE SCROLL control dial 3 Push and hold the desired station preset button to until the radio mutes 4 The station indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Memorizing is now complete 5 Other buttons can be set in the same manner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be erased In that case reset the desired stations Compact Disc CD player operation Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position and insert the Compact Disc
347. low easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system See NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM models with na vigation system later in this section To delete an entry select the Delete key at step 3 age AOM Yul Sx Call History Connect Phone Handset Phonebook Connected Phones Dial Number Calls a phonebook entry saved to the vehicle SAA2524 MAKING A CALL To make a call follow this procedure 1 Push the button on the steering wheel The PHONE screen will appear on the display Select the Handset Phonebook key on the PHONE menu Select the desired entry from the list Confirm the correct entry by selecting for the correct number from the list 4 116 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Phone Handset Phonebook 8 0 i Yil Geaco 045 0 Phonebook XXXX z XXXXXXXXXXX Del Phone No 1 4 SAA2621 5 Select the Call key to start dialing the number There are different methods to make a call Select one of the following options instead of Handset Phonebook in step 2 above Vehicle Phonebook Select an entry stored in the Vehicle s Phonebook Call History Select an outgoing incoming or missed call downloaded from your cell phone depend ing on your phone s compatibility Dial Number Input the phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen See HOW TO USE TOUCH S
348. ly The player may skip while driving on rough roads The CD player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment tempera ture is extremely high Decrease the tem perature before use Only use high quality 4 7 in 12 cm round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGI TAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight CDs that are of poor quality dirty scratched covered with fingerprints or that have pin holes may not work properly The following CDs may not work properly Copy control compact discs CCCD Recordable compact discs CD R Rewritable compact discs CD RW Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunction 3 1 in 8 cm discs CDs that are not round CDs with a paper label CDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs It has no capabilities to record or burn CDs If the CD cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed CHECK DISC Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly the label side is facing up etc Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches PUSH EJECT This is an error due to the temperature inside the player is too high Remove the CD by pushing the EJECT button and after a short time reinsert the CD The CD can be played when the temperature of the player retur
349. ly after the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of time Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection dis ruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual If the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System seems to be malfunctioning please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help e Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise e Refer to the cellular phone Owner s Manual regarding the telephone pairing procedure specific to your phone battery charging cellular phone antenna etc e The antenna display on the monitor will not coincide with the antenna display of some cellular phones e Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible to hear the caller s voice clearly as well as to minimize its echoes e If reception between callers is unclear adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve the clarity REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use o
350. m E I R P Modulation FHSS GFSK 8DPSK 2 4DQPSK Number of Channels 79 This wireless equipment can t be used for any services related to safety because there is the possibility of radio interfer ence REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two conditions 4 122 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 1 2 this device may not cause interference and this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause un desired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Bluetooth trademark J Bluetooth Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Visteon Corpora tion USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands free operation of the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System
351. m and compare it to the specifica tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label Add air to the tire as needed If too much air is added press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure Re check the pressure and add or release air as needed Install the valve stem cap Check the pressure of all other tires including the spare Maintenance and do it yourself 8 31 COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE P225 65R 240 kPa 16 99T 35 PSI P235 55R 240 kPa 18 99T 35 PSI REAR P225 65R 240 kPa 16 99T 35 PSI ORIGINAL TIRE P235 55R 240 kPa 18 99T 35 PSI T135 80D 420 kPa SPARE 16 101M 60 PSI TIRE T135 90D 420 kPa 16102M 60PSI 8 32 Maintenance and do it yourself SDI1575 Example TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the side wall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental character istics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number TIN for safety stan dard certification The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall P215 60R16 94H Example Q Tire size example P215 60R16 1 94H P The P indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles Not all tires have this information Three digit number 215 This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge
352. mage of the selected file is displayed on the right side of the screen When a number of folders are included in the USB memory select a folder from the list to display the file list Images will not be shown on the display while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce driver distraction To view images stop the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake SAA2492 Full Screen Display The full screen display will appear when select ing the Full Screen Display key To operate the Image Viewer or to change the settings select the desired key using the multi function controller e gt Start Select the C key to start playing the slideshow Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 21 e J Gtop Select the key to stop the slideshow e Ca Next Select the Coa key to display the next file e _ _ Previous Select the Cw key to display the previous file Setting the Image Viewer The Image Viewer setting display will appear when selecting the Settings key on the full screen display The following settings are available for the full screen display e Slideshow Speed Select the Slideshow Speed key From the following display select the changing time from 5 10 30 60 seconds or No Auto Change e Slideshow Order Select the Slideshow Order key From the following display
353. maximum GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating should not exceed the value specified in the following Towing Load Specification chart 9 16 Technical and consumer information e ST10541 The GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle including passengers and cargo plus the total trailer load Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling braking and performance The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads but also the places you plan to tow Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced on very steep grades or for low traction situations for example on slippery boat ramps Temperature conditions can also affect towing For example towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheat ing The transmission high fluid temperature protection mode which helps reduce the chance of transmission damage could activate and automatically decrease engine power Vehicle speed may decrease under high load Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load weather and road conditions WARNING Overheating can result in reduced en gine power and vehicle speed The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a collision Be especially careful when driving If the
354. mbient noise level in the vehicle correctly 4 Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defroster on NOTE If it is too noisy to use the phone it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized 5 If more than one command was said at a time try saying the commands separately 1 Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored See VEHICLE PHONEBOOK earlier in this The system consistently selects the section wrong voicetag i j 2 Replace one of the names being confused with a new name 4 120 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM models without navigation system if so equipped WARNING e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation e If you find yourself unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so CAUTION To avoid draining the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine SAA3677 1 PHONE SEND amp button 2 PHONE END se button Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can se
355. me lost you may obtain a replacement by writing to e Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In formation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it has become lost you may obtain a replacement by writing to e Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 425 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS For USA If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying NISSAN If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot be come involved in individual problems be tween you your dealer or NISSAN To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Ad ministrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consume
356. meter P 2 5 Wiper and washer switch P 2 28 Fuse box cover P 8 20 Fuel filler door opener handle P 3 29 Hood release handle P 3 24 Headlight aiming control P 2 33 Power door main switch P 3 25 P 3 9 Steering wheel mounted controls left side Audio control steering switch P 4 96 Hands Free Phone System switch P 4 1 10 Horn P 2 36 Steering wheel mounted controls right side Cruise control system P 5 24 if so equipped INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 Center ventilator P 4 28 10 Heater air conditioner control P 4 29 or audio system P 4 43 11 Parking brake P 5 16 12 Tilting telescopic steering wheel lever or switch P 3 31 13 Front passenger air bag status light P 1 53 14 Heated seat switch P 2 36 15 Cup holders P 2 41 16 Power outlet P 2 39 17 Instrument lower box P 2 44 or CD DVD slot P 4 99 18 Power outlet main switch P 2 39 19 Audio system P 4 43 20 Glove box P 2 44 if so equipped Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual if so equipped kk 1314 15 16 171814 19 20 SS10824 1 Side ventilator P 4 28 Navigation system 2 Meters and gauges P 2 4 7 Center multi function control panel P 4 2 3 Push button ignition switch P 5 8 Navigation system 4 Hazard warning flasher switch P 2 35 Vehicle information and setting buttons P 4 7 palclor ever raavig 8 Rear window and o
357. n Display tilt Adjust the display angle by Pg the DIS PLAY TILT button Aw Vv DVD mode To select the DVD mode push the DVD button USB mode To select the USB mode push the USB button AUX mode To select the AUX auxiliary input jacks mode push the AUX button Volume To control the speaker volume level push the VOL button A Vv Display To adjust the rear display screen aspect color system 3D Y C filter and picture mode etc push the DISP button 4 108 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Sound To change the language push the SOUND button Each time the button is pushed the language will change to each language stored in the DVD Track Channel To skip to the previous or next DVD scene selection push the TRACK CH button th IN VY n Keypad PLAY PAUSE button STOP button FORWARD button REWIND button FORWARD button for commercial skip for DVD VIDEO and DVD VR G REWIND button for commercial skip for DVD VIDEO and DVD VR H Oea Rear display settings To adjust rear display setting select the preferred key and push the ENTER e button The following settings are available Aspect Select the display size from CINEMA WIDE FULL or NORMAL using the joystick on the remote controller Picture Mode To adjust the display brightness automatically select the Brightness key
358. n The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds SPA2856 Sliding door one touch unlock open function if so equipped When the sliding door one touch switch is pushed once while the Intelligent Key is carried the sliding door will be unlocked and will fully open automatically All other doors if already locked will remain locked If the sliding door is already unlocked the sliding door will open automatically To close the sliding door push the sliding door one touch switch once When the sliding door is closed it will remain unlock so be sure to lock the vehicle When closed the sliding door will not lock automatically To lock the sliding door manually lock the inside knob before closing the sliding door or push the LOCK button on the Intelligent Key after the Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 17 door is closed See REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM later in this section Power lift gate open if so equipped 1 Carry the Intelligent Key 2 Push the power lift gate opener switch 3 The lift gate will unlock and automatically open 4 The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds To close the lift gate push the power lift gate button on the key or power lift gate switch on the instrument panel or lower part of the lift gate See LIFT GATE in the 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments section 3 18 Pre driving checks and adjustme
359. n 8 cm discs CD DVDs that are not round CD DVDs with a paper label CD DVDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges This audio system can only play prere corded CD DVDs It has no capabilities to record or burn CD DVDs If the CD DVD cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed Disc Read Error Confirm that the CD DVD is inserted correctly the label side is facing up etc Confirm that the CD DVD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches Please Eject Disc This may be an error due to the tempera ture inside the player being too high Remove the CD DVD by pushing the EJECT button and after a short time reinsert the CD DVD The CD DVD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal If the error persists consult your local dealership Unplayable File The file may be copy protected The file is not MP3 WMA AAC M4A or DivX type Region Invalid The DVD is not for region 1 or all regions Use DVDs with a region code 1 ALL or 1 included for your DVD entertain ment system The region code A is displayed as a small symbol printed on the top of the DVD This vehicle installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a region code other than 1 or ALL Copyright and trademark e The technology protected by the U S patent and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovisi
360. n against injury in an accident Always replace and adjust them properly if they have been removed for any reason If the head restraints are removed for any reason they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident When returning the seatbacks to the upright position be certain they are completely secured in the latched position If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury 1 14 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS1163 Folding the 2nd row seats Before folding the rear seats Secure the seat belts on the seat belt hooks on the side wall See Seat belt hooks later in this section To fold down the seatbacks Pull the lever on the 2nd row seat To return the seatbacks Lift up each seatback and push it to the upright position until it is latched CAUTION When folding the 2nd row seat for maximum cargo hauling be sure that cargo does not contact the center console of the 2nd row seat to avoid possible damage to the console SSS1150 Back side of the third row seatback Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
361. n left right until the desired position is achieved The heater and air conditioner operate when the engine is running The air blower will operate even if the engine is turned off and the ignition Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 29 switch is in the ON position 4 30 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems SAA3594 SAA3514 OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate However this is not a malfunction After the coolant temperature warms up the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally The sensors A and for automatic air conditioner located on the instrument panel help maintain a constant temperature Do not put anything on or around the sensors Q O e 2 DPZ Temperature control buttons GS air recirculation button eG outside air circulation button Qy FRONT front defroster button Display fet REAR rear window defroster button See REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR SAA3596 DEFROSTER SWITCH in the 2 Instruments and controls section Q and G i fan speed control buttons ON OFF button for air conditioning system MODE air flow control button A C air conditioner ON OFF button 11 REAR control button MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER Contr
362. n or Snow and construction A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type size speed rating and availability Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire Replacing tires with those not ori ginally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS For additional information regard ing tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Information Booklet All season tires NISSAN specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance all year including snowy and icy road conditions All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and or M amp S Mud and Snow on the tire sidewall Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appro priate in some areas Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M amp S on the tire sidewall If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels Snow tires If snow tires are needed it is necessary to select tires equivalent
363. n and needle sweep 2 4 Speedometer and Odometer ccceeeeeeeeeeeaes 2 5 TACHO MCU Fics cc csuasderacvrstoseicatest ecienidonstvecieadeas 2 6 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 6 PGI AUG P I E E 2 7 Compass if SO equipped as ssssiieicieai iirrainn 2 7 Zone variation change procedure 0 2 9 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 10 CHECKING BUDS ssisrmirsasreenerrret sinoni 2 10 Wanna OS erraina EN 2 10 madicator NOMS srsssnisern es renna 2 15 Audible reminders sssssssssssrrrreressssserererrnn 2 16 Dot matrix liquid crystal display 2 17 Indicators for operation ssssssssssssrrrrrrrrrrrrrne 2 18 Indicators for MaINIGNANCC s cacacaevccaserederececiwes 2 20 To CONDUG enere EEEREN 2 21 Security SySleME cances tutes cctencanan a REET RENAS 2 25 Vehicle Security System 2 25 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System 2 27 Windshield wiper and washer switch 0 5 2 28 Rear window wiper and washer switch 2 29 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch 2 30 Headlight and turn signal switch ceeeeee ee 2 31 Xenon headlights if so equipped ceceees 2 31 FICACIGI SWiOhiiriroses sia nEaN 2 31 Turn signal switch sssssssssssssrrrrrrrrrrrerrrereenn 2 35 Fog light switch if so equipped 060 2 35 Hazard warning flasher Switch 0 eeeeeeeee eee 2 35 Models
364. n down into a lower gear depending on the vehicle speed High fluid temperature protection mode This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode If the fluid temperature be comes too high for example when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads such as when towing a trailer engine power and under some conditions vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited Fail safe If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions such as excessive wheel spin ning and subsequent hard braking the fail safe system may be activated This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly In this case place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds Then place the igni tion switch back in the ON position The vehicle should return to its normal operat ing condition If it does not return to its normal operating condition have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary WARNING When the high fluid temperature pro tection mode or fail safe operation occurs vehicle speed may be gradually reduced The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a collision Be especially careful when driving If ne cessary pull to the side of the road ata safe
365. n shows vehicle and navigation information for your Convenience The information shown on the screen should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle See the following for details Information Fuel Economy Weather Info SAA2478 Models with navigation system Fisiecorony SSCS Maintenance U y O SAA1511 Models without navigation system 4 8 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Vehicle information display 1 Push the INFO button on the control panel 2 Select an item from the INFO menu 3 After viewing or adjusting the information on the following screens push the BACK button to return to the INFO menu See the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual for the following items e Where am I e Traffic Info e Weather Info e Map Update e Navigation Version When the ignition switch is in the ON position the Navigation Version key is displayed after selecting the Others key Fuel Economy information The distance to empty average fuel economy Information Fuel Economy Li Information gt Fuel Economy st current fuel SCOnomy will be displayed for reference Distance to Empt kkkh mile E B4 nics To reset the average fuel economy Avg Fuel Avg Average CLL l Fuel Economy Econ or Average Fuel Economy select the Fuel Econ Breen Reset Fuel Eco 30 Reset Fuel Eco or Reset key M Fuel Economy0 10 20 30mPG Fuel Eco Histor
366. n switch to the OFF i The inside warning chime sounds continuously ee a get out of the vehicle position position The NO KEY warning appears on the display the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside When closing the door after getting warning chime sounds for a few seconds out of the vehicle The ignition switch is in the ACC or Move the selector lever to the P Park Aces a a aspiay ano ime OFF position and the selector lever position and push the ignition switch to y is not in the P Park position the OFF position When closing the door with the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds and all The Intelligent Key is inside the Camihe ineligent Ker wik vo inside lock knob turned to LOCK the doors unlock vehicle or cargo area d g y you When pushing the request switch or The Intelligent Key is inside the Carry the Intelligent Key with you the LOCK A button on the The outside chime sounds for a few seconds vehicle or cargo area Intelligent Key to lock the door A door is not closed securely Close the door securely Replace the battery with a new one The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears on the See INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY When pushing the ignition switch to display REPLACEMENT in the 8 Mainte start the engine nance and do it yourself section The NO KEY warning appears on the display and the The Intelligent Key is not in the Carry the intelligent Key with you inside warning chime sounds f
367. n the following conditions understeer vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input oversteer vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations When the VDC system operates the VDC warning light amp in the instrument panel flashes so note the following e The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path e You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly e Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC warning light in the 2 Instruments and controls section If a malfunction occurs in the system the VDC warning light illuminates in the instrument panel The VDC system automatically turns off The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system The VDC off indicator amp illuminates to indicate the VDC system is off When the VDC switch is used to turn off the system the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel The VDC warning light amp flashes if this occurs All other VDC functions are o
368. n the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position The automatic unlock function can be deactivated or activated To deactivate or activate the automatic door unlock system perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2 3 6 Pre driving checks and adjustments push and hold the power door lock switch to the g position UNLOCK for more than 5 seconds 4 When activated the hazard indicator will flash twice When deactivated the hazard indicator will flash once 5 The ignition switch must be placed in the OFF and ON position again between each setting change When the automatic door unlock system is deactivated the doors do not unlock when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position To unlock the door manually use the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side SPA2818 SLIDING DOORS CAUTION e Always use the door handle to open or close the sliding door Do not attempt to open or close the door by merely placing your hand on the door edge or door slide roller as this may cause injury e When opening the door on a slope be sure to fully open the door until it locks Locking with inside lock knob To lock from the outside without an Intelligent Key push the lock knob to the lock position 4 and then close the door When the door is closed all doors wil
369. nce and driving enjoyment Engine power may be automatically re duced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers Starting the vehicle 1 After starting the engine fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the selector lever out of the P Park position This CVT is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P Park to any driving position while the ignition switch is in the ON position The selector lever cannot be moved out of the P Park position and into any of the other positions if the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK OFF or ACC position 2 Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the selector lever to a driving position 3 Release the parking brake and foot brake pedal and then gradually start the vehicle in motion WARNING e Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P Park or N Neutral to R Reverse D Drive or L Low position Always depress the brake pedal until shift ing is completed Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident e Cold engine idle speed is high so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up e Never shift to P Park or R Re verse while vehicle is moving Fail ure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident CAUTION
370. nce log section of your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Maintenance and do it yourself 8 19 FUSES SDI2181 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not operate check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are turned off 2 Open the engine hood 8 20 Maintenance and do it yourself Remove the fuse fusible link holder cover by pushing the tab 4 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller located in the passenger compartment fuse box SDI1754 5 If the fuse is open A replace it with a new fuse 8 Spare fuses are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box 6 If anew fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Fusible links If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition check the fusible links If any of these fusible links are melted replace only with genuine NISSAN parts PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not operate check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are turned
371. ncoming Call Outgoing Call For the details of these items see BLUE TOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM models with navigation system later in this section Switch Beeps When this item is turned on you will hear a beep sound when you use a button Guidance Voice When this item is turned on you will hear voice guidance in the navigation operation or in other operations NOTE When the voice guidance is being an nounced during audio playback turning the volume knob does not adjust the music level it adjusts the guidance volume level If voice guidance is not being heard please check the Guidance Volume level SAA2605 Button beeps settings models without navigation system The Button Beeps screen will appear when pushing the SETTING button selecting the Button Beeps key with the multi function controller and pushing the ENTER button Button Beeps When this item is turned to ON you will hear a beep sound when you use a button 4 14 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems SAA2917 Models with navigation system e 3 _Rear Display Open _ox__ e SAA2079 Models without navigation system REAR DISPLAY settings if so equipped The Rear Display screen will appear when pushing the SETTING button selecting the Rear Display key Rear Display models with navigation sys tem Rear Display Open models without navigation syst
372. nctions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch 4 When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio signals are present near the operating location the Intelligent Key system s operating range becomes narrower and the Intelligent Key may not function properly The operating range is within 31 50 in 80 cm from each request switch Q If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass handle or rear bumper the request 3 14 Pre driving checks and adjustments SPA2074 switches may not function When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range it is possible for anyone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch to lock unlock the doors including the lift gate SPA2407 DOOR LOCKS UNLOCKS PRECAU TION e Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the In telligent Key is outside the vehicle e After locking with the door handle request switch verify the doors are securely locked by testing them e To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle make sure you carry the key with you and then lock the doors Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch The door will be unlocked but will no
373. nd Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint using the LATCH system 1 Position the child restraint on the seat Always follow the child restraint manufac turer s instructions Forward facing web mounted step 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point See Installing top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor SSS0646 Forward facing rigid mounted step 3 The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head restraint or headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit If the head restraint or headrest is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the child restraint is removed See HEAD RE STRAINTS earlier in this section and ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTS earlier in this section for head restraint or headrest adjustment information If the seating position does not have an adjust
374. nd driving R Reverse Use this position to back up Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position The brake pedal must be depressed and the selector lever button pushed in to move the selector lever from P Park N Neutral or any driving position to R Reverse N Neutral Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to N Neutral and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving L Low Use this position for maximum engine braking on steep downhill gradients climbing steep slopes and whenever approaching sharp bends Do not use the L position in any other circumstances SSD1176 Overdrive O D OFF switch When the O D OFF switch is pushed with the selector lever in the D Drive position the indicator light in the instrument panel illuminates Use the overdrive off mode when you need improved engine braking To turn off the overdrive off mode push the O D OFF switch again The indicator light will turn off Each time the engine is started or when the selector lever is shifted to any position other than the D Drive position the overdrive off mode will be automatically turned off Accelerator downshift In D position For passing or hill climbing fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor This shifts the transmissio
375. nd have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline e If an oxygenate blend other than methanol blend is used it should contain no more than 10 oxygenate MTBE may however be added up to 15 e If a methanol blend is used it should contain no more than 5 methanol methyl alcohol wood alcohol It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corro sion inhibitors If not properly formu lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and or vehicle performance problems At this time sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate blend fuels immediately change to a non oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage E 85 fuel E 85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline E 85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle U S govern ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing Technical and consumer information 9 3 pumps to be identified by a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percen
376. ndow outside the vehicle the Intelligent Key may function LOCK ACC ON SSD1021 PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal the ignition switch position will change as follows e Push center once to change to ACC e Push center two times to change to ON e Push center three times to change to OFF No position illuminates e Push center four times to return to ACC e Open or close any door to return to LOCK during the OFF position Starting and driving 5 9 The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be switched to LOCK until the selector lever is moved to the P Park position When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the LOCK position proceed as follows 1 Move the selector lever into the P Park position 2 Push the ignition switch to the OFF position The ignition switch position indicator will not illuminate 3 Open the door The ignition switch will change to the LOCK position The selector lever can be moved from the P Park position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed If the battery of the vehicle is discharged the push button ignition switch cannot be turned from the LOCK position Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal display between the speedometer and tachometer See DOT MAT
377. ng a device to a Jack turn off the power of the portable device With a compatible device connected to the jacks push the DISC AUX or AUX button repeatedly until the display switches to the AUX mode Display Mode Volume Settings Display SAA2496 Models with navigation system F AUX gt Settings SAA1567 Models without navigation system 4 94 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems AUX Menu When the Menu key on the display is selected while in the AUX mode the menu screen will be displayed Display Mode Choose the display mode from the following items e Normal e Wide e Cinema Volume Settings models with navigation system Choose the volume setting from the following items e Low e Medium e High Display models with navigation system Adjust the image quality of the screen select the preferred adjustment items alcohol intended for industrial use e A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated Zeource USB memory e Never touch the terminal portion of the USB ENTER memory v e Do not place heavy objects on the USB 5 3 4 cea Se s5 e Do not store the USB memory in highly TA SAA0451 humid locations CD DVD USB MEMORY CARE AND e Do not expose the USB memory to direct CLEANING sunlight e Do not spi
378. ng by pushing the ignition switch to OFF After cranking the engine release the accelerator pedal Crank 5 12 Starting and driving the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the push button ignition switch to start the engine If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time If the engine does not start push the ignition switch to OFF and wait 10 seconds before cranking again otherwise the starter could be damaged 4 Warm up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting Do not race the engine while warming it up Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first especially in cold weather In cold weather keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 3 minutes before shutting it off Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start 5 To stop the engine shift the selector lever to the P Park position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position DRIVING THE VEHICLE CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS MISSION CVT The Continuously Variable Transmission CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performa
379. ng checks and adjustments 3 21 DOORS earlier in this section Opening closing power sliding door if so equipped To open close the sliding door push the power sliding door button 3 or on the Intelligent Key for about 1 second The power sliding door will automatically open close If the power sliding door button or is pushed while the sliding door is being opened or closed the sliding door will reverse Opening closing lift gate if so equipped To open close the lift gate push the power lift gate m button on the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second The lift gate will automatically open close The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds If the power lift gate m f button is pushed while the lift gate is being opened or closed the lift gate will reverse Using panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you can activate the alarm according to the following procedure to call attention 1 Push the PANIC 3p button for more 3 22 Pre driving checks and adjustments than 1 second m The theft warning alarm will sound and the headlights will flash for 25 seconds 3 The panic alarm stops under either of the following conditions e t has run for 25 seconds or e Any of the buttons is pushed Note the PANIC 3p button should be pushed for more than 1 second Setting hazard indicator and horn
380. ng iPod Open the console lid and connect the iPod cable to the USB connector If compatible the battery of the iPod is charged while the connection to the vehicle Depending on the version of the iPod the display on the iPod shows a NISSAN or Accessory Attached screen when the connec tion is completed When the iPod is connected to the vehicle the iPod music library can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in 4 84 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems the U S and other countries Compatibility The following models are available Models with navigation system e Fifth generation iPod firmware version 1 2 3 or later e iPod Classic firmware version 1 1 1 or later e First generation iPod touch firmware ver sion 2 0 0 or later e Second generation iPod touch firmware version 1 2 3 or later e First generation iPod nano firmware ver sion 1 3 1 or later e Second generation iPod nano firmware version 1 1 3 or later e Third generation iPod nano firmware ver sion 1 1 or later e Fourth generation iPod nano firmware version 1 0 2 or later Models without navigation system e Fifth generation iPod firmware version 1 3 e First generation iPod Classic firmware version 1 1 2 PC e Second generation iPod Classic firmware version 2 0 PC e First generation iPod to
381. ng the outlet for a long period of time such as when idling etc the battery may discharge de pending on the vehicle conditions even if the engine is running Some electrical appliances with wattages below 150W may not operate normally For example Electrical appliances which con sume a large amount of wattage when turned on CRT TVs elec tric tools etc Electrical appliances which have a switching power frequency clocks etc Electrical appliances that mea sure precise data measuring equipment etc Certain other electrical appli ances electric blankets etc Depending on the electrical appli ance that is in use some distorted noise may be audible when using the TV or radio Be sure to turn the power switch of the electrical appliance used off before removing the plug from the power outlet Do not use an extension cord with multiple outlets STORAGE CUP HOLDERS CAUTION Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink If the liquid is hot it can scald you or your passenger Use only soft cups in the cup holder Hard objects can injure you in an accident SIC4726 Instrument panel Front Instrument panel To open the cup holder push the instrument panel 1 Instruments and controls 2 41 SIC4719 ae E Z ae a SIC4419 Front side of the front center console 2nd row seat 3rd row seat Ba
382. njury or death e During programming procedure sIG3612 your garage door or security gate 1 To begin push and hold the 2 outer Home may open or close Make sure that Link buttons to clear the memory until the people and objects are clear of the indicator light A blinks after 20 seconds garage door gate etc that you are Release both buttons PAS EMME ARS 2 Position the end of the hand held transmitter e Your vehicle s engine should be 1 to 3 in 20 to 70 mm away from the turned off while programming HomeLink surface HomeLink Universal Transceiver PROGRAMMING HomeLink To program your HomeLink Transceiver to operate a garage door gate or entry door opener home or office lighting you need to be at the same location as the device Note Garage door openers manufactured after Instruments and controls 2 57 3 Using both hands simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held transmitter button DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed 4 Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on HomeLink flashes changing from a slow blink to a rapid blink This could take up to 90 seconds When the indicator light blinks rapidly both buttons may be released The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming To activate the garage door or other programmed device push and hold the programmed HomeLink 2 58 I
383. nly the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 111 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause un desired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Bluetooth trademark Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Clarion Co Ltd J Bluetooth VOICE COMMANDS You can use voice commands to operate various Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system For more details see NISSAN VOICE RE COGNITION SYSTEM models with navigation system later in this section page 4 134 4 112 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems SAA3603 CONTROL BUTTONS 1 TALK y amp PHONE SEND button SAA2519 CONNECTING PROCEDURE 1 Push
384. nnaradadeetec 4 98 Digital Versatile Disc DVD system COMPONEN eesin nn nr EEE 4 99 Before operating the DVD mobile entertainment S E E E E E A eaten eengeaeeeereease 4 104 Playing a 8 Deere ee erence anadi 4 105 Care and maintenance ceeeeeee eee tees 4 109 Car phone or CB radio cceeeeee sence neta es 4 110 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System models with navigation system csseseeeeeeeees 4 110 Regulatory INformations tc stcunendedeedaarterntesersece 4 111 VOICE command S eiennenn ana n a EAA 4 112 Control buttons sssssssserrrrrrrrrrrererrsrreerens 4 112 Connecting procedure ssssssessrrerersseseerees 4 113 Phone selection c 122 4ciateestenecdectexceiasieonesveasans 4 113 Vehicle phonebook se sie nceceeeveresdnxetieedscesseevers 4 113 Makino a e M eE 4 116 Receiving COE ll saree tetietecteesatangneieeentemceteenetes 4 117 Dunno A Call eee esseeceere cate ee arcene seen cccreee 4 118 Phone SNA erste cae se rere cea ia 4 118 Troubleshooting guide 2 seeeeeeeeeeee ees 4 120 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System models without navigation system if so SOC et secdec dere saceseacectnus ideo i decaacencaeuncect 4 121 Regulatory information foc si eedcerdsadicemeenanrcese 4 122 Using the system asccctedccuetvagivtdeewacnreneadeniieexd 4 122 Control DURONS aausccancavsnnswmmnaneeateanenswnrsn en 4 125 Getting Starla acsicnsscccacmpredeoevartsnceatcembom sas 4 125 List of
385. not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed on winding or hilly roads e on slippery roads rain snow ice etc e in very windy areas Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident A CANCEL ACCELAES w 1 ON OFF A i RESUME ACCELERATE switch SET COAST switch CANCEL switch MAIN ON OFF switch CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 to 89 MPH 40 to 144 km h without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal gt ON gt To turn on the cruise control push the MAIN switch on The CRUISE indicator light will illuminate To set cruising speed accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed push the SET COAST switch and release it Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Your vehicle will maintain the set speed e To pass another vehicle depress the accelerator pedal When you release the pedal the vehicle will return to the previously set speed e The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads If this happens drive without the cruise control To cancel the preset speed use one of the following methods a Push the CANCEL switch b Tap the brake pedal c Turn the MAIN switch off The CRUISE light will turn off e Ifyou depress the bra
386. ns to normal UNPLAYABLE The file is unplayable in this audio system only MP3 or WMA CD Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 45 DVD Digital Versatile Disc player if so equipped Do not force a compact disc into the CD DVD insert slot This could damage the CD DVD player During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to humidity If this occurs remove the CD DVD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely The player may skip while driving on rough roads The CD DVD player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high Decrease the temperature before use Only use high quality 4 7 in 12 cm round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGI TAL AUDIO or DVD Video logo on the disc or packaging Do not expose the CD DVD to direct sunlight CD DVDs that are of poor quality dirty scratched covered with fingerprints or that have pinholes may not work properly The following CD DVDs are not guaranteed to play Copy control compact discs CCCD Recordable compact discs CD R Rewritable compact discs CD RW Recordable DVDs DVD R DVD R DL Rewritable DVDs DVD RW DVD RW 4 46 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems DL Do not use the following CD DVDs as they may cause the CD DVD player to malfunc tion 3 1 i
387. nstruments and controls button releasing when the device begins to activate If the indicator light on HomeLink blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid HomeLink has picked up a rolling code garage door opener signal You will need to proceed with the next steps to train Home Link completing the programming may require a ladder and another person for convenience Push and release the program button located on the garage door opener s motor to activate the training mode This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor If the wire Originates from under a light lens you will need to remove the lens to access the training button NOTE Once you have pushed and released the training button on the garage door opener s motor and the training light is lit you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7 For convenience use the help of a second person to assist when performing this step Quickly within 30 seconds of pushing and releasing the garage door opener training button and firmly push and release the HomeLink button you ve just programmed Push and release the HomeLink button up to three times to complete the training 8 Your HomeLink button should now be programmed To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers follow steps 2 through 8 only NOTE Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to cle
388. nsumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information Your name address and telephone number Vehicle identification number attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver s side Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealer s name Your comments or questions OR You can write to NISSAN with the information at For U S customers Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and Pre driving checks and adjustments voice recogn Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do it yourself Technical and consumer information O D D m O N N D 3 N 0 Illustrated table of contents Seats seat belts and Supplemental Restraint strument ING ccd ccgoneedces ester testemtaneteedesavelsecaane 0 7 St IRS A 0 2 Meters and gaUgeS ssssrerssirrerererrsereeresrsrsireereva 0 8 Exterior front sacescccccecacactceestencaddcesad iecstecetwecetaaaeds 0 3 Engine compartment E OE AT E E E
389. ntain uncompressed audio files e Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio Hybrid CD DA specification in Super Audio CDs models with navigation system e Compact Disc Digital Audio CD DA spe cification in CD Extras e First session of multisession disc Extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C and above 158 F 70 C could affect the performance of the hard drive flash memory NOTE If the hard drive flash memory needs to be replaced due to a malfunction all stored music data will be erased 4 86 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems TUNE 3 Track Artist XXXXXXXXXX Album XXXXXXXXXX Track XXXXXXXXAXXA Track 1of13 SAA2513 Models with navigation system 0 00 Py 1 XXXXXXXXXX ol OROORO 2 ROOK a 9 07 Ee fE 4 XXXXXXXXXX H 5 XXXXXXXXXX Ton a e aa ene Repeat All SAA261 2 Models without navigation system Recording CDs 1 Operate the audio system to play a CD For the details of playing CDs see FM AM SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER earlier in this section 2 Select the Start REC models with naviga tion system REC models without naviga tion system key NOTE e The system starts playing and record ing the 1st track on the CD when the Start REC key is selected e The recording process can be stopped at any time All tracks that were played before the CD was st
390. ntenance and do it yourself section 6 Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system indicator This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power and when the Intelligent Key System and vehicle are not communicating normally If this indicator appears touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal See INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE in the 5 Starting and driving section 7 Parking brake release warning This warning appears when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH 7 km h and the parking brake is applied Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake 8 Low fuel warning This warning appears when the fuel level in the tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is convenient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the empty 0 position There is a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches the empty 0 position 9 Low washer fluid warning This warning appears when the washer tank fluid is at a low level Add washer fluid as necessary See WINDOW WASHER FLUID in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section 10 Door lift gate open warning ignition switch is in the ON position This warning appears if any of the doors and or the lift gate are open or not closed securely The vehicle icon indicates which door is open on the display 11 Loose fuel cap warning This warning appea
391. nts BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM When all the following conditions are met for 60 minutes the battery saver system will cut off the power supply to prevent battery discharge e The ignition switch is in the ACC position and e All doors are closed and e The selector lever is in the P Park position WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen chime or beep sounds inside and outside the vehicle and a warning displays in the dot matrix liquid crystal display When a chime or beep sounds or the warning displays be sure to check the vehicle and Intelligent Key See TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE later in this section and DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYS TAL DISPLAY in the 2 Instruments and controls section TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE When pushing the ignition switch to The SHIFT P warning appears on the display and the The selector lever is not in the P Shift the selector lever to the P Park stop the engine inside warning chime sounds continuously Park position position When shifting the selector lever to ENE The ignition switch is in the ACC or Push the ignition switch to the OFF n The inside warning chime sounds continuously ns z the P Park position ON position position When opening the driver s door to 1a l The ignition switch is in the ACC Push the ignitio
392. nuine NISSAN E PSF will prevent the power steering system from operating properly 8 12 Maintenance and do it yourself BRAKE FLUID For additional brake fluid information see CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS in the 9 Technical and con sumer information section of this manual WARNING e Use only new fluid from a sealed container Old inferior or contami nated fluid may damage the brake system The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle s stopping ability e Clean the filler cap before removing e Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked con tainers out of the reach of children CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces This will damage the paint If fluid is spilled immediately wash the surface with water SDI2178 Check the fluid level in the reservoir If the fluid is below the MIN line 2 or the brake warning light comes on add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line If fluid must be added frequently the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer WINDOW WASHER FLUID Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodi cally Add window washer fluid when the low washer fluid warning appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display To fill the window washer fluid reservoir lift the cap and pour the window washer fluid into the reservoir open
393. nxeaascescarepesiactetenpetanet 5 32 Freeing a frozen door lOCk ccceeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 32 ANti fr Z ccc ccc cece eee cece ee en eee tenes eenaee enna 5 32 ESAL ae ee NE ee eee eee ee E oe 5 32 Draining of coolant water 0 eeeeeeee eee 5 32 Tire SOMIOMIGAY lt n oeceder es saeevedorntenieenteeeacaueves 5 33 Special winter equipment cceeee eect eee 5 33 Driving ON SNOW OF 1CC se jcnimcrcumesseececeeenencccnes 5 33 Engine block heater if so equipped 605 5 33 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle Pets should not be left alone either They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent op eration of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or collision unse cured cargo could cause personal injury EXHAUST GAS carbon monoxide dangerous It can cause uncon sciousness or death If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle drive with all windows fully open and have the vehicle inspected immediately Do not run the engine in closed sp
394. o a lower gear and use the engine braking effect When going up a long grade downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine over loading and or overheating If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioning system is on turn off the air conditioner Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide When making a turn your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels To compensate for this make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle trailer handling possibly caus ing vehicle sway When being passed by larger vehicles be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling If swaying does occur firmly grip the steering wheel steer straight ahead and immediately but gradually reduce vehicle speed This combination will help stabilize the vehicle Never increase speed Do the following if the trailer begins to sway 1 Take your foo
395. o are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided The seat belt may not fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in 142 5 cm tall and weighs between 40 Ibs 18 kg and 80 Ibs 86 kg A booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a commercially available booster seat if the shoulder belt fits close to the face or neck or If the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the abdomen The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three point type seat belt The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck use the shoulder belt without the booster seat CHILD RESTRAINTS WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision SSS0099 SSS0100 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 27 PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS WARNING Failure to follow the w
396. o set the desired temperature e Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature Doing so may cause the temperature to not be controlled prop erly e To dehumidify the air push the A C button before turning on the heater e Air does not blow out from the vents on the ceiling when the system is used for heating Turning the system off To turn off the rear air conditioner push the ON OFF button when EAR Is on the display Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 41 Q o BODDI OFF button Fan speed control buttons AUTO button Display MODE button TEMP buttons SAA3517 Rear control buttons The rear seat passengers can adjust the rear automatic air conditioning system using the control switches located on the ceiling above the rear seats models with NISSAN mobile entertainment system or on the upper left side of the second row seat models without NISSAN mobile entertainment system The rear control buttons do not function when REAR is shown on the front display To activate the rear control buttons push the REAR button on the front air conditioner control panel and cancel the rear air conditioner control mode EAR will disappear from the front display OFF button Turns off the rear air conditioning system Fan speed control buttons Adjust rear fan speed
397. o those of a higher severity side impact They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted They may not inflate in certain side collisions on the side where the vehicle is impacted Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation When side air bags and curtain air bags inflate a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Side air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvis of the front occupants Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear 2nd and 3rd outboard seating positions They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating side air bags and curtain air bags may cause abrasions or other injuries Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help prot
398. oaded may differ from the actual title When newly released compact discs are recorded their title information may not be downloaded The title information on the hard drive flash memory can be updated See Playing recorded songs later in this section Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 55 SAA3597 1 CD LOAD button 7 AUX button 2 DISP Display button 8 SCRL Scroll button 3 SCAN button 9 CLOCK button 4 FM AM button 10 CD EJECT button 5 CD button 11 SEEK TRACK FILE button 6 Radio memory CD select buttons 12 RDM Random button 4 56 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 13 RPT Repeat button 14 VOLUME control dial 15 POWER ON OFF button 16 AUX IN auxiliary input jack 17 AUDIO button 18 TUNE FF REW FOLDER button FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD CHANGER Audio main operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position POWER button To turn on the audio system push the POWER button e The system will turn on in the mode radio or CD which was used immediately before the system was turned off e lf there is no CD loaded the radio will be turned on To turn off the audio system push the POWER button Volume control To control the volume turn the VOLUME control dial e Turn the dial clockwise to make the sound louder e Turn the dia
399. ock and unlock buttons will not operate when e the distance between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle is over 33 ft 10 m e the Intelligent Key battery is discharged After locking with the remote keyless entry function pull the door handle to make sure the doors are securely locked The LOCK UNLOCK operating range varies depending on the environment To securely operate the lock and unlock buttons approach the vehicle to about 3 ft 1 m from the door Type B SPA2252 D SPA2849 Type C O LOCK button A 2 UNLOCK button p 3 Power sliding door button passenger s side x Bh 4 Power sliding door button driver s side He i 5 Power lift gate button qa 6 PANIC button p x if so equipped HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM When you lock or unlock the doors or the lift gate the hazard indicator will flash and the horn or the outside chime will sound as a confirma tion For details see Setting hazard indicator and horn mode later in this section Locking doors 1 Move the selector lever to the P Park position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position Make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you 1 Close all the doors and lift gate 2 Push the LOCK button 4 All the doors and the lift gate will lock a fF a N The hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once 1 Doors will lock while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON posit
400. odels without navigation system 64 characters Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 51 Disblavable character codes 3 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE UTF 16 Non BOM Big pean Endian 05 UNICODE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian 07 SHIFT JIS 1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played 2 Protected WMA files DRM cannot be played 3 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed 4 When VBR files are played the playback time may not be displayed correctly 5 Models with navigation system 4 52 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Troubleshooting guide Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly Check if the disc is scratched or dirty Check if there is condensation inside the player and if there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player If there is a temperature increase error the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature If there is a mixture of music CD files CD DA data and compressed audio files on a CD only the music CD files CD DA data will Cannot play pe Dae Files with extensions other than MP3 mp3 WMA wma AAC aac
401. odes Title List DVD VR Select the preferred title from the list Play Mode Select the preferred play mode PG PL Mode DVD VR Select the PG or PL mode f SAA3599 USB MEMORY OPERATION if so equipped Audio main operation Open the console lid and connect a USB memory as illustrated Then push the DISC AUX or AUX button repeatedly to switch to the USB memory mode If the system has been turned off while the USB memory was playing pushing the ON OFF VOL control knob will start the USB memory This USB device contains multisession contents Please select item to play Flay Movie Contents Play Audio Contents SAA2500 File selection models with navigation system When there are both audio and movie files in the USB memory the mode select screen is displayed Select the preferred content to play When there is only one type of file the audio or movie operation screen is displayed and starts to play If a video file restricts the number of playbacks a pop up screen will appear to confirm it is ok to play Answer yes or no as requested by the display Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 75 TUNE Folder Artist XXXXXXXXXXXX Ib um XXXXXXXXXAXXXX Track XKXXXXXKKXXXXXK Folder 1of3 Track 1 of 61 Menu SAA2501 Models with navigation system pM _1900000000000000 E 200000000000000 E 2000000000000000 fF 2 9900000000000
402. off 2 Pull to remove the fuse box cover 1 SDI2718 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller If the fuse is open replace it with a new fuse If a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer SDI2704 Extended storage switch if so equipped To reduce battery drain the extended storage switch comes from the factory switched off Prior to delivery of your vehicle the switch is pushed in switched on and should always remain on If any electrical equipment does not operate remove the extended storage switch and check for an open fuse NOTE If the extended storage switch malfunc tions or if the fuse is open it is not necessary to replace the switch In this case remove the extended storage switch and replace it with a new fuse of the same Maintenance and do it yourself 8 21 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT rating AA CAUTION How to remove the extended storage switch Be careful not to allow children to 1 To remove the extended storage switch be swallow the battery and removed parts sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position 2 Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF position Remove the fuse box cover 4 Pinch the locking tabs 4 found on each side of the storage switch 5 Pull the storage switch straight out from the fuse box SDI2135 Replace the battery as follows 1 Remove the mechanical key from the ke
403. oft damp cloth when cleaning the Mobile Entertainment System components Do not use solvents or cleaning solutions Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 99 e Be sure to stow the rear display when it is not used CAUTION Do not touch the display when it is opening or closing Headphones CAUTION e Do not leave headphones on the seats Sitting on headphones left on a seat could damage the head phones and may result in personal SAA3655 injury due to shards from the head phones Flip down screen Use the remote controller to operate the motorized flip down rear display screen e After using the headphones place them in the included headphone bag and store them in a location where they will not be an obstruc tion 1 Push the REAR DISPLAY OPEN CLOSE button on the remote controller to open or close the display 2 Adjust the display angle by pushing the DISPLAY TILT button N or w Headphones are a wireless type and no cables The screen can also be opened using the multi 2 Necessary You can use them in almost all inet troller See HOW TO USE SET the ranges in the rear seat for listening to the Let A this section sound from DVD AUX or USB It is not possible to use the headphones in the front seat Do not block the range of the wireless remote controller receiver and wireless headphones transmitter 4 4 100 Monitor heater air conditioner audio ph
404. oid talking slow or with long pauses Say commands after the tone SAA2533 Useful tips for correct operation You can display useful speaking tips to help the system recognize your voice commands cor rectly Select Help on Speaking to start display USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia lized which may take up to one minute When completed the system is ready to accept voice commands If the TALK amp switch is pushed before the initialization completes the display will show the message System not ready or a beep sounds Before starting To get the best recognition performance from Voice Recognition NISSAN Voice Recognition observe the follow ing Phone e The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet WF Naga as possible Close the windows to eliminate eee 2 Information the surrounding noises traffic noise and o 4J Audi vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from correctly recognizing the voice commands e Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command SAA1859 SAA2535 e Speak in a natural conversational voice Giving voice commands 2 A list of commands appears on the screen without pausing between words 1 Push the TALK y switch located on the ee T E A a a E ne 1 l 1 l 1 e lf the air conditioner is set to Auto the fan steering wheel on g
405. oling when the outside tem perature is high push the air recirculation lt gt button to switch to the air recirculation mode The indicator light turns on Be sure to turn off the air recirculation mode for normal cooling e A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a malfunction Dehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the alr 1 Push the outside air circulation aad button to switch to the outside air circulation mode The indicator light turns on 2 Push the air flow control button to change to the s position 3 Push the fan speed control buttons to the desired fan speed 4 Push the A C button on The A C indicator light will illuminate 5 Push the temperature control buttons to set the desired temperature between the middle and the hot position Dehumidified or defrosting defogging This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air 1 Push the front defroster button y on The indicator light turns on 2 Push the fan speed control buttons to set the desired fan speed 3 Push the temperature control buttons to set the desired temperature When the 7 mode is selected the air conditioner will automatically turn on This will dehumidify the air and help to defog the windows The A C indicator light will illuminate when the air conditioner automatically turn
406. ols To turn off the heater and air conditioner push the ON OFF button Fan speed control Push the fan speed control button to increase the fan speed Push the fan speed control button amp to decrease the fan speed A C Air Conditioner operation Push the A C button to turn on or off the air conditioner When the air conditioner is on the A C indicator light on the button illuminates Air flow control Push the MODE button to change the air flow mode Air flows from the center and side ventilators u vw Air flows from the center and side ventilators and foot outlets Air flows mainly from the foot outlets Ve Air flows from the defroster and foot outlets Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 31 Temperature control Push the temperature control buttons A amp A and w to set the desired temperature Air recirculation Push the air recirculation lt gt button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle The indicator light on the air recirculation lt gt button will illuminate The air recirculation mode cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode Outside air circulation Push the outside air circulation acy button to draw outside air into the passenger compart ment The indicator light on the outside air circulation aG gt button w
407. olyester and others Maximum permissible inflation pres sure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire When replacing the tires on the vehicle always use a tire that has the same Maintenance and do it yourself 8 33 load rating as the factory installed tire Term of tubeless or tube type Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube tube type or not tubeless D The word radial The word radial is shown if the tire has radial structure Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown Other tire related terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section Intended Outboard Sidewall is 1 the sidewall that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire or 2 the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle 8 34 Maintenance and do it yourself TYPES OF TIRES WARNING When changing or replacing tires be sure all four tires are of the same type Example Summer All Seaso
408. on A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly See BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS later in this section Severe weather or road spray conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles The radar sensors detection zone is de signed based on a standard lane width When driving in a wider lane the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane When driving in a narrow lane the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects however objects such as guardrails walls foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected This is a normal operating condition Starting and driving 5 19 BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS Another vehicle approaching from be hind The BSW indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane However if the overtaking vehicle is traveling much faster than your vehicle the indicator light may not illuminate before the detected vehicle is beside your vehicle Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes 5 20 Starting and driving SSD1031 If the driver activates the turn signal then the BSW indicator light flashes and a chime will sound twice NOTE If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone the BSW
409. on 2 Use one of the following methods to move the driver s seat and outside mirrors e Push the ignition switch to the ON Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 37 position and push the memory switch 1 or 2 e Within 45 seconds of opening the driver s door push the memory switch 1 or 2 The drivers seat and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position with the indicator light flashing and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH 7 km h entry exit function When the vehicle is driven memory sto rage When the adjusting switch for the driver s seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating When the driver s seat and outside mirrors have already been moved to the memorized position When no position is stored in the memory switch When the engine is started while moving the 3 38 Pre driving checks and adjustments automatic drive positioner When the selector lever is moved from the P Park position to any other position How ever it will not be canceled while the driver s seat is returning to the previous positions entry exit function When the driver s door remains open for more than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not in the ON position MEMO Pre driving checks and adju
410. on The reminder will not appear while driving Select the OK key to hide the reminder for the rest of the current drive To stop the reminder from appearing perform one of the following actions e Select the Reset Distance e Deactivate the Reminder e Increase the Interval distance to be more than the current distance being tracked Shows current GPS status SAA2483 Others information models with naviga tion system The Others information display will appear when pushing the INFO button and selecting the Others key GPS Position For the details of this item see the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual Voice Recognition For the details of this item see NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM models with naviga tion system later in this section Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 11 HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON The display as illustrated will appear when the Settings SETTING button is pushed Settings Audio For navigation settings refer to the separate Navigation Volume amp Beeps Bass Navigation System Owner s Manual Treble Balance Fade Speed Sensitive Vol SAA2484 SAA2485 Models with navigation system Models with navigation system PT Canis oem A aunon cers dE Settings gt Audio a l Base C 00000800001 e Tee Coinn V Balance Ct UND00N0000IC RSE Pook Cd Coane Sd
411. on Corporation and other right holders is adopted for this system e This copyright protected technology cannot be used without a permit from Macrovision Corporation It is limited to be personal use etc as long as the permit from Macrovision Corporation is not issued e Modifying or disassembling is prohibited e Dolby digital is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Inc trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Inc e DTS and DTS 2 0 dts are registered trademarks of DTS Inc e DTS and DTS Digital Surround dts are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Parental level parental control DVDs with the parental control setting can be played with this system Please use your own judgement to set the parental control with the system Disc selection The following disc formats can be played with the DVD drive e DVD VIDEO e VIDEO CD e CD DA Conventional Compact Disc e DTS CD models with navigation system USB Universal Serial Bus if so equipped This system supports various USB memory sticks USB hard drives and iPod players There are some USB devices which may not be supported with this system e Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB connector e Do not force the memory stick or USB cable into the USB connector This could damage the connector e During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to humidity If th
412. one and voice recognition systems SAA3608 Power ON OFF Push the POWER button to turn the head phones on or off SAA3609 Volume control Turn the volume control knob to adjust the volume The headphones will automatically be turned off within approximately 5 minutes if there is no infrared signal input during that period To prevent the battery from being discharged keep the power turned off when not in use If the sound from the headphones is not clear it may be because e of an infrared communication device or cellular phone turn down the headphone volume or stop using the headphones or the headphones maybe out of the range of the transmitter installed in the rear flip down display screen This is not a malfunction or the sound may be interrupted temporarily when there is an obstacle between the headphones and the transmitter Remove the obstacle such as opaque materials hands hair etc Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 101 CAUTION Do not fold down the 2nd row seat when the remote controller holder is hooked on the front seatback pocket Doing so may damage the seatback pocket Remote controller The remote controller has the following controls REAR DISPLAY OPEN CLOSE button DVD button h Joystick AUX button ENTER button DISP button SPEAKER VOLUME CONTROL button No v 8 TRACK CHANNEL button No w 9 DISPLAY TILT button
413. one of the following conditions e Selector lever is set in the P Park position e Brake pedal is depressed e Parking brake is applied If the conditions are interrupted when the power sliding door is being operated the operation could be stopped In this case meet the conditions above and the power sliding door operation will return to normal You can also switch the power lift gate between power and manual operation using the power door main switch See LIFT GATE later in this section Instrument panel A Driver s side sliding door switch Passenger s side sliding door switch SPA2846 SPA2857 Door pillar OPERATING SLIDING DOOR SWITCH To operate the sliding doors with the sliding door switches turn on the power door main switch e When the sliding door is fully closed push and hold the sliding door switch for about 1 second The sliding door will automatically open to the fully opened position e When the sliding door is fully opened push and hold the sliding door switch for about 1 second The sliding door will automatically close to the fully closed position e Ifthe sliding door switch is pushed while the sliding door is being operated automatically the door will start moving in the reverse direction and stop at the fully opened or closed position e When the child safety sliding door lock is in the lock position the sliding door switch on the door pillar cannot be oper
414. ons supplied with the wax e Do not use a wax containing any abrasives cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a base coat clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots industrial dust insects and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage or staining Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory stores UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter the underbody must be cleaned regularly This will prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension Before the winter period and again in the spring the underseal must be checked and if necessary re treated GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the win dows do not use sharp edged tools abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners They could da mage the electrical conductors radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements WHEELS Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance e Clean the inner side
415. opped are stored e Individual tracks can be deleted from the hard drive flash memory after the CD is recorded TUNE 3 Track Artist XXXXXXXXXX Album XXXXXXXXXX Track XXXXXXXXAXXX Track 1of13 0 08 ee SAA2514 Models with navigation system 0 00 TW Lecco ie OKOOKAN 0 01 Lxxx E 4 XXXXXXXXXX H 5 XXXXXXXXXX F own REC Track 1 of 1 Repeat All SAA2613 Models without navigation system If the title information of the track being recorded is stored either on the hard drive flash memory or the CD the title is automatically displayed on the screen For title acquisition from the hard drive flash memory music recognition technol ogy and related data are provided by Grace note If a track is not recorded successfully due to the CD skipping the mark is displayed behind the track number The Music Box hard drive flash memory cannot perform recording under the following condi tions e There is not enough space on the hard drive flash memory e The number of aloums reaches the maximum of 500 e The number of tracks reaches the maximum of 3 000 Automatic recording If the Automatic Recording function is turned on recording starts when a CD is inserted See Music Box settings later in this section Stopping recording To stop the recording select the Stop REC key button by touching the screen or using the multi function controller Monitor heater ai
416. or a few seconds vehicle Whensushing the ignition switch The Intelligent Key system warning light in the meter It warns of a malfunction with the Contact a NISSAN dealer illuminates in yellow Intelligent Key system Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 19 The ignition switch is in the ACC or Push the ignition switch to the OFF ON position position The battery charge is low REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WARNING The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed The FAA advises that radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and commu nication systems Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight It is possible to lock unlock all doors and the lift gate activate the panic alarm and operate the sliding doors lift gate if so equipped by pushing the buttons on the Intelligent Key from outside the vehicle Before locking the doors make sure the Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle The LOCK UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft 10 m from the vehicle The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used with one vehicle For information concerning the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys contact a NISSAN dealer 3 20 Pre driving checks and adjustments The l
417. or example after pausing the DVD To start playing the DVD it is also possible to push the n button on the keypad of the remote controller CI STOP Select the m key to stop playing the DVD To stop playing the DVD it is also possible to push the button on the keypad of the remote controller gt gt I SKIP FORWARD Select the key to skip the chapter s of the disc forward The chapters will advance the number of times the ENTER button is pushed To skip the chapter s forward it is also possible to push the button on the keypad of the remote controller Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 105 4 SKIP REWIND Select the lt key to skip the chapter s of the disc backward The chapters will go back the number of times the ENTER button is pushed DVD Setting Key Title Menu To skip the chapter s backward it is also possible to push the button on the keypad of the remote controller Pal Commercial Skip if so equipped This function is only for DVD VIDEO and DVD SAA 2498 VR Front screen models with navigation system Select the p or key to skip forward or backwards by the set amount as defined in the DVD settings menu DVD To skip forward or backward it is also possible 01 002 00 12 28 j FULL to push the i or button on t
418. or replacing items other than the engine oil oil filter and tires To return to the top page of the setting mode select BACK OPTIONS The 3 option menus can be set to your preference e LANGUAGE Select this submenu to choose English French or Spanish for display e UNIT Select this submenu to choose the unit from MPG or 1 100 km e EFFECTS Select this menu to set the effects de scribed below to on or off The indicator needles sweep in the meters and the ring illumination will be brightened gradually when the engine is started To return to the top page of the setting mode select BACK WARNING X1 gt SKIP gt DETAIL MENTER NEXT Warning check To see if there are any of the following warnings and corresponding details select this menu e No key warning e Low fuel warning e Low washer fluid warning e Parking brake release warning e Door lift gate open warning e Loose fuel cap warning e Check tire pressure warning SKIP Push the J switch to move to the warning check mode Push the switch to select other menus DETAIL This item is available only when a warning is displayed Select this menu to see the details of warnings SECURITY SYSTEMS SIC4717 Your vehicle has two types of security systems as follows e Vehicle security system e NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light
419. ors or apply glass cleaner on them Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensor resulting in improper opera tion For the compass if so equipped operation see COMPASS in the 2 Instruments and con trols section Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 33 For the HomeLink Universal Transceiver opera tion see HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEI VER in the 2 Instruments and controls section SPA2319 OUTSIDE MIRRORS WARNING Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear Be careful when moving to the right Using only this mirror could cause an accident Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects Adjusting outside mirrors The outside mirror control switch is located on the armrest 3 34 Pre driving checks and adjustments The outside mirror will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Turn the switch right or left to select the right or left side mirror 4 then adjust using the control switch Defrosting outside mirrors if so equipped The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear window defroster switch is operated Reverse tilt down feature if so equipped When backing up the vehicle the right and left outside mirrors will turn downward automatically to provide better rear visibility 1 Push the ignition switch to the ON position
420. osition e While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec onds push the gg button on the Intelligent Key e Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and then push the SET switch Push the g button while pushing the memory button while the indicator light stays on for approximately 5 seconds If the indicator light blinks the Intelligent Key is linked to that memory setting Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and then push the gg button on the Intelligent Key The driver s seat and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position Confirming memory storage e Push the ignition switch to the ON position and push the SET switch If the main memory has not been stored the indicator light will come on for approximately 0 5 second When the memory has stored in position the indicator light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds e lf the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the memory will be canceled In this case reset the desired position using the previous procedure e f optional keys are added to your vehicle the memory storage procedure to switch 1 or 2 and linking Intelligent Key procedure to a stored memory position should be per formed again for each Intelligent Key For additional Intelligent Key information see KEYS earlier in this section Selecting the memorized position 1 Move the selector lever to the P Park positi
421. ould respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are encountered try the following solutions Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number 1 until the problem is resolved 1 Ensure that the command is valid See LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS earlier in this section 2 Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone 3 Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle 4 Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defroster on NOTE If it is too System fails to interpret the command correctly noisy to use the phone it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized 5 If more than one command was said at a time try saying the commands separately 6 If the system consistently fails to recognize commands the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker See SPEAKER ADAPTATION SA MODE earlier in this section 1 Ensure that the phonebook entry name requested matches what was originally stored This can be confirmed by The system consistently selects the wrong entry from using the List Names command See Phonebook phones without automatic phonebook download function the phonebook earlier in this section 2 Replace one of the names being confused with a new name Monitor
422. owed to the dealer e Malfunction indicator light blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system To reduce or avoid emission control system damage a Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH 72 km h b Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration c Avoid steep uphill grades d If possible reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed The malfunction indicator light may stop 2 16 Instruments and controls blinking and remain on Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability reduced fuel econ omy and possible damage to the emis sion control system Overdrive off indicator light The overdrive off indicator light illuminates when the overdrive off mode is selected For additional information see CONTINU OUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT in the 5 Starting and driving section of this manual Security indicator light The light blinks when the ignition switch is in the ACC OFF or LOCK position This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational lf the security system is malfunctioning this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position For additional information see SECURITY SYSTEMS l
423. owing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch compo nents Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components Doing so can cause serious personal injury or prop erty damage Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer e The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers Most hitch balls also have the size printed on top of the ball e Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight 9 20 Technical and consumer information e The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1 16 smaller than the hole in the ball mount e The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut Sway control device Sudden maneuvers wind gusts and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects If you choose to use one contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle hitch trailer and the trailer s brake system Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device Class hitch Class trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch bal
424. oxi mately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not ori ginally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not install a damaged or de formed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning The use of retread tire is not re commended For additional information regard ing tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Information Booklet Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life Even with regular use wheels can get out of balance Therefore they should be balanced as required Wheel balance service should be per formed with the wheels off the vehicle Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the War ranty Information Booklet Care of wheels See CLEANING EXTERIOR in the 7 Ap pearance and care section for details about care of the wheels Spare tire When a spare tire is mounted TEMPORARY USE ONLY or conventional the TPMS will not function Observe the following precautions
425. p EJECT When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the CD loaded the CD will be ejected When this button is pushed while the CD is being played the CD will be ejected If the CD comes out and is not removed it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it DVD Digital Versatile Disc PLAYER OPERATION if so equipped Precautions Start the engine when using the DVD entertain ment system Movies will not be shown on the front display while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce driver distraction Audio is available when a movie is played To view movies in the front display stop the vehicle in a safe location move the selector lever to the P Park position and apply the parking brake WARNING e The driver must not attempt to operate the DVD system or wear the headphones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation e Donotattempt to modify the system to display a movie on the front screen while the vehicle is being driven Doing so may distract the driver and may cause a collision and serious personal injury or death Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 71 CAUTION e Only operate the DVD while the vehicle engine is running Operating the DVD for extended periods of time with the engine OFF can dis charge the vehicle battery e Do not allow the system to get wet Excessive moisture such as spilled liqui
426. p when the switch is released 2 52 Instruments and controls SIC4644 REAR MOONROOF Rear moonroof operation switches are located on the front map light and rear ceiling Sunshade The sunshade will open automatically when the rear moonroof is opened However it must be closed manually Sliding To fully open or close the moonroof push the switch to the open A or close position and release It does not need to be held The roof will automatically open or close all the way To stop the roof push the switch once more while it is opening or closing Tilting To tilt up first close the moonroof then push the switch to the tilt up position and release it it does not need to be held To tilt down the moonroof push the switch to the tilt down position Locking When the window lock button is pushed in the rear moonroof cannot be operated When the window lock position is pushed off the rear moonroof can be operated See POWER WINDOWS earlier in this section Auto reverse function WARNING There are some small distances imme diately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc in side the vehicle before closing the moonroof If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof when it is closing the moonroof will be immediately opened The auto reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed by automa
427. panel for more than 1 second e pushing the power lift gate switch on the lower part of the lift gate e pushing the lift gate button on the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds when the lift gate starts closing Reverse function The power lift gate will reverse immediately if one of the following actions is performed during power open or power close e pushing the power lift gate switch on the instrument panel e pushing the lift gate switch on the lower part of the lift gate e pushing the lift gate button on the Intelligent Key The outside chime sounds when the lift gate starts to reverse Auto reverse function The auto reverse function enables the lift gate to automatically reverse when something is caught in the lift gate as it is opening or closing When the control unit detects an obstacle the lift gate will reverse and return to the full open or full close position If a second obstacle is detected the lift gate motion will stop and the drive motor will disengage The lift gate will enter the manual mode A pinch sensor is mounted on each side of the lift gate If an object is detected by the pinch sensor during power close the lift gate will reverse and return to the full open position immediately NOTE If the pinch sensor is damaged or removed the power close function will not operate WARNING There is a sm
428. peed is over 25 MPH 40 km h 5 26 Starting and driving BREAK IN SCHEDULE CAUTION During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km follow these recommendations to ob tain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and econo my of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed either fast or slow Do not run the engine over 4 000 rpm Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear Avoid quick starts Avoid hard braking as much as possible Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY Accelerate slowly and smoothly Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position Drive at moderate speeds on the highway Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles Select a gear range suitable to road condi tions Avoid unnecessary engine idling Keep your engine tuned up Follow the recommended periodic mainte nance schedule Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Keep the wheels in correct alignment Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Air conditioner operation lowers fuel econ omy Use
429. place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation or have it repaired if necessary SSD1177 Shift lock release If the battery charge is low or discharged the selector lever may not be moved from the P Park position even with the brake pedal depressed and the selector lever button pushed To move the selector lever perform the following procedure 1 Push the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position Apply the parking brake 3 Remove the shift lock release cover A using a suitable tool 4 Push down the shift lock release using a Starting and driving 5 15 suitable tool 5 Push the selector lever button C and move the selector lever to the N Neutral position BD while holding down the shift lock release The vehicle may be moved to the desired location Replace the removed shift lock release cover after the operation If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the P Park position have a NISSAN dealer check the CVT system as soon as possible WARNING If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P Park position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed the stop lights may not work Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others 5 16 Starting and driving PARKING BRAKE WARNING Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident
430. plemental air bag and roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag systems n Seat belts with pretensioners front seats Supplemental air bag warning labels Supplemental air bag warning light 4 Repair and replacement procedure 64 SEATS Sit upright and well back WARNING Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit SSS0133 well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly See PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE later in this section After adjustment gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could un knowingly activate switches or con trols Unattended children could become involved in serious acci dents 1 2 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat If the seat back is reclined
431. ponent harnesses dis connected while the ignition switch is in the ON position e Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized com ponent while the ignition switch is in the ON position e Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan It may come on at any time without warn ing even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running To avoid injury always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan This 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also available See OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION in the 9 Technical and consumer information section You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions and could affect warranty coverage If in doubt about any servicing we recommend that it be Maintenance and do it yourself 8 5 done by a NISSAN dealer 8 6 Maintenance and do it yourself ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS NO o VQ35DE ENGINE 1 Power steering fluid reservoir 2 Drive belt location 3 Engine oil filler cap 4 Brake fluid reservoir 5 Air cleaner ZD Oo No f Lan i NS a ww UES a el AS e i i iu u g he i orn Lo fo SDI2715 Fuse f
432. position When the switch is in the DOOR position the map lights and rear personal lights will illuminate under the following conditions e ignition switch is switched to the LOCK position remain on for about 15 seconds e doors are unlocked by pushing the UN LOCK button on the Intelligent Key or door handle request switch with the ignition switch in the LOCK position remain on for about 15 seconds e any door is opened and then closed with the ignition switch in the LOCK position remain on for about 15 seconds e any door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position remain on while the door is opened When the door is closed the lights go off The lights will also turn off after 15 minutes when the lights remain illumi nated after the ignition switch has been pushed to the OFF or LOCK position to prevent the battery from becoming dis charged When the auto interior illumination is set to the OFF position see VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS models with center multi function control panel in the 4 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems section the lights will illuminate under the following condition e any door is opened with the ignition switch in any position remain on while the door is opened When the door is closed the lights go off OFF position When the switch is in the OFF position 8 the lights w
433. r before opening the hood If steam or coolant is escaping turn off the engine Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen 4 Open the engine hood WARNING If steam or water is coming from the engine stand clear to prevent getting burned 5 Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness Also check if the cooling fan is running The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water If coolant is leaking the water pump belt is missing or loose or the cooling fan does not run stop the engine WARNING Be careful not to allow your hands hair jewelry or clothing to come into contact with or get caught in engine belts or the engine cooling fan The engine cooling fan can start at any time 6 After the engine cools down check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer TOWING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle all State Provincial in Canada and local regulations for towing must be followed Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer Local service operators are familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle NISSAN recommends that you have a service operator tow your vehicle It is advisable to have t
434. r Affairs Department toll free at 1 800 NISSAN 1 1 800 647 7261 Technical and consumer information 9 25 For Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN If Transport Canada receives complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign However Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or NISSAN You may contact Transport Canada s De fect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1 800 333 0510 You may also report safety defects online at https wwwapps tc gc ca Saf Sec Sur 7 PCDB BDPP Index aspx Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans port Canada s Road Safety Information Centre at 1 800 333 0371 or online at www tc gc ca roadsafety English speak ers or www tc gc ca securiteroutiere French speakers 9 26 Technical and consumer information To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1 800 387 0122 READINESS FOR INSPECTION MAINTENANCE I M TEST Due to legal requirements in some states areas or provinces your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the ready condition for an Inspect
435. r conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 87 Playing recorded songs Select the Music Box audio system by using one of the following methods If the CD is ejected the audio system is turned off or the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position the recording also stops Music Box a TUNE Pirack e Push the audio source switch on the Paes m steering wheel repeatedly until the center XXXXXXXXXX display changes to the Music Box mode See STEERING WHEEL MOUNTED CONTROLS FOR AUDIO later in this section Push the DISC AUX or AUX button repeat edly until the center display changes to the Music Box mode Track XXAXXXXXXX Track 1 of 1 SAA2515 e Give voice commands See NISSAN Models with navigation system VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM models with navigation system later in this sec tion Stopping playback The system stops playing when Mbur SE e a another mode radio CD DVD USB a Fe KK KKKKKKKOOOOOR memory iPod or AUX is selected l 4 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Z b the audio system is turned off Repeat Playlist 5 XXXKKXXXKXXKONK F c the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK Eoo i ibe h SAA2614 Models without navigation system 4 88 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems or Next Previous Track and Fast Forward Rewind When the gt or mas button is pushed for more than 1 5 seconds while a t
436. r from the display and the driver s side temperature setting will be applied to both the driver s and front passenger s sides 4 Models with Advanced Climate Control System ACCS Push the gf AUTO auto recircula tion button The indicator light on the gy AUTO auto recirculation button will illuminate In this mode the sensor detects odors and gas to automatically switch between the air recirculation mode and the outside air circulation mode See Advanced climate control system later in this section for details Models without Advanced Climate Control System ACCS Push and hold the air recirculation lt gt button or outside air circulation lt gt button the one with the indicator light on for more than 2 seconds to set the automatic control between the air recirculation and outside air circulation modes The and a gt indicator lights will blink twice The following conditions need to be met for the automatic air intake control mode to function properly The air flow control is not in the front defogger mode the indicator light on the front defroster amp y FRONT button is turned off The outside temperature is approximately 32 F 0 C or above A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a mal function Heating A C off 1 2 Push the AU
437. r front passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds power to the windows is canceled SIC3283A Main power window switch driver s side 1 Driver side window 2 Front passenger side window 3 Rear left passenger side window 4 Rear right passenger side window 5 Window lock button To open or close the window push down A or pull up the switch and hold it The main switch driver side switches will open or close all the windows Locking passengers windows When the lock button is pushed in only the driver side window can be opened or closed Push it in again to cancel SIC3241 Passenger side power window switch The passenger side switch will open or close only the corresponding window To open or close the window push down or pull up the switch and hold it Instruments and controls 2 49 Automatic operation The automatic function is available for the switch that has an A mark on its surface To fully open or close the window completely push down or pull up the switch and release it it need not be held The window will automatically open or close all the way To stop the window just push or lift the switch in the opposite direction A light push or pull on the switch will cause the window to open or close until the switch is released 2 50 Instruments and controls Auto reverse function WARNING There are some small distances imme diately before the
438. r in this section 2 Oil filter replacement indicator This indicator appears when the set time comes for replacing the oil filter You can set or reset the distance for replacing the oil filter See TRIP COMPUTER later in this section 3 Tire replacement indicator This indicator appears when the set time comes for replacing tires You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires See TRIP COM PUTER later in this section 4 OTHER indicator This indicator appears when the set time comes for replacing items other than the engine oil oil filter and tires You can set or reset the distance for replacing the items See TRIP COMPU TER later in this section More maintenance reminders are also available on the center display models with center multi function control panel See HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON in the 4 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems section Current and average fuel consumption gt Average fuel consumption and speed gt Elapsed time and trip odometer Distance to empty dte Outside air temperature ICY gt Setting Warning check SIC4700 TRIP COMPUTER Current and average fuel consumption MPG liter 100 km or km l Switches for the trip computer are located on the right side of the combination meter panel To operate the trip computer push the side of the switches as shown above A J switc
439. r lights i 22nctencelasetemeseduanedeee vec 2 56 Variable voltage control system 8 15 Vehicle Dimensions and weights sissies 9 8 Identification number VIN cee eee e eee 9 8 Loading information s e sse sieer 9 12 Recovery freeing a stuck vehicle 6 15 Security system cece errre erener 2 25 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch 2 38 Vehicle dynamic control VDC system 5 31 Vehicle dynamic control VDC warning WW pace Sie sete cieeobescutecantenieceeteece es 2 14 Ventilators lt soccveweiwds piere antiin EAEE araa Eh 4 28 Voice command Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System 4 127 Voice command NISSAN voice recognition system 4 139 4 149 Ww Warning Dot matrix GISPIAV coc iverecerers agp sr eerie 2 17 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 35 LUNES operariis eritrea a in 2 10 Tire pressure monitoring system HPI PEE T EEI ETT 5 3 6 2 Warning indicator lights and audible PENNA Seroren enea E E 2 10 Warning labels Air bag warning labels 1 59 Warning light Air bag warning light vies siiiaeeredee 1 59 2 14 Anti lock braking system ABS warning WIG eae a 2 10 Brake warning light 2 11 Intelligent Key system warning light 2 12 Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Seat belt warning light and chime 2 14 Warranty Emission control system warranty 9 25 Washer switch Rea
440. r or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling e Sounds are not recorded These data can help provide a better under standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforce ment could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle This manual is the same one used by the
441. r out of position in any way SPA2854 you are at greater risk of injury or LOOSE FUEL CAP warning death in a crash You may also TILT OR TELESCOPIC OPERATION The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on the receive serious or fatal injuries from While pulling the lock lever down A adjust the Gor any nie aa apay WARA TIE ue the air bag if you are up against it steering wheel up down forward or rearward filler cap is not tightened correctly after the when it inflates Always sit back until the desired position is achieved vehicle has been refueled To turn off the against the seatback and as far warning perform the following steps away as practical from the steering 1 Remove and install the fuel filler cap as soon wheel Always use the seat belts as possible See FUEL FILLER CAP ear lier in this section Push the lock lever up 3 firmly to lock the steering wheel in place Tighten the fuel filler cap until it clicks 3 Push the reset switch A on the right side of the combination meter for about 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning after tightening the fuel cap Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 31 SUN VISORS SIC3451 3 32 Pre driving checks and adjustments CAUTION Do not store the main sun visor before storing the extension sun visor Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward To block out glare from the front swing down the main sun visor Q To block glare from the
442. r window wiper and washer switch 2 29 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 28 Washing dc28s uct bavecweuree died aa EREE 7 2 WING ea e E E eee 7 2 Weights See dimensions and weights 9 8 Wheel tire size cece ot ereseucenieereueeerteenetctey 9 7 Wheels and tireS 0cc cece eee eee eee eee 8 29 Care of wheels ccceeee eee ee eee ee eeees 7 3 Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels 7 3 Window Washer TUid s ccccrctecestnttrnsetacecens 8 13 Window s CIGANINGwccmttieediecectecensessesteetiiedecreeets 7 3 Power WINDOWS caeecotncansueccedensaneees 2 48 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 28 Wiper Rear window wiper and washer switch 2 29 Rear window wiper blade 8 19 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 28 Wiper DigGeSi lt ciccer ec cieeethewes ceweeionds 8 17 X Xenon headlights sxe Gite seneeweeryiot cecceveserss 2 31 10 7 GAS STATION INFORMATION FUEL RECOMMENDATION Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index number Research octane number 91 CAUTION e Using a fuel other than that speci fied could adversely affect the emis sion control systems and may also affect warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used since this will damage the three way catalyst e Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designe
443. rack is being played the track will play while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the track will return to the normal play speed When the w or 44 button is pushed for less than 1 5 seconds while a track is being played the next track or the beginning of the current track will be played The multi function controller can also be used to select tracks when a track is being played Play mode selection The TUNE FOLDER knob will skip from album to album unless it is playing All Songs from the Music Library menu When playing All Songs the knob will change the track instead of the album The upper right corner of the main screen will indicate if the TUNE knob is changing by track or album REPEAT RPT RANDOM RDM When the RPT RDM button is pushed while a track is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Normal gt 1 Album Repeat gt 1 Track Repeat 1 Album Random gt All Random Normal Tag Track models with navigation system Select Tag Track key on the screen when a track is being played A menu will show the 5 available playlists Select one of the playlists to add the current song to that playlist If a playlist is not selectable text is grayed out it means the song already exists in that playlist 1 6 SAA2516 Models with navigation system mia Music Box gt Menu 0 00 Music Library 3 Edit Music Information Z Music
444. ransfer call Use the Transfer Call command to transfer the call from the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to 4 128 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems the cellular phone when privacy is desired The system announces Transfer call Call transferred to privacy mode The system then ends the VR session To reconnect a call from the cellular phone to the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone sys tem push the amp button e Mute Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it Use the mute command again to unmute your voice NOTE If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on the Mute feature will be reset to off for the next call so the other party can hear your voice Main menu Phonebook Transfer Entry A Delete Entry List Names Phonebook phones without automatic phonebook download function Transfer Entry A Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new name in the system When prompted by the system say the name you would like to give the new entry For example say Mary If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also tf the name sounds too much like a name already stored the system tells you then prompts you for a name again The system will ask you to transfer a phone numb
445. rash protection provided by the driver and passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel instrument panel and door finishers See SEAT BELTS earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational WARNING e The supplemental front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact rear impact rollover or lower severity frontal collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents e The front passenger air bag will not S N inflate if the passenger air bag Sit upright and well back as status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section e The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The front air bags inflate with great force Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System if you are unrestrained leaning forward sit ting sideways or out of posi
446. rating conditions CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly Operating the engine with an insuffi cient amount of oil can damage the engine and such damage is not cov ered by the warranty CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER Change the engine oil and filter according to the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Vehicle set up 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake 2 Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature 3 Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes 4 Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable floor jack and safety jack stands e Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle jack up points e A suitable adapter should be attached to the jack stand saddle CAUTION Make sure the correct lifting and sup port points are used to avoid vehicle damage SDI2175 Maintenance and do it yourself 8 9 Engine oil and filter 1 Place a large drain pan under the drain plug 2 Remove the oil filler cap 3 Remove the drain plug with a wrench and completely drain the oil 8 10 Maintenance and do it yourself CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself as the engine oil is hot e Waste oil must be disposed of properly e Check your local regulations Perform steps 4 to 9 when the engine oll filter change is needed Remove the plastic cover over the oil filter location by removing
447. rder of compressed audio files is as illustrated in the next figure 1 Folder Audio file SAA2494 Playback order e The folder names of folders not containing compressed audio files are not shown in the display e If there is a file in the top level of a disc USB Root Folder is displayed Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 49 Specification chart for FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD player or changer Supported media CD CD R CD RW CD CD R CD RW ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Romeo Joliet ISO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported Files saved using the Live File System component on a Windows Vista based computer are not supported MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2 5 MP3 8 kHz 48 kHz Supported 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR 4 versions 1 WMA7 WMA8 WMAQ WMA 2 32 kHz 48 kHz Bit rate 32 kbps 192 kbps VBR 4 Tag information Song title and Artist name Folder levels Text character number limitation sonic E E sodas 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE UTF 16 Non BOM Teg enn or eee Big Endian 05 UNICODE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian 1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played 2 Protected WMA files DRM cannot be played 3 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed 4 When VBR f
448. re with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions e When operating near a location where strong radio signals are transmitted such as a IV tower power station and broad casting station e When in possession of wireless equipment such as a cellular telephone transceiver and CB radio e When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials e When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby e When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer e When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter In such cases correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions the battery s life is approximately 2 years If the battery is dis charged replace it with a new one Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiv ing radio signals if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio signals such as from a TV and personal computer the battery life may become shorter For information regarding replacement of a battery see INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Key
449. rear view camera is a conve nience but it is not a substitute for proper backing up Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly e Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide angle lens is used Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite than when viewed in the rear view and outside mirrors e Make sure that the lift gate is securely closed when backing up e Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation Do not put anything on the rear view camera The rear view camera is installed above the license plate When washing the vehicle with high pressure water be sure not to spray it around the camera Other wise water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens a malfunction fire or an electric shock Do not strike the camera It is a precision instrument Otherwise it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock CAUTION Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the lens SAA1896 HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line are displayed on the monitor Distance guide lines Indicate distances from the vehicle body e Red line 4
450. repairs should be per formed by a NISSAN dealer The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat ing WARNING e To avoid the danger of being scalded never change the coolant when the engine is hot e Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator e Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible e Keep coolant out of reach of chil dren and pets Engine coolant must be disposed of properly Check your local regulations ENGINE OIL SDI2174 CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature Turn off the engine Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean Reinsert it all the way Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level It should be within the range 4 If the oil level is below 2 remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening Do not overfill 6 Recheck oil level with the dipstick It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break in period depending on the severity of ope
451. ri i you hear the ring tone press the amp phone See the cellular phone Owner s the command and announces the next set of button on the steering wheel Manual for details You can also visit www available commands nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on Once the call has ended press the s button connecting NISSAN recommended cellular 3 Say Phone Number 8 The system onthe steering wheel phones acknowledges the command and an 4 126 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems NOTE If you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone press the ss button on the steering wheel to reject the call LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main menu Call Phonebook Recent Calls Connect Phone When you push and release the amp button on the steering wheel you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu The following pages describe these commands and the commands in each sub menu Remember to wait for the tone before speaking You can say Help to hear the list of commands currently available anytime the system is waiting for a response A menu item can also be selected by scrolling the display with the SEEK switch and entering by pushing the amp button If you want to end an action without completing it you can say Cancel or Quit at anytime the system is waiting for a response The system will end the VR ses
452. riod of time e When washing the vehicle or performing any maintenance work SPA2071 e Be careful not to damage the sensor 4 of the sliding door When reconnecting the battery cable with the sliding door open in case of a discharged battery etc be sure to fully close the sliding door manually once before performing the power operation Otherwise the power open or close function may not operate properly Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 9 SPA2547 Power door main switch SWITCHING SLIDING DOOR OPERA TION Using the power door main switch located on the instrument panel you can switch the sliding door between power and manual operation To turn on the power operating mode push the switch to the ON position To turn off the power operation push the switch to the OFF position and then the sliding door can be manually operated When the power door main switch is pushed to the OFF position the power operation is not available by the sliding door switch on the pillar sliding door one touch switch and power assist 3 10 Pre driving checks and adjustments The power sliding door system can be operated when all of following conditions are satisfied e The vehicle is stopped e Battery voltage is normal e The sliding door is unlocked e The fuel filler door is closed for driver s side only When the ignition switch is in the ON position the system can be operated in the above and
453. rious injury CAUTION e The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running e Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat e Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat such as a blanket cushion seat cover etc Otherwise the seat may become overheated e Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object This may result in damage to the heater Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth When cleaning the seat never use gasoline thinner or any similar materials If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate turn the switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer SIC2770 The seats are warmed by built in heaters The switches located on the instrument panel can be operated independently of each other 1 Start the engine 2 Select heat range Q For high heat push the HI High side of the switch 2 For low heat push the LO Low side of the switch The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when the heater is on To turn off the heater return the switch to the level position Make sure the indicator light goes off The heater is controlled by a thermostat automatically turning the heater on and off The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on When the
454. riven this could lead to a crash and serious injury Before operating the push button ignition switch be sure to move the selector lever to the P Park position INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM The Intelligent Key system can operate the ignition switch without taking the Intelligent Key out from your pocket or purse The operating environment and or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation CAUTION e Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehi cle e Never leave the Intelligent Key in side the vehicle when you leave the vehicle Operating range for engine start function The Intelligent Key functions can only be used for starting the engine when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range 4 When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location the Intelligent Key system s operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range it is possible for anyone even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the ignition switch to start the engine The cargo area is not included in the operating range but the Intelligent Key may function If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel inside the glove box or door pocket the Intelligent Key may not function If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or wi
455. rmrest Power window switch P 2 48 Power door lock switch P 3 5 SS10823 Outside mirror remote control switch P 3 34 Automatic drive positioner switch P 3 36 Moonroof switch P 2 51 Front map lights P 2 53 Mood light P 2 55 Sunglasses holder P 2 43 or communication mirror P 3 36 Sun visors P 3 32 Inside rearview mirror P 38 32 HomeLink universal transceiver P 2 56 Compass P 2 7 Cargo area Cargo floor box P 2 45 Luggage hooks P 2 46 Cargo light P 2 56 Spare tire P 6 3 Power outlet P 2 39 Hooks P 2 46 Console box P 2 44 Power outlet P 2 39 Auxiliary input jacks P 4 93 iPod connector P 4 84 USB connector P 4 75 Cup holders P 2 41 Rear moonroof switch P 2 51 if so equipped Illustrated table of contents 0 5 COCKPIT 1 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch P 5 31 2 Blind Spot Warning BSW switch P 2 38 Blind Spot Warning BSW P 5 17 3 Sliding door switch driver s side P 3 9 4 Sliding door switch passenger s side P 3 9 0 6 Illustrated table of contents SS10825 Instrument brightness control switch P 2 34 Power lift gate switch P 3 25 Headlight fog light and turn signal switch Headlight P 2 31 Turn signal P 2 35 Fog light P 2 35 Trip Computer switch P 2 21 TRIP RESET switch for twin trip odo
456. roller can also be used to select tracks when the iPod is playing REPEAT RPT When the RPT button is pushed while a track is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Repeat Off gt Repeat One Repeat All gt Repeat Off RDM Random RDM When the RDM button is pushed while a track is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows Shuffle Off Shuffle Songs gt Shuffle Albums Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 65 5 6 TUNE FOLDER TRACK gt PUSH ON OFF PUSH AUDIO SAA3604 ON OFF VOL volume control knob 7 RPT repeat RDM random play button Radio station preset buttons Radio tuning AUDIO control FOLDER selector knob AM FM band select button Radio SCAN tuning button FF fast forward button for SEEK TRACK 4 66 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems aoa SAA3605 Type A XM button DISC AUX button Radio CAT category REW rewind button for SEEK TRACK i 2 3 7 InN SAA3606 Type B DISC button AUX band select button REW rewind button for SEEK TRACK FM AM SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER if so equipped For all operation precautions see AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS earlier in this section The satellite radio mode if so equipped requires an active XM Satellite Radio subscrip tion The satellite radio is not ava
457. ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recov ery Rocking a stuck vehicle If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use the following procedure 1 Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system 2 Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions 3 Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires 4 Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back ward Shift back and forth between R Re verse and D Drive Apply the accelerator as little as possi ble to maintain the rocking motion Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH 55 km h In case of emergency 5 If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle 7 Appearance and care earning eeN esindan adre re rne E A 7 2 Wa ME petna E E ETERNE 7 2 MV AMIN P E E A 7 2 Removing SpOotS ssssssrrsrssssssesssrrrrrrnrrrrrere 7 3 STOO GY 2 cee E E A A E E 7 3 C e E E EEFE 7 3 WTC E E E E E E 7 3 Gmrome DANS een eR EE 7 3 Tire dressing vaste scene ea ir ee 7 3 Cleaning INTErIOF vacas2cccasssidatevsayesnseaiederseiapthouresies Air WESHENEL Sisiesiewainicisecnnnaiaaeducoudainiwssansasteatacen Floor MAS sesno Anen cemneccmonecasensausedes Geal DEIS mitdudareccutanaeetninrndadecetauiehetatebeecdnaiias Corrosion protection acai iranceavsanunross
458. route the antenna wire next to any harness Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as recommended by the man ufacturer Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body For details consult a NISSAN deal er 4 110 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM models with navigation system WARNING e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation e If you find yourself unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so CAUTION To avoid draining the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you are an owner of a compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless tech nology you can make or receive a telephone call with your cellular phone in your pocket Once a cellular phone is connected to the in vehicle phone module no phone connecting procedure is required anymore Your phone is automatically connected with the in vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is pushed
459. rren 3 2 Mechanical KOY cnusscmcanro st adinen E ER 3 3 Valet hand Off acccausenedcscchionrsanswacomaucesasdtionmsarctiiet 3 4 DOO EE EE EEE 3 4 Locking with mechanical key 3 4 Opening and closing windows with the mechanical key if so EQUIPPEM cceeee ee ee ees 3 5 Locking with inside lock knob eeeeeeee ee 3 5 Locking with power door lock switch 665 3 5 A tomatic door IOCKS saxcccrensvacdiectewscaseuaremeshacsnes 3 6 gliding dols wa ccsueccnmervnavventectadrenon andar ATE 3 6 Sliding door auto closure function if so equipped inanigaceceucnsnaBaccenewacteeaumernssneedens 3 8 Child safety sliding door lOCk sssssssssesesssssessssss 3 8 Power sliding door if so EQUIPPEd eeeeeeeeees 3 9 Precautions on power sliding door operation 3 9 Switching sliding door operation 0068 3 10 Operating sliding door switch cceeeeeee eee 3 11 Operating the power sliding door with the Intelligent Key if So equipped ceseeeeeeees 3 11 Operating sliding door by power assist 3 11 Sliding door auto reverse fUNCTION 00eeeee ee 3 11 Intelligent Key system ecceeeeeee eee ener eee ees 3 12 Intelligent Key operating range cceeeeee eens 3 14 Door locks unlocks precaution ceeeeeee eee 3 14 Intelligent Key operation eeceeeeeeeeee eee 3 15 Battery saver System eceeeeeee eee eens e
460. rs to the unlock position POWER SLIDING DOOR if so equipped The power sliding door system will allow you to open or close the sliding doors automatically using the door handles the sliding door switch the Intelligent Key or sliding door one touch switch WARNING There are some small distances imme diately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc in side the vehicle before closing the door CAUTION e Operate the power sliding door when the vehicle is completely stopped e Before operating the power sliding door be sure to ensure safety around the door e Do not operate the power sliding door when the vehicle is inclined considerably e Do not insert your hand into the sliding door rail If you touch the cable at the rail the door could operate automatically PRECAUTIONS ON POWER SLIDING DOOR OPERATION e Do not perform the power sliding door operation frequently when the engine is stopped This could cause a dis charged battery e Do not start the engine while the sliding door is in an power operation The door may not operate properly e Make sure that the sliding doors are closed before starting the vehicle e Under the following cases turn the power door main switch off e When the sliding door is malfunctioning e When operating the sliding door manu ally e When you need to keep the sliding door open for a pe
461. rs when the fuel filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has Instruments and controls 2 19 been refueled See FUEL FILLER CAP in the 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments sec tion 12 Check tire pressure warning This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected If this warning appears stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Low tire pressure warning light earlier in this section and TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS in the 5 Starting and driving section 13 TIMER indicator This indicator appears when the set timer indicator activates You can set the time for up to 6 hours See TRIP COMPUTER later in this section 14 Low outside temperature warning This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37 F 3 C The warning can be set not to be displayed See TRIP COMPUTER later in this section 2 20 Instruments and controls MAINTENANCE Sen OIL EXIT MAINTENANCE FILTER GREXIT MAINTENANCE OTHER EXIT SIC4237 INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE 1 Engine oil replacement indicator This indicator appears when the set time comes for changing the engine oil You can set or reset the distance for changing the engine oil See TRIP COMPUTER late
462. rt the engine according to the following procedure 1 Move the selector lever to the P Park position Firmly apply the foot brake Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated A chime will sound Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds The engine will start After step 3 is performed when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal the ignition switch position will change to ACC NOTE When the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position or the engine is started by the above procedures the Intelligent Key battery discharge indi cator appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display even if the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle This is not a malfunction To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears replace the battery as soon as possible See INTELLI GENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT in the 8 Maintenance and do it your self section BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear Check fluid levels such as engine oil cool ant brake fluid and window washer fluid as frequently as possible or at least whenever you refuel Check that all windows and lights are clean Visually inspect tires for their appearance and
463. rward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb e HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 2 Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb e HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL NO CURB Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves 4 Push the ignition switch to the LOCK position 5 28 Starting and driving HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM WARNING e If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the steering will not work Steering will be harder to operate e When the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning light illumi nates with the engine running the power assist for the steering will cease operation You will still have control of the vehicle but the steer ing will be much harder to operate The hydraulic pump electric power steering system Is designed to provide power assistance while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced This is to prevent overheating of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system and protect it from getting damaged While the power assist is reduced steering wheel operation will become heavy If the steering wheel operation is
464. s Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may be flat If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible See FLAT TIRE in the 6 In case of emergency section for changing a flat tire When a Spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not ori ginally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors CAUTION e The TPMS may not function properly when the wheels are equipped with tire chains or the wheels are buried in snow e Do not place metalized film or any metal parts antenna etc on the windows This may cause poor re ception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors and the TPMS will not function properly Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illum
465. s contact a NISSAN dealer CAUTION Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical compo nents to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function Do not drop the Intelligent Key Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not change or modify the Intel ligent Key Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet immediately wipe until it is comple tely dry If the outside temperature is below 14 F 10 C the battery of the Intelligent Key may not function properly Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140 F 60 C Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a mag netic field such as a TV audio equipment personal computer or cellular phone If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure contact a NISSAN deal er The Intelligent Key function can be disabled For information about disabling the Intelligent Key function contact a NISSAN dealer Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 13 INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key fu
466. s and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically for example each time you check the engine oil or refuel Battery Check the fluid level in each cell It should be between the MAX and MIN lines Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe condition require frequent checks of the battery fluid level Brake fluid level Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold Engine drive belts Make sure that the drive belts are not frayed worn cracked or oily Engine oil level Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface and turning off the engine Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan 8 4 Maintenance and do it yourself Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports cracks or holes If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer See PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING in the 5 Starting and driving section for exhaust gas carbon monoxide Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel oil water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal I
467. s are determined using the factory equipped tire size Other types may damage your vehicle Use chain tensioners when re commended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains In addition drive at a reduced speed Otherwise your vehicle may be damaged and or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire Do not use tire chains on dry roads Driving with tire chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress j lt ie SDI1662 CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7 500 miles 12 000 km See FLAT TIRE in the 6 In case of emergency section for tire replacing procedures As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Maintenance and do it yourself 8 35 Wheel nut tightening torque 80 ft lb 108 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tigh tened to the specification at all times It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to the specification at each tire rotation inter
468. s are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar Stowing the spare tire and the tools Securely store the spare tire jack and tools in their original location WARNING Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop The T type spare tire and small size spare tire are designed for emer gency use See specific instructions under the heading WHEELS AND TIRES in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section e Do not use an impact wrench when tightening or loosening the spare tire lowering mechanism e When raising the spare tire tighten the spare tire lowering mechanism until three clicks are heard e After storing the spare tire check under the vehicle to make sure it is stored properly SCE0978 WARNING e When storing the spare tire make sure that the outer side of the spare tire A is facing up and that the hanging plate is in the center of the wheel as illustrated Failure to store the spare tire properly could result in serious vehicle damage and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury e Do not store any tire with the cable except the spare tire In case of emergency 6 9 JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery the protectors for example goggles or instructions
469. s inserted e Recording Quality for CD The larger number 132 will increase the recorded sound quality while taking up more space on the Music Box leaving less room for more songs For the details of the Music Box see MUSIC BOX later in this section Text models without navigation system When the Text key is selected in the screen using the multi function controller and then the ENTER button is pushed while the CD is being played the music information below will be displayed on the screen CD e Disc title e Track title CD with compressed audio files e Folder title e File title e Song title e Album title e Artist or Next Previous Track and Fast Forward Rewind When the gt or mas button is pushed for more than 1 5 seconds while the CD is being played the CD will play while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the CD will return to normal play speed When the w or 44 button is pushed for less than 1 5 seconds while the CD is being played the next track or the beginning of the current track on the CD will be played REPEAT RPT RANDOM RDM When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is played the play pattern can be changed as follows CD Normal 1 Track Repeat 1 Disc Random _ CD with compressed audio files ee 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat 1 Folder Random 1 Disc Random amp c
470. s no number to redial and ends the VR session Call back Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a call back number does not exist the system announces There is no number to call back and ends the VR session Special Dialing To dial more than 10 digits or any special characters please say Special Dialing When the system acknowledges the command the system will prompt you to speak the number During a call During a call there are several command options available Push the x button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter commands e Help The system announces the avail able commands e Go back Correction The system an nounces Go back ends the VR session and returns to the call e Cancel Quit The system announces Cancel ends the VR session and returns to the call e Send Enter Call Dial Use the Send command to enter numbers or during a call For example if you were directed to dial an extension by an auto mated system Say Send one two three four The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers The system then ends the VR session and returns to the call Say star for maa say pound for H e T
471. s on The air conditioner and A C indicator light will remain on in all flow control modes until the A C button is pushed To remove frost from the outside surface of the windshield quickly set the temperature to the maximum hot position and the fan speed to maximum position Rear air conditioning system Operating from front control buttons To control the rear air conditioning system independently with the front air conditioner control panel push the REAR button When the rear air conditioning system control is on the indicator light on the REAR button will illuminate and REAR will appear on the display In this state the rear air conditioning system can be adjusted with the front air conditioner control panel However if no operation is conducted for approximately 10 seconds after the REAR button is pushed the front air conditioner control panel will automatically switch to the front air conditioning mode To cancel the rear air conditioning mode and switch back to the front air conditioning mode push REAR button one more time Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 33 e Temperature control Push the temperature control buttons A and W driver s side to set the desired temperature e Fan speed control Push the fan speed control S button or amp button to control the fan speed e Air flow control Push
472. s or am monia based cleaners as they may damage the leather s natural finish Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers It may damage the lens cover AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior If you use an air freshener take the following precautions damage the seat or occupant classifica tion sensor This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury CAUTION e Never use benzine thinner or any similar material e Small dirt particles can be abrasive e Hanging type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface e Liquid type air fresheners typically clip on the ventilators These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces Carefully read and follow the manufacturer s instructions before using air fresheners FLOOR MATS WARNING To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision or injury e NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position e Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats specifically designed for use in your vehicle model See your NISSAN dealer for more informa t
473. s removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the booster seat is removed See HEAD RE STRAINTS earlier in this section or AD JUSTABLE HEADRESTS earlier in this section for head restraint or headrest adjustment removal and installation informa tion If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit try another seating position or a different booster seat Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child s hips Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top middle portion of the child s shoulder Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing Follow the warnings cautions and instruc tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in SEAT BELTS earlier in this section Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 45 OFF PASSENGER AIR BAG a rv 7 lf the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat push the ignition switch to the ON position The front passenger air bag status light 4 may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of
474. seconds If another audio source is already playing it will automatically turn off and the CD will start playing After loading the CD the number of tracks and the play time will appear on the display CD button When the CD button is pushed while the audio system is off and CDs are loaded the audio system will turn on and a CD will start playing If another audio source is playing when the CD button is pushed with CDs loaded the audio source will automatically turn off and a CD will start playing DISP button To display the CD text on the screen text programmed CD only push the DISP button while a CD is being played The following CD text will be displayed on the screen CD 7 Disc title Track title Title off 7 CD with MP3 or WMA E Folder titte Disc titte Artist name Title off Track title aa SCRL Scroll SCRL button When the title long the whole title will not be shown in the display In this case push the SCRL button to scroll the title When the title is scrolled to the end the display will stop moving and return to the first condition A SEEK TRACK FILE button When the amp or button is pushed for less than 1 5 seconds while a CD is being played the next track or the beginning of the current track on the CD will be played When the or button is pushed for more than 1 5 seconds while a CD is being played the SCAN
475. section If a phonebook does not auto matically download the vehicle phonebook may be set for up to 1 000 entries This phonebook allows the recording of a name to speak while using voice recognition Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 113 Settings Edit Vehicle Phonebook 3 m Y l Settings Vehicle Phonebook 3 D inl Yil Settings Vehicle Phonebook 3 D i Yil Add New a 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX Copy from Call History EE 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX Copy from the Handset Enter Number by Keypad SAA2521 SAA2522 SAA2523 1 Push the button and select the 3 Choose the method for entering the phone 5 Select the Voicetag key to record a name Vehicle Phonebook key book entry For this example select Enter to speak when using the NISSAN Voice N K j R iti tem 2 Select the Add New key at the top of the e Ga E screen 4 Enter the digits and select the OK key 6 Select the Store key and prepare to speak See HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN the name after the tone models with navigation system earlier in this section 7 When the voicetag is successfully saved select the OK key to save the phonebook entry 8 After the phonebook entry is saved it will show a screen that is ready to call the number Press the BACK button to return to the Vehicle Phonebook There are different methods to input a phone number Select one of the following options 4 114
476. select Random or Order List For Order List the image order is the order of the files as stored on the USB memory Operating tips e Only files that meet the following conditions will be displayed Image type JPEG File Extensions jpg jpeg Maximum Resolution 2048 x 1536 pixels Maximum Size 2 MB Colors 32768 15 bit Maximum File Name lengths 253 Bytes Maximum Folders 500 Maximum Images per Folder 1024 e f an electronic device such as a digital camera is directly connected to the vehicle using a USB cable no image will be displayed on the screen e lf the file name is too long some file names may not be entirely displayed e When the total number of characters in the file name exceeds 100 or if 1 file name in a directory exceeds 100 characters all files will show a shortened 8 character version The image will still be displayed when selected 4 22 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems REARVIEW MONITOR if so equipped When the selector lever is shifted into the R Reverse position the monitor display shows the view to the rear of the vehicle The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground WARNING e The
477. ser s voice that the voice recogni tion system has learned Continuous Learning When this item is turned on you can have the system learn the voice commands in succes sion without selecting commands one by one 4 156 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Minimize voice feedback for Alternate Command Mode To minimize the voice feedback from the system perform the following steps 1 Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel Select the Others key Select the Voice Recognition key Select the Minimize Voice Feedback key u e w p The setting is turned on and the voice guidance will now be reduced when using the Voice Recognition system TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are encountered follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number one until the problem is resolved Symptom error message Displays COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED or the 1 Ensure that the command format is valid see Command List earlier in this section SYSE als te ante np reh Wie COmmane Overt 2 Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level 3 Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defrost on
478. servers or embedded databases collectively Gracenote Servers 4 92 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems and to perform other functions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this application or device You agree that you will use Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Grace note Data to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACE NOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions If your license termi nates you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Soft ware and the Gracenote Servers including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide You agree that Gracenote Inc may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly
479. sion Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system If you want to go back to the previous command you can say Go back or Correction anytime the system Is waiting for a response Call Main menu Call or Call International Name speak name A Phone Number speak digits Redial Gall Back Name speak name A If there are entries stored in the phonebook a number associated with a name and location can be dialed See Phonebook phones without automatic phonebook download function later in this section to learn how to store entries When prompted by the system say the name of the phonebook entry to call The system acknowledges the name If there are multiple locations associated with the name the system asks the user to choose the location Once the name and location are confirmed the system begins the call Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 127 Phone Number speak digits When prompted by the system say the number to call Refer to Making a call by entering a phone number earlier in this section for more details Redial Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a redial number does not exist the system announces There i
480. slide backward when the driver s door is opened with the ignition switch in the LOCK position The drivers seat will return to the previous positions when the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC position The driver s seat will not return to the previous positions if the seat adjusting switch is operated when the seat is at the exit position Cancel or activate entry exit function The selector lever must be in the P Park position with the ignition switch in the OFF position The entry exit function can be activated or canceled by pressing and holding the SET switch for more than 10 seconds The indicator lights on the memory switches 1 and 2 will blink once when the function is canceled and the indicator lights will blink twice when the function is activated Note that the indicator lights may illuminate after 5 seconds while holding the SET switch This indicates readiness for linking the Intelligent Key to a stored memory position Keep the SET switch pressed for more than 10 seconds to turn on or off the entry exit function The entry exit function can also be activated or canceled if the Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit key is turned to ON or OFF in the Comfort settings See VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS models with center multi function control panel in the 4 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems section Initialize entry exit function If the
481. sounds See BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS later in this section The BSW system is automatically turned on when the engine is started and the BSW ON indicator light illuminates on the switch You can turn the BSW system off by pushing the BSW switch on the instrumental panel NOTE If you continue to push the BSW switch from off to on for over 4 seconds a chime will sound This will change the default status of the BSW system to OFF so that this system will not automatically turn on when the engine is started If this proce dure is repeated the default status will return to ON WARNING e Do not use the BSW system when towing a trailer because the system may not function properly e Excessive noise e g audio system volume open vehicle window will interfere with the chime sound and it may not be heard e The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as Pedestrians bicycles animals Several types of vehicles such as motor cycles Oncoming vehicles Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop See BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS later in this section Avehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle See BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS later in this section A vehicle approaching rapidly from be hind See BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS later in this secti
482. spneeccadesacesesedereanes 2 54 Interior light control switch sseeeccccereeeee 2 54 Mood lighis aise erase ecpeeceee siete eneseeerenesseeeeeacete 2 55 Vanity mirror NOMS xs extexetcesends canes sadstiebtasdetdeetad 2 56 Cargo hohl Scerri EEF HomeLink Universal Transceiver if so equipped Programming HomeLink a vicassseseervdsscadenveveannn Programming HomeLink for Canadian CUS OMICNS sreski eerie trenes Enia n e OIETAN Operating the HomeLink Universal EEE EE E Programming trouble diagnosis 0 ceeeeeeee Clearing the programmed information 5 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button If your vehicle is stolen s es COCKPIT 2 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch Blind Spot Warning BSW switch Blind Spot Warning BSW Sliding door switch driver s side Sliding door switch passenger s side Instrument brightness control switch Power lift gate switch Instruments and controls SS10825 Headlight fog light and turn signal switch Headlight Turn signal Fog light Trip computer switch TRIP RESET switch for twin trip odometer Wiper and washer switch Fuse box cover Fuel filler door opener handle Hood release handle Headlight aiming control Power door main switch Steering wheel mounted controls left side Audio control steering switch Hands Free Phone System switch Horn Steering wheel mounted con
483. sponding to the preferred language and select the OK key with the multi function controller Then push the ENTER button The DVD top menu language will be changed to the one selected Display Adjust the image quality of the screen select the preferred adjustment items and push the ENTER button Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 107 Audio Choose the preferred language using the multi function controller and push the ENTER button Subtitle DVD VIDEO Choose the preferred language using the multi function controller and push the ENTER button To turn off the subtitles push and hold the ENTER button until a beep sounds Display Mode DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD Choose from the Full Wide Normal or Cinema mode using the multi function con troller and push the ENTER button again Play Mode Choose the preferred play mode using the multi function controller and push the ENTER button Remote controller operation Use the remote controller to adjust the following items Rear display open close To open or close the flip down rear display push the OFEN button Joystick Use the joystick to select the items displayed on the rear screen ENTER button Push the ENTER e button to make the selected item complete on the rear screen BACK button Push to go back to the previous screen or cancel the selectio
484. ssary raise or remove the head restraint or headrest to position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback If the head restraint or headrest is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall In the 3rd row seat a child restraint with a top tether strap can only be used in the center and right side position Do not place in the left side seating posi the head restraint or headrest when the child tion and attempt to angle the tether restraint is removed See HEAD RE strap to the center or right side posi STRAINTS earlier in this section for head tion restraint or headrest adjustment removal and installation information The center and right side position of the 3rd row seat is the seating position that can use a top 1 42 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system tether strap belt does not cross the stomach First secure the child restraint with the seat belt Make sure the shoulder belt is not as applicable behind the child or under the child s 1 Position the top tether strap over the top of ecb the center and right side seating position A booster seat must only be in seatback stalled in a seating position that has 2 Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor a lap shoulder belt point on the floor behind the child restraint 3 Refer to the appropriate child restraint installation procedure steps in this section before tightening the tether strap If you
485. st not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR Doing so will exceed the GVWR WARNING Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could occur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury Overloading not only can short en the life of your vehicle and the tire but can cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle s warranty MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle When the vehicle is loaded drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings GAWR The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR These ratings are given on the vehicle certif
486. stations channels can be set for the FM band 6 each for FM1 and FM2 18 for XM radio 6 each for XM1 XM2 and XM3 if so equipped and 6 stations can be set for the AM band 1 Choose the radio band using the radio band select button 2 Tune to the desired station channel using the SEEK TRACK SCAN button or the radio TUNE knob 3 Push and hold the desired station preset button to until the radio mutes 4 The station indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Memorizing is now complete 5 Other buttons can be set in the same manner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be erased In that case reset the desired stations channels List AM and FM radio models with navigation system When the List key on the display is selected while the FM or AM radio is being played the preset station list will be displayed If 1 of the 6 preset stations listed is touched and held the current station will be stored as the new preset Menu XM Satellite Radio models with navigation system When the Menu key on the display is selected while the XM Satellite Radio is being played the menu list will be displayed The following items are available e Preset List Displays the preset channel list If 1 of the 6 preset stations listed is touched and held the current station will be stored as the new preset e Customize Channel List Selects
487. stments 3 39 4 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems SSL DONS ETE E E san cearaenaaenaretrsaet 4 2 Center multi function control panel if so equipped 4 2 How to use multi function controller 06 4 4 How to use touch screen models with navigation system cceeeeeeeee ees 4 4 Menu options models with navigation system 4 6 How to select menus on the screen 4 7 Vehicle information and settings models with center multi function control panel 4 7 How to use STATUS button 4 7 How to use brightness control and display ON OR DUON icccnasoanteere teas eacteeaetenctecderemecetene 4 7 How to use DISP button 4 8 How to use fh ECON button models without navigation system 60eeee ees 4 8 How to use INFO DUHOR siscticctccrsedexhereseuacnacccess 4 8 How to use SETTING button c eee 4 12 RearView monitor if so equipped ceeeeeeee 4 29 How to read the displayed lines 2 55 4 23 How to park with predicted course lines 4 23 Difference between predicted and actual GISIANCES en acsccencnetdonctcrnestatemscnnadreceeuccnsbadases 4 25 How to adjust the SCreen cceee eee eee eee 4 27 Operating ocr ete ere eee eee mere 4 27 WEI ONS ccc eaccresntananeectacace E AEE 4 28 Center ventilators cicct ez destcarsauctasacaesecdeeeeonecess 4 28 Side VONtlAtOlrs ecsisi detactnedema
488. such as your wallet not in the vehicle If you lose your keys see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number NISSAN does not record any key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from If you still have a key this key can be duplicated by a NISSAN dealer 3 2 Pre driving checks and adjustments Type A Type B SPA2406 SPA2844 SPA2845 Type C 1 Master key 2 2 Mechanical key inside the key 2 3 Key number plate 1 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle s Intelligent Key system components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System compo nents As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo nents when registering new keys be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer CAUTION e Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when driving The Intelli gent Key is a precision device with a built in transmitter To avoid dama ging it please note the following The Intelligent Key is water resis
489. sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs SDI2020 REPLACING SPARK PLUGS If replacement is required see a NISSAN dealer for servicing lridium tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace the platinum tipped spark plugs as frequently as the conven tional type spark plugs since they will last much longer Follow the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Do not reuse spark plugs by cleaning or regapping Always replace spark plugs with recom mended or equivalent ones AIR CLEANER Pull the tabs 4 and pull out the cover 2 The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Main tenance Guide When replacing the filter wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth WARNING e Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to st
490. switch or using the mechanical key The alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position If the system does not operate as de scribed above have it checked by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS TEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered Intelligent Key Never leave these keys in the vehicle For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device SIC2045 Security indicator light The security indicator light is located on the meter panel It indicates the status of the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System The light blinks after the ignition switch is in the LOCK ACC or OFF position This function indicates the security systems equippe
491. t light should turn off If the light remains on after a few driving SIC3181 FUEL GAUGE a E vehicle inspected by When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON oo i a AEA position the compass display will indicate The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level e For additional information see the direction of the vehicle s heading iine tank Malfunction Indicator Light MIL AA The gauge may move slightly during braking later in this section a DN turning acceleration or going up or down hills NW Northwest NE Northeast The gauge needle returns to O empty after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF meee Pie osition j SW Southwest SE Southeast Refill the fuel tank before the gauge SE registers 0 empty The low fuel warning ff appears on the dot matrix liquid crystal display when the fuel level in the tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is Instruments and controls 2 7 If the display reads C calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at less than 5 MPH 8 km h You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked 3 complete circles To turn on and off the compass manually push the switch A while the ignition switch is in the ON position 2 8 Instruments and controls X LIAS TTA RAY PEAR 4 Oo TA ZENS Na i Se oy a i y L 12 lt TR
492. t station Radio memory button The audio system can store up to 12 FM station frequencies for FM1 and FM2 and 6 AM station frequencies To store the station frequency 1 Tune to the desired broadcasting station frequency by using the TUNE button or SEEK button 2 Push and hold a memory button 1 6 until a beep sounds 3 The channel indicator will display indicating that the memory is stored properly 4 Perform steps 1 3 for all other memory buttons If the battery cable is disconnected or if the audio fuse blows the radio memory will be erased In such a case reset the desired stations CD changer operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position CAUTION e Do not force the compact disc into the slot This could damage the player e Do not use 8 cm 3 1 in discs ca LOAD button To load a CD in the CD changer 1 Push the G button for less than 1 5 seconds 2 Select the loading slot by pushing the CD select buttons 1 to 6 If no slot is selected the CD changer will automatically select a slot which is available 3 Insert a CD into the slot with the label side facing up The CD will be guided automa tically into the slot and will start playing 4 58 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems To load 6 CDs in the CD changer in succession push the gt button for more than 1 5
493. t off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow This combination will help stabilize the vehicle Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes 2 When the trailer sway stops gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area 3 Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced as described earlier in this section e Be careful when passing other vehicles Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes e Down shift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes e Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently This could cause the brakes to overheat resulting in reduced braking efficiency e Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer Anticipate stops and brake gradually e Do not use cruise control while towing a trailer e Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers Obey the local speed limits e Check your hitch trailer wiring harness connections and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles 80 km of travel and at every break
494. t open Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door The Intelligent Key system opening closing doors with the door handle request switch can be set to remain inactive See VEHI CLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS models with center multi function control panel in the 4 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recog nition systems section SPA2408 INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the key out from your pocket or bag SPA2848 SPA2545 C Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 15 When you carry the Intelligent Key with you you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch A or the lift gate request switch within the range of opera tion When you lock or unlock the doors or the lift gate the hazard indicator will flash and the horn or the outside chime will sound as a confirma tion For details see Setting hazard indicator and horn mode later in this section Locking doors 1 Move the selector lever to the P Park position push the ignition switch to the OFF position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you 1 2 Close all the doors and the lift gate 2 3 Push the door handle request switch A or lift gate request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you 3 4 All the doors and the lift gate will lock 5 The hazard indicator flashes twice and the outside
495. t up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make or receive a hands free telephone call in your vehicle Once your cellular phone is connected to the in vehicle phone module no other phone connect ing procedure is required Your phone is automatically connected with the in vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position with the connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones in the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes e Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System e Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting e You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the telephone service area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio waves such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a mountainous area Your cellular phone is lock
496. table blocks 4 at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury In case of emergency 6 3 equipped 4 Remove tools A and jack located as illustrated Getting the tools and jack 1 Open the lift gate 2 Open the cargo floor box See CARGO FLOOR BOX in the 2 Instruments and controls section 3 Remove the cargo floor board if so 6 4 Incase of emergency SCE0975 SCE0977 Getting the spare tire The spare tire is located under the center of the vehicle 1 Lift up the floor carpeting flap behind the front center console then remove insulation piece to access the spare tire lowering mechanism Loosen the spare tire lowering mechanism with the wheel nut wrench Using the assembled socket tool turn the spare tire lowering mechanism counterclockwise as illustrated to lower the spare tire When the spare tire is completely lowered carefully slide it from under the vehicle by using the assembled tool Remove the suspending plate F from the spare tire After removing the spare tire raise the spare tire cable completely by turning the spare tire lowering mechanism clockwise using the tool Before moving or jacking up the vehicle check under the vehicle to make sure
497. tach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments SSS0650 Rear facing step 4 After attaching the child restraint test it before you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt if applicable Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 1 through 4 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 33 P PA EA Ls PEA x SS REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN STALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS WARNING e The three point seat belt with Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child re straint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loos
498. tage for that region Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives for example fuel injector cleaner octane booster intake valve deposit removers etc which are sold commer cially Many of these additives intended for gum varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent heavy spark knock Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise If severe this can lead to engine damage If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition Failure to correct the condi tion is misuse of the vehicle for which NISSAN is not responsible Incorrect ignition timing will result in spark knock after run and or overheating which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine 9 4 Technical and consumer information damage If any of the above symptoms are encountered have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer However now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills This is nota cause for concern because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for
499. tainment Sys tem components Do not use sol vents or cleaning solutions e Do not attempt to use the system in extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C or above 158 F 70 C e To avoid discharging the vehicle battery do not operate the system more than 15 minutes without starting the engine Movies will not be shown on the front display while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce driver distraction Audio is available when a movie is played To view movies in the front display stop the vehicle in a safe location move the selector lever to the P Park position and apply the parking brake SAA3607 DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC DVD SYS TEM COMPONENTS DVD drive The DVD slot is located on the instrument lower panel Insert a DVD into the slot with the label side facing up The DVD will be guided automatically into the slot When ejecting the DVD push the EJECT button a CAUTION e Do not force a DVD into the slot This could cause damage the player e Do not use 8 cm 3 1 in discs Displays WARNING Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake to view the images on the front center display screen using the DVD drive or other devices connected to the auxiliary input jacks CAUTION e The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material e Use s
500. tal restraint system section WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag and or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC warning light The light will blink when the VDC system or the traction control system Is operating thus alerting the driver that the vehicle is nearing Its traction limits The road surface may be slippery When the vehicle dynamic control warning light illuminates when the vehicle dynamic control system is turned on this light alerts the driver to the fact that the vehicle dynamic control system s fail safe mode is operating for example the vehicle dynamic control system may not be functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer If a malfunction occurs in the system the vehicle dynamic control system function will be canceled but the vehicle is still driveable For additional information see VE HICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM in the 5 Starting and driving section of this manual INDICATOR LIGHTS Continuously Variable Transmis sion CVT position indicator light When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position the indicator shows the automatic selector shift position See CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT
501. tandard Mode be used for the best recognition performance For the voice commands for the navigation system refer to the Navigation System Owner s Manual of your vehicle NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE The following section is applicable when the Standard Mode is activated The Standard Mode enables you to complete the desired operation by simply following the prompts that appear on the display and also are announced by the system 4 134 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings Others Language amp Units Image Viewer Adjust voice recognition settings SAA2529 Activating Standard Mode When the Alternate Command Mode is active perform the following steps to switch to the Standard Mode 1 Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel Select the Others key 3 Select the Voice Recognition key Settings Voice recognition Alternate Command Mode o on Minimize Voice Feedback Change the mode of voice recognition lt the mode of voice recognition SAA2530 4 Select the Alternate Command Mode key 5 The indicator turns off and the Standard Mode activates Displaying user guide If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system for the first time or you do not know how to operate it you can display the User Guide for confirmation You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guid
502. tant however wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet immediately wipe until it is com pletely dry Do not bend drop or strike it against another object Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in a place where temperatures ex ceed 140 F 60 C Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key Do not use a magnet key holder Do not place the Intelligent Key near an electric appliance such as a television set personal computer or cellular phone Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come into contact with water or salt water and do not wash it in a washing machine This could affect the system function If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key This will prevent the Intelligent Key from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure please con tact a NISSAN dealer Sy SPA2033 MECHANICAL KEY To remove the mechanical key release the lock knob at the back of the key To install the mechanical key firmly insert it into the key until the lock knob returns to the lock position Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors and glove box if they are equipped with a key cylinder See DOORS later in this section and STO RAGE in the 2 Instruments and controls section Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 3
503. td Adds or Edits the Bluetooth Phones and Audio Devices SAA2505 SAA2506 Connecting procedure 2 Select the Connect Bluetooth key 1 Push the SETTING button and select the Bluetooth key 4 80 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings Bluetooth Are you connecting a Bluetooth device to use with the handsfree phone system For audio devices please select No f Ce Ce eed SAA2507 3 A confirmation screen will be displayed Select No Note Selecting Yes will only connect the hands free phone portion of a Bluetooth device Settings Connect Bluetooth Delete Please input passke SAA3005 4 Choose a PIN code to use with the compatible Bluetooth audio device using the number input screen The PIN code will need to be entered into the Bluetooth audio device after step 5 Select the OK key Settings Connect Bluetooth Start connecting your Bluetooth Audio device The PIN is XXXX Please input passke SAA3006 5 The standby message screen will appear Operate the compatible Bluetooth audio device For the connecting procedure of the audio device see the Bluetooth audio instructions When the connecting is completed the screen will return to the Bluetooth setup display Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 81 Bluetooth Audio Artist XXXXXXXXXX Album
504. te most Radio Frequency RF devices such as garage doors gates home and office lighting entry door locks and security systems e ls powered by your vehicle s battery No separate batteries are required If the vehicle s battery is discharged or is dis connected HomeLink will retain all pro gramming Once HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed retain the original transmit ter for future programming procedures Example new vehicle purchases Upon sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes For additional information see PRO GRAMMING Hometink later in this sec tion WARNING e Do not use HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by 1996 have rolling code protection To pro federal safety standards These gram a garage door opener equipped with standards became effective for rolling code protection you will need to use opener models manufactured after a ladder to get up to the garage door opener April 1 1982 A garage door opener motor to be able to access the smart or learn z pene program button which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards Using a garage door opener without these features in creases the risk of serious i
505. tem from the list You can also set to display a message to remind you that the maintenance needs to be per formed The following example shows how to set the engine oil maintenance information Use the same steps to set the other maintenance information 4 10 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Information Engine Oil Interval C e000 mies D Reminder Reset Distance miles SAA2482 Models with navigation system Li Information gt Engine Oil E Reset Distance Cy au Interval OC tne A Reminder 6000 12000 18000 miles SAA31 41 Models without navigation system 1 Set the interval mileage of the maintenance schedule To determine the recommended maintenance interval refer to your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide 2 To display the reminder automatically when the desired distance is reached select the Reminder key 3 Reset the driving distance to the new maintenance schedule 4 To return to the previous screen push the BACK button The unit can be converted between US and Metric See HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON later in this section Engine Oil Maintenance due for Push INFO and select maintenance to change this setting SAA3003 Example The Reminder will be automatically displayed when the specified distance has been driven and every time the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON positi
506. terference in cluding interference that may cause un desired operation of the device Maintenance and do it yourself 8 23 LIGHTS Headlight high beam Front side marker light Map light Side turn signal light Rear personal light Front turn signal park light Front fog light if so equipped Headlight low beam 9 Step light 10 Cargo light 11 Rear side marker light 12 Stop tail light 13 High mounted stop light eo O o e Se N 14 Rear turn signal light 15 Back up light 16 License plate lights SDI2716 8 24 Maintenance and do it yourself HEADLIGHTS Halogen headlight model Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the The headlight is a semi sealed beam type which exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash A uses a replaceable headlight halogen bulb temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog This is not a malfunction If large drops of water collect A CAUTION inside the lens contact a NISSAN dealer lt Dancinicavcautha bab ot okihe Replacing headlight reflector for a long period of time Dust moisture smoke etc If replacement is required see a NISSAN dealer i entering the headlight body may Xenon headlight model affect bulb performance e High pressure halogen gas is sealed A WARNING inside the halogen bulb The bulb EEE may break if the glass envelope is N HIGH VOLTAGE scratched or the bulb is dropped Disconnect the battery neg
507. terior light control switch ecncsccecscsepeetvee ens 2 54 Interior light replacement eeeeeeee 8 26 Interior NOMS cscs oxeenz sce dee ceeruseeseeeneicedes 2 53 iPod player operation s0ceee08 4 64 4 84 ISOFIX child restraint caccveersitsesctcescuseveeey 1 29 J Jump SIAMING 222 0n02scccueesreieie rrarena 6 10 K Keyless entry See remote keyless entry system 3 20 KEYS ee E E e 3 2 For Intelligent Key system 3 2 3 12 L Labels Air bag warning labels 22 0000 1 59 Air conditioner specification label 9 10 Emission control information label 9 10 Engine serial NUMDED vc csccccwececwseederseeiexs 9 9 F M V S S C M V S S certification label 9 9 Tire and Loading information label 8 30 9 10 Vehicle identification number VIN 9 8 LATCH system ccvecudernctiwsthcesenereesereuned 1 29 License plate Installing front license plate 9 11 LAT Cale eicere E EE 3 25 Light Air bag warning light asise 1 59 Bulb replacement 0eeeee eee ee ees 8 24 Cargo lights 22 ccvetencsetessccsucssseasteeresees 2 56 Fog light SWieliccscr ceveuctccametieneneteepier 2 35 Headlight switch ve rccctewns ctauew sete eee 2 31 Headlights bulb replacement 8 25 Indicator lights susce 2 15 Interior light control switch s s s 2 54 Interior lights sisses 2 53 Map NOMS ereenn a E 2 53 Mood lights 2 55 Rep
508. tery area facing away from the Home Link surface e push and hold both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons without inter ruption e position the hand held transmitter 2 to 5 in 50 to 127 mm away from the HomeLink surface Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds If HomeLink is not programmed within that time try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times If you continue to have programming difficulties please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this Owner s Manual CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN FORMATION Individual buttons cannot be cleared however to clear all programming push and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 20 seconds REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE Home Link BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transcei ver button complete the following 1 Push and hold the desired HomeLink button Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed 2 When the indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the hand held transmitter 2 to 5 in 50 to 127 mm away from the HomeLink surface 3 Push and hold the hand held transmitter button 4 The HomeLink indicator light will flash first slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly rel
509. that of non studded snow tires Tire chains may be used For details see TIRE CHAINS in the 8 Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter e A scraper and stiff bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades e A sturdy flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support e A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow drifts e Extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE WARNING e Wet ice 32 F 0 C and freezing rain very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded e Whatever the condition drive with caution Accelerate and slow down with care If accelerating or down shifting too fast the drive wheels will lose even more traction e Allow more stopping distance under these conditions Braking should be started sooner than on dry pave ment e Allow greater following distances on slippery roads e Watch for slippery spots glare ice These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas If a patch of ice is seen ahead brake before reaching it Try not to brake while on the ice and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers e Do not
510. the MODE button to change the air flow mode The air outlet is fixed at foot level jw The air outlet is fixed at both the head and foot level The air outlet is fixed at the head level NOTE Pushing the A C button when the rear air conditioning system is turned on and REAR does not appear on the display will turn off the rear air conditioning system except when the air flow is set to the position e Rear Heating A C off 1 Push the REAR button to display REAR on the front display when the rear air conditioning system is on 2 Switch the air flow mode to wv by pressing the MODE button 3 Ifthe A C indicator light illuminates push the A C button The A C indicator light will turn off 4 Push the temperature control buttons A and W driver s side to set the desired temperature between the middle and the hot position e To dehumidify the air push the A C button before turning on the heater e Air does not blow out from the vents on the ceiling when the system is used for heating Turning the system off To turn off the rear air conditioner push the ON OFF button when REAR is on the display 4 34 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems SAA3674 OFF button s Fan speed control buttons Display MODE button TEMP buttons Rear control
511. the cable is stored properly WARNING Never jack up the vehicle before removing the spare tire from under the vehicle This may lead to an accident could result in serious personal injury Never get under the vehicle to remove the spare tire This may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury Always use the assembled tool to slide the spare tire from under the vehicle Do not move the vehicle with the spare tire cable lowered The cable could hit or become tangled with an object on the road Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury In case of emergency 6 5 Jacking up the vehicle and removing the Carefully read the caution label attached flat tire to the jack body and the following instruc tions WARNING e Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack If it is necessary to work under the vehicle support it with safety stands e Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles The jack is de signed for lifting only your vehicle Removing wheel cover if so equipped during a tire change e Use the correct jack up points A WARNING Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support Never use your hands to remove the wheel cover This may cause personal injury e Never jack up the vehicle more than n
512. the files were written by the writing software so the files might not play in the desired order desired order Random Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 53 Compressed Video Files models with Requirement for Supporting Video Play navigation system back Explanation of terms CD CD R CD RW DVD DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DL USB 2 0 Memory e DivX DivX refers to the DivX codec File Systems CD ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Romeo Joliet UDF Bridge owned by DivX Inc used for a lossy ey UDF1 02 ISO9660 UDF1 5 UDF2 0 compression of video based on MPEG 4 DVD i ISO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported e AVI AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave DVD R Files saved using the Live File System component on a Windows It is a standard file format originated by DVD RW Vista based computer are not supported Microsoft Corporation A divx encoded file DVD RW DL VDF1 5 VDF2 0 packet writing is not supported can be saved into the ave file format for USB Memory FAT16 FAT32 playback on this system if it meets the requirements stated in the table in this Eis nes ey wie gE odecs OINAS UVAS DIVAS BINAE section However not all the avi files are Audio Codecs MP3 MPEG2 5 Audio Layer3 AC3 LPCM playable on this system a ae ast Video Codec sid Codec SO MPEG4A o oe can be used than the Di
513. the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Instruments and controls 2 9 WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light Brake warning light Blind Spot Warning BSW system warning light orange Charge warning light Engine oil pressure warning light Hydraulic pump electric power steering warning light CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed apply the parking brake and push the ignition switch to the ON position without starting the engine The following lights will come on if so equipped EH sxe or PS Co 4 The following lights come on briefly and then go off if so equipped 2 10 Instruments and controls mi lt Intelligent Key system warning light Low tire pressure warning light Master warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Supplemental air bag warning light Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC warning light Continuously Variable Transmission CVT position indicator light Usee PRE Cruise indicator light eB a Aan 8 2 0 S g Ta If any light does not come on it may indicate a burned out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Some indicators and warnings are also dis played on the dot matrix crystal display on the speedometer See DOT MATRIX LIQUID B o 2 D Eol 3 o BS is J A ri Front passenger air bag status lig
514. the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased FRONT SEATS Front manual seat adjustment Forward and backward Pull the lever 1 up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Release the lever to lock the seat in position Reclining To recline the seatback pull the lever up and lean back To bring the seatback forward pull the lever up and lean your body forward Release the lever to lock the seatback in position SSS0792 The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit See PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission in the P Park position SSS0793 Seat lifter if so equipped Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 3 Front power seat adjustment Operating tips e The power seat motor has an auto reset overload protection circuit If the motor stops during operation wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch e Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off This will discharge the battery See AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER in the 3 Pre
515. this Owner s Manual DRINKING ALCOHOL DRUGS AND DRIVING WARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs Alcohol in the blood stream reduces coordination delays reaction time and impairs judgement Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others Additionally if you are injured in an accident alcohol can increase the se verity of the injury NISSAN is committed to safe driving However you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol Starting and driving 5 7 Remember drinking and driving don t mix And that is true for drugs too over the counter prescription and illegal drugs Don t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol drugs or some other physical condition 5 8 Starting and driving PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH WARNING Do not operate the push button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive times or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds If the engine stops while the vehicle is being d
516. tic operation when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position If the moonroof cannot be closed automatically when the auto reverse function activates due to a malfunction push and hold the moonroof switch to the close position Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs IF THE FRONT OR REAR MOONROOF DOES NOT OPERATE If the front or rear moonroof does not operate properly perform the following procedure to initialize the moonroof operation system Initiali zation can be performed for both the front moonroof and rear moonroof 1 If the moonroof is open close it fully by pushing and holding the moonroof switch to the close position until the moonroof tilts up 2 Release the moonroof switch then push and hold the side again for more than 10 seconds 3 Release the moonroof switch then continue to push on the side again The moonroof will operate in the close direction The moonroof operates inch by inch 4 After the moonroof stops moving release the moonroof switch and within 4 seconds push side again The moonroof will automatically open once 5 Within 0 5 seconds after the moonroof stops moving release the moonroof switch 6 Check that the moonroof now operates normally If the moonroof
517. tic vehicle compo nents causing them to crack This could affect their appearance and also could cause them not to func tion properly Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used e Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap strong chemical detergents gasoline or solvents e Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot as the surface may become water spotted e Avoid using tight napped or rough cloths such as washing mitts Care must be taken when removing caked on dirt or other foreign sub stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean water Inside flanges seams and folds on the doors hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt Therefore these areas must be regularly cleaned Make sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance Polishing is recommended to remove built up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before reapplying wax A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product e Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing Follow the instructi
518. ting CVT Continuously Variable Transmission 5 12 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 24 Sliding doors ssessessesrrrrrrrrrr serrr rrrrr rrn 3 6 SOURCE select switch os ccwavecoeevseneceveasdens 4 97 Spar 1G rcosencen nubs EE 8 37 9 7 Spark o 2 cee ee e ee ee eee 8 16 Speedometer irrin sirkesi r 2 5 Starting Before starting the engine 5 11 Jump starting isses 6 10 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 PUSH starting ccecccocreecceresmetecsuiieed sess 6 11 Starting the engine ccs visecwesecerceepceeectsns 5 12 STATUS button cecsscecteckiaantecantacsaceetnte ea 4 7 Status light Front passenger air bag 1 53 Steering Power steering fluid 0eeeeee ees 8 11 Steering wheel mounted controls for QUIN ean a ture sense ee sere eieec ees 4 96 Till telesCopic steering ecexevscweresevevidee ess 3 31 Iere Vo e ee ee Sun VISOTS sausnusnnenrrnrrrrrrrrrrrr rer rrrrr nre Sunglasses holder cc ccs c5 duces crew ssosereceeses Supplemental air bag warning labels Supplemental air bag warning light 1 59 Supplemental restraint SysteM 0e eee eee Precautions on supplemental restraint SYSTEMI lt ccavtueostonesedeebieerisesesecebeaneweda Switch Autolight switch esiseina Fog light switch a vere ctx teres corms eeateuess Hazard warning flasher switch Headlight aiming control
519. tion in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 47 Sit upright and well back S sSso132 back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steer ing wheel or instrument panel Al ways use the seat belts The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags Failure to properly wear seat belts can in crease the risk or severity of injury in an accident The front passenger seat is equipped with occupant classifica tion sensors weight sensors that turn the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions This sensor is only used in this seat Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could in crease the risk of injury if the front air bag inflates 1 48 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0007 SSS0006 WARNING e Never let children ride
520. tion switch in the ON position Do not start the engine Operation 1 Add air to the tire 2 Within a few seconds the hazard indicators will start flashing 3 When the designated pressure is reached the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing 4 Perform the above steps for each tire e lf the tire is over inflated to more than approximately 4 psi 80 kPa the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash 3 times To correct the pressure push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure When the pressure reaches the designated pressure the horn beeps once e lf the hazard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire it indicates that the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not operating Starting and driving 5 5 e The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill Tire Alert under the following conditions f there is interference from an external device or transmitter The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire There is a malfunction in the TPMS system There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators The identification code of the tire pres sure sensor is not registered to the system The battery of the tire pressure sensor Is low e If the Easy Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference move the vehicle about 1 m 3 ft backward or forward and try again
521. tires are replaced due to wear or age Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear there may be a need for wheel alignment If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds wheel balancing may be needed For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the War ranty Information Booklet Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility Windshield wiper blades Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis such as when performing scheduled maintenance cleaning the vehicle etc Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop see a NISSAN dealer immediately Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when app
522. to a collision Radio frequency statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 310 of Industry Canada Starting and driving 5 23 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful inter ference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Frequency of operation 24 05GHz 24 25GHz Field Strength Not greater than 2 5V m peak 0 25V m average at a distance of 3 m The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment Such modifica tions could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 5 24 Starting and driving CRUISE CONTROL PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON TROL If the cruise control system malfunctions it will cancel automatically The CRUISE in dicator light on the meter panel will then blink to warn the driver If the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high the cruise control system will cancel automatically If the CRUISE indicator light blinks turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer The CRUISE indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned ON while pushing the RESUME ACCELERATE SET COAST or CANCEL switch To prop erly set the cruise control system perform the following procedures WARNING Do
523. to or accidental activation of the pretensioners Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious perso nal injury e Work around and on the preten sioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of elec trical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer Un authorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system e If you need to dispose of a preten sioner or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Correct preten sioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of 1 58 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system collisions Working with the seat belt retractor it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions helping to restrain front seat occupants The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor and buckle anchor These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts When a pretensioner activates smoke is re leased and a loud noise may be heard The smoke is not harmful and it does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly After
524. to the ON position with the registered cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones in the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time The NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup ports the phone commands so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible For more details see NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM models with navigation system later in this section page 4 134 Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes e Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System e Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recom mended phone list e You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the telephone service area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio waves such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage behind a tall building or in a mountainous area Your cellular phone is locked in order not to be dialed When the radio wave reception is not good or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice during a call Immediate
525. tor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 35 SSS0657 Rear facing step 5 5 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt SSS0658 Rear facing step 6 After attaching the child restraint test it before you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 1 1 36 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system through 6 After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted the ALR mode child restraint mode is canceled FORWARD FACING CHILD RE STRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings a
526. troke in mm Displacement cu in cm Firing order Idle speed rom Ignition timing B T D C degree rpm Spark plug Standard Spark plug gap Normal in mm Camshaft operation VQ35DE Gasoline 4 cycle 6 cylinder V slanted at 60 3 760 x 3 205 95 5 x 81 4 213 45 3 498 1 2 3 4 5 6 No adjustment is necessary FXE22HR 1 1 0 043 1 1 Timing chain This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES 002 WHEELS AND TIRES Road wheel Type Offset in mm Steel 16 x 6 1 2JJ 1 97 50 16 x 7J 1 97 50 Aluminum 18 x 7J 2 17 55 T type 16 x 4T 1 18 30 Tire Tyoe Size Pressure PSI yP kPa Cold P225 65R16 99T Conventional 35 240 P235 55R18 99T T135 80D16 101M Tetype T135 90D16 102M 420 Technical and consumer information 9 7 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Overall length in mm Overall width in mm Overall height with acai out roof rack rail Overall height with cay roof rack rail oe Front tread in mm Rear tread in mm Wheelbase in mm Gross vehicle weight rating Ib kg Gross axle weight rating Front Ib kg Rear lb kg 200 8 5 100 1 201 2 5 110 2 77 6 1 970 71 5 1 815 73 0 1 855 68 1 1 7303 67 7 1 720 4 68 1 1 730 3 67 7 1 720 4 118 1 3 000 See the F M V S S or C M V S S cer tification label on the driver s side center pillar 1 Without front license plate bracket 2 With front license plate bracket
527. trol System ACCS Push and hold the air recirculation lt amp button or outside air circulation s gt button the one with the indicator light on for more than 2 seconds to set the automatic control between the air recirculation and outside air circulation modes The gt or aG gt indicator light will blink twice The following conditions need to be met for the automatic air intake control mode to function properly e The air flow control is not in the front defogger mode the indicator light on the front defroster 47 FRONT button is turned off e The outside temperature is approxi mately 32 F 0 C or above NOTE e Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature Doing so may prevent the temperature from being controlled properly e To dehumidify the air push the A C button before turning on the heater Dehumidified defrosting defogging 1 Push the front defroster gy FRONT button The indicator light will illuminate 2 Push the temperature control buttons A and W to set the desired temperature e To remove frost from the outside surface of the windshield quickly set the tem perature control and fan speed control to their maximum position e After the windshield is cleared push the AUTO button to set to the automatic mode e When the front defroster gg FRONT button is pushed the air conditioner w
528. trols right side Cruise control system if so equipped INSTRUMENT PANEL 11 Parking brake 12 Tilting telescopic steering wheel lever or switch 13 Front passenger air bag status light 14 Heated seat switch 15 Cup holders 16 Power outlet 17 Instrument lower box or CD DVD slot 18 Power outlet main switch 19 Audio system 20 Glove box if so equipped Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual if so equipped kk 1314 15 16 171814 19 20 SSI0824 Side ventilator Navigation system Meters and gauges 7 Center multi function control panel Push button ignition switch Navigation system Hazard warning flasher switch Vehicle information and setting buttons 8 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch 9 Center ventilator Selector lever Center display a Center color display 10 Heater air conditioner control or audio system D o Se es Instruments and controls 2 3 METERS AND GAUGES 2 4 on Se ees Instrument brightness control switch Tachometer Speedometer Fuel gauge Warning indicator lights Trip Computer switch Instruments and controls SIC4630 7 Dot matrix liquid crystal display Trip computer 8 Engine coolant temperature gauge 9 Odometer twin trip odometer Continuously Vari able Transmission CVT position indicator 10 TRIP RESET switch for twin trip odometer The needle indicators may move slightly after the ignit
529. u are sitting well back and upright in the seat The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate with great force Do not allow anyone to place their hand leg or face near the side air bags on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations When sitting in the rear seat do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat If the side air bags inflates you may be seriously injured Be especially careful with children who should always be properly re strained Some examples of danger ous riding positions are shown in the illustrations Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks They may interfere with side air bags inflation Crash zone sensor Supplemental front impact air bag modules NISSAN Advanced Air Bags Roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag inflators Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag modules 9 SSS1169 Roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bags Diagnosis sensor unit Seat belt pre tensioners Satellite sensors Occupant classification system control unit 10 Occupant classification sensors weight sensors Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 51 NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS TEM front se
530. uch firmware ver sion 2 1 e Second generation iPod touch firmware version 2 1 1 e First generation iPod nano firmware ver sion 1 3 1 e Second generation iPod nano firmware version 1 1 3 e Third generation iPod nano firmware ver sion 1 1 PC e Third generation iPhone firmware version 2 1 Make sure that the iPod version is updated Audio main operation Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position Then push the DISC AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing pushing the ON OFF button will start the iPod or play When the DISC AUX or AUX button is pushed with the system off and the iPod connected the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and the iPod is connected push the DISC AUX or AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the iPod mode Interface The interface for iPod operation shown on the vehicle center display is similar to the iPod interface Use the multi function controller and the ENTER or BACK button to play the iPod with your favorite settings The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen For further information about each item see the iPod Owner s Manual e Now Playing e Playlists e Artists e Albums e Songs e Podcasts e Genres e Composers e Audiobooks e Shuffle Songs The following touch panel buttons
531. ulb replacement P 8 26 Roof rack rail P 2 47 Recovery hook P 6 15 License plate installation P 9 11 Fog lights Switch operation P 2 35 Bulb replacement P 8 26 Headlight and turn signal lights Switch operation P 2 31 Bulb replacement P 8 25 Tires Wheel and tires P 8 29 P 9 7 Flat tire 6 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS P 2 12 P 5 3 Doors Keys P 3 2 Door locks P 3 4 Intelligent Key system P 3 12 Security system P 2 25 Child safety rear door lock P 3 8 Sliding doors P 3 6 if so equipped Illustrated table of contents 0 3 EXTERIOR REAR 8 Lift gate P 3 25 Remote keyless entry system P 3 20 Intelligent Key system P 3 12 if so equipped SSI0822 1 Antenna P 4 98 4 Rear window defroster P 2 30 Satellite radio antenna P 4 44 Fwelsillerdoor 2 Rear window wiper and washer Operation P 3 29 Switch operation P 2 29 Fuel recommendation P 9 3 Window washer fluid P 8 13 6 Rear combination light 3 High mounted stop light Bulb replacement P 8 26 Bulb replacement P 8 26 7 Rear view camera P 4 22 0 4 Illustrated table of contents PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TP oO ys Rear personal light P 2 53 Coat hooks P 2 48 6 Heater Air conditioner rear controller P 4 36 7 Mobile Entertainment System MES P 4 98 8 Door a
532. uminate if the seat belt is not 2 14 Instruments and controls fastened when the front passenger s seat is occupied For approximately 5 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger See SEAT BELTS in the 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section for precautions on seat belt usage Supplemental air bag warning light After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light will illuminate The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the supplemental front air bag and supplemental side air bag curtain side impact air bag systems and or pretensioner seat belt are operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag and pretensioner systems needs servicing and your vehicle must be taken to your nearest NISSAN dealer e The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds e The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently e The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Unless checked and repaired the Supplemental Restraint Systems air bag systems and or the pretensioners may not function properly For additional information see SUPPLEMEN TAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM in the 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemen
533. und will first occur only when the brake pedal is depressed After more wear of the brake pad the sound will always be heard even if the brake pedal is not depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY SIC4715 The dot matrix liquid crystal display is located in the speedometer and it displays the key operation information and other warn ings and information For the detail about the Intelligent Key System see INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM in the 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments section Instruments and controls 2 17 INDICATORS FOR OPERATION 1 Engine start operation indicator This indicator appears when the selector lever is in the P Park position This indicator means that the engine will start by 2 18 Instruments and controls BACK DOOR Ch open GA NEXT pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed You can start the engine directly in any position CHECK TIRE PRESSURE ALERT a F OUTSIDE SIC4716 2 NO KEY warning This warning appears in either of the following conditions No key inside the vehicle The warning appears when the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position Make sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Unregistered key The warning appears when the ignition switch is pushed
534. unoccupied the air bag status light will remain off If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system the supplemental air bag warning light located in the meter and gauges area will blink Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Other supplemental front impact air bag precautions WARNING e Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instru ment panel Also do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate e Do not place objects with sharp edges on the seat Also do not place heavy objects on the seat that will leave permanent impressions in the seat Such objects can damage Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system the seat or occupant classification sensors weight sensors This can affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious perso nal injury Do not use water or acidic cleaners hot steam cleaners on the seat This can damage the seat or occu pant classification sensors This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury Immediately after inflation several front air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may severely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag s
535. upant uses the seating position SSS0996 Install 1 Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure that the head restraint is facing the correct direction The stalk with the adjustment notches must be in stalled in the hole with the lock knob Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position 1 10 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0508 Front seat Active Head Restraint The Active Head Restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear end collision The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries Active Head Restraints are effective for colli sions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear end collisions After the collision the head restraints return to their original position Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described earlier in this section ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTS WARNING The adjustable headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end colli sions Adjust the headrests properly as specifi
536. use cruise control on slip pery roads e Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle ENGINE BLOCK HEATER if so equipped Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20 F 7 C or lower Starting and driving 5 33 To use the engine block heater 1 2 Turn the engine off Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3 wire 3 pronged extension cord Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 volt AC VAC outlet The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 4 hours depending on outside temperatures to properly warm the engine coolant Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on Before starting the engine unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts WARNING Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical sys tem or a 2 pronged adapter You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before 5 34 Starting and driving starting the engine Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury Use a heavy duty 3 w
537. ush the temperature control buttons to set the desired temperature Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the windows 1 Push the air flow control button to change to the 2 mode 2 Push the fan speed control amp buttons to set the desired fan speed 3 Push the temperature control buttons to set the desired temperature When the amp mode is selected the air conditioner will automatically turn on This will dehumidify the air and help to defog the windows The A C indicator light will illuminate when the air conditioner automatically turns on The air conditioner and A C indicator light will remain on in all flow control modes until the A C button is pressed Air conditioner operation The air conditioner system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month This helps prevent damage to the air conditioner system due to the lack of lubrication Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air 1 Push the outside air circulation aad button to switch to the outside air circulation mode The indicator light turns on 2 Push the air flow control button to change to the 7 4 mode 3 Push the fan speed control buttons to set the desired fan speed 4 Push the A C button on The A C indicator light will illuminate 5 Push the temperature control buttons to set the desired temperature between the middle and the cool position e For quick co
538. usible link holder Window washer fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir Radiator filler cap Engine oil dipstick Battery ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre diluted mixture of 50 Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue and 50 water to provide year round anti freeze and coolant protection The anti freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors Additional engine cooling system additives are not neces sary WARNING e Never remove the radiator or cool ant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Wait until the engine and radiator cool down Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator See precautions in IF YOUR VEHI CLE OVERHEATS in the 6 In case of emergency section of this man ual e The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap To pre vent engine damage use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap CAUTION e When adding or replacing coolant be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Cool ant blue or equivalent Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Cool ant blue is pre diluted to provide antifreeze protection to 34 F 37 C If additional freeze protec tion is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle add Gen uine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue concentrate follow ing the directions on the container If an equivalent coolant oth
539. ut Off ccceeeeeee eee 5 10 Intelligent Key battery discharge 205 5 11 Before starting the engine 2 eseeeeeeeeeeeee es 5 11 Starting TNS engine sccscenamanarsdecaaanenntiera tenn iai 5 12 Driving the vehiClo isicsicrisssorsniscsiniissinrraasnneiee 5 12 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 5 12 PARAO DORE eea N ESE E EAEN 5 16 Blind Spot Warning BSW system if so equipped cencaceseeacotensesiadecsaserseanesaneterenereletesecs 5 17 BSW system operation sssseeeeeee eee 5 18 BSW driving situations 5 20 BSW MalUNGHON sssatcencsectoncceasacesutensececouvesens 5 23 System MAINtENANCE cece eee eee eee e eee eeeee es 5 23 Se GONO rper erne een ne cee EE 5 24 Precautions on cruise control 00 eeeeee 5 24 Cruise control operations eeeeeee eee eee 5 25 Break in schedule ics ceciceseacoresensatunecdadaensocuemeadanies 5 26 Increasing fuel economy steccsccccsccectacetsewetaeeeassss 5 26 Parking parking on Hill Sicsessccnsevnsseawaverdeaeedeewernaws 5 27 Hydraulic pump electric power steering system 5 28 Brako SySlOMi ssc2 scene se csewtcensetkbeneinsseesemeecemeeabert 5 29 Braking precautions wiswscuwenccentwesednsdeccueeuieeseee 5 29 Parking brake break in cceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 5 29 Anti lock Braking System ABS 0c0eeees 5 29 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system 0685 5 31 Cold Weather livin isis tac
540. utomatic Recording When this item is turned on the Music Box hard drive flash memory automatically starts recording when a CD is inserted Delete Songs from Music Box Delete the current song selected songs or albums by choosing from the list or all songs albums in the Music Box Recording Quality Set the recording quality to 105 kbps or 132 kbps The default is set to 105 kbps models with navigation system Set the recording quality to 96 kbps 128 kbps or 192 kbps The default is set to 128 kbps models without navigation system CDDB Version models with navigation system Gracenote Database Version models without navigation system The version of the built in Gracenote Database is displayed Gracenote NOTE e The information contained in the Gracenote Database is not fully guar anteed e The service of the Gracenote Database on the Internet may be stopped without prior notice for maintenance gracenote End User License Agreement USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW Gracenote MusiclID Terms of Use This application or device contains software from Gracenote Inc of Emeryville California Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Software enables this appli cation to perform disc and or file identification and obtain music related information including name artist track and title information Grace note Data from online
541. utside mirror defroster switch Center display See Center color display P 4 2 P Illustrated table of contents 0 7 METERS AND GAUGES 10 TRIP RESET switch for twin trip odometer P 2 5 SIC4630 1 Instrument brightness control switch P 2 34 7 Dot matrix liquid crystal display P 2 17 2 Tachometer P 2 6 Trip computer P 2 35 3 Speedometer P 2 5 8 Engine coolant temperature gauge P 2 6 4 Fuel gauge P 2 7 9 Odometer twin trip odometer P 2 5 Continu 5 Warning indicator lights P 2 10 sae eters Transmission CVT position indi 6 Trip computer switch P 2 21 l 0 8 Illustrated table of contents ENGINE COMPARTMENT VQ35DE ENGINE 1 2 3 4 5 Air cleaner P 8 17 Power steering fluid reservoir P 8 11 Drive belt location P 8 15 Engine oil filler cap P 8 8 Brake fluid reservoir P 8 12 N ae Ee 2 Ke E b ae at 77 yf a gt ane a en Y F a ln Fuse fusible link holder P 8 20 Window washer fluid reservoir P 8 13 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 7 Radiator filler cap P 8 7 0 Engine oil dipstick P 8 8 1 Battery P 8 13 oe ee ee Illustrated table of contents 0 9 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning Warning Indicator ec Supplemental air bag warning 9 14 Turn signal hazard indicator 9 16 Anti lock Braking System aD lights ABS warning light Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC 2 14 e oe 2 16
542. v O TE G796 Eo ee ee Format It is a file format owned by Microsoft P Corporation Note Only asf files that meet Resolution divx avi 32 x 32 the requirements stated in the table in this Ce ae x 480 section can be played asf 82x 320 e Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of 720 x 576 bits per second used by a digital video file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file 4 54 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Bluetooth Audio player models with navigation system Some Bluetooth audio devices may not be recognized by the in vehicle audio system It is necessary to set up the wireless connection between a compatible Blue tooth audio device and the in vehicle Bluetooth module before using the Blue tooth audio player Operating procedure of the Bluetooth audio player will vary depending on the device Make sure you understand how to operate an audio device before using it with this system The Bluetooth audio player may be stopped under the following conditions Receiving a hands free call Checking the connection to the hands free phone Do not place a Bluetooth audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle Bluetooth module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless con nection disruption While an audio device is conne
543. vail able cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle Before driving a loaded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle See MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS later in this section Also check tires for proper inflation pres sures See the Tire and Loading Information label 9 14 Technical and consumer information SIC4732 SECURING THE LOAD There are tie down hooks located in the cargo area as shown The tie down hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps Do not apply a total load of more than 7 Ib 3 kg to a single hook when securing cargo WARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or collision unse cured cargo could cause personal injury The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area Secure any items in the cargo area Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could occur or it can change the way your vehicle han dles This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury LOADING TIPS The GVW mu
544. val WARNING e After rotating the tires check and adjust the tire pressure e Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc e Do not include the spare tire or any other small size spare tire in the tire rotation e For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Cana da in the Warranty Information Booklet 8 36 Maintenance and do it yourself 1 2 Wear indicator location mark by Lo A Wear indicator SDI1663 Tire wear and damage WARNING Tires should be periodically in spected for wear cracking bul ging or objects caught in the tread If excessive wear cracks bulging or deep cuts are found the tire s should be replaced The original tires have built in tread wear indicators When wear indicators are visible the tire s should be replaced e Tires degrade with age and use Have tires including the spare over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury e Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious perso nal injury If it is necessary to repair the spare tire contact a NISSAN dealer e For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Inform
545. vehicle s interior is warmed or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn off the switch Instruments and controls 2 37 BLIND SPOT WARNING BSW SWITCH if so equipped The Blind Spot Warning BSW switch will turn on and off the Blind Spot Warning BSW system The BSW system will illuminate the Blind Spot Warning BSW indicator lights in the outside mirrors when the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone If the turn signal is activated in the direction of the detected vehicle a chime sounds twice and the BSW indicator light will flash Gee BLIND SPOT WARNING BSW SYSTEM in the 5 Starting and driving section The BSW switch is automatically turned on when the engine is started and the BSW ON indicator 1 on the switch illuminates 2 38 Instruments and controls To cancel the warning systems push the BSW switch to turn off the system The BSW ON indicator will turn off NOTE If you continue to push the warning systems switch from off to on for over 4 seconds a chime will sound This will change the default status of the BSW system to OFF so that this system will not automatically turn on when the engine is started If this procedure is repeated the default status will return to ON VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC OFF SWITCH J ee SSD1149 The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system on for most driving conditions If the veh
546. voice commandS ses2secivecaseseteecnetary neds 4 127 Speaker Adaptation SA mode 60008 4 131 Troubleshooting guide 2 seeeeeeeeeee ees 4 133 NISSAN Voice Recognition System models with navigation system ssseseeeeeee ees 4 134 NISSAN voice recognition Standard Mode 4 134 Using ihe SyStEM tesa trices nare nn 4 136 NISSAN voice recognition Alternate Command MOE oo ste ea sete ATN 4 146 Using the system eceteceeteusepepnenitecdedensesacee 4 152 Troubleshooting guide ssssssssrrsrsessssrsesss 4 157 CENTER MULTI FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL if so equipped SAFETY NOTE WARNING e Do not disassemble or modify this system If you do it may result in accidents fire or electric shock e Donot use this system if you notice any abnormality such as a frozen screen or lack of sound Continued use of the system may result in accident fire or electric shock e In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware spill liquid on it or notice smoke or smell SAA3612 coming from it stop using the _ Models with navigation system system immediately and contact 1 DISP display setting button P 4 12 your nearest NISSAN dealer Ignor f oe navigation system control buttons Refer to the ing such conditions may lead to separate Navigation System Owner s Manual accidents fire or electric shock 3 Multi function controller P 4 4 e Park the vehicle in a safe loc
547. void sharp turns or lane changes Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed Some states or provinces have specific speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers Obey the local speed limits When backing up hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go Make small corrections and back up slowly If possible have someone guide you when you are backing up Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking Parking on a slope is not recommended however if you must do so CAUTION If you move the shift selector lever to the P Park position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake transmission damage could oc 9 22 Technical and consumer information 4 D 6 cur Apply and hold the brake pedal Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels After the wheel blocks are in place slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load Apply the parking brake Shift the transmission into P Park Turn off the engine To drive away h P Apply and hold the brake pedal Start the engine Shift the transmission into gear Release the parking brake Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks Apply and hold the brake pedal Have someone retrieve and store the blocks When going down a hill shift int
548. w seat To connect the buckle 1 Pull out the connector tongue from the retractor base 1 2 Pull out the seat belt tongue from the retractor base 2 3 Pull the seat belt and secure the connector buckle until it clicks The center seat belt connector tongue and buckle are indicated by the W and A mark The center seat belt connector tongue can be attached only into the 3rd row center seat belt connector buckle To fasten the seat belt see Fastening the seat belts earlier in this section WARNING e When attaching the 3rd row center seat belt connector be certain that the seatbacks are completely se cured in the latched position and the 3rd row center seat belt con Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 23 nector is completely secured If the 3rd row center seat belt connector and the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position serious personal injury may result in an accident or sudden stop SSS0351A Shoulder belt height adjustment if so equipped The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you See PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE earlier in this section To adjust pull the adjustment button 4 and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position so that the belt passes over the center of the shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off of your shoulder Releas
549. will flash twice and then the intake air will be controlled auto matically The following conditions need to be met for the automatic air intake control mode to function properly e The air flow control is not in the front defogger mode the indicator light on the front defroster amp y FRONT button is turned off e The outside temperature is approximately 0 C 82 F or above Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 39 lon S8QUICK ka CLEAN f Sal SAA3670 Advanced climate control system if so equipped The advanced climate control system keeps the air inside of the vehicle clean using the ion control and the automatic air intake control with exhaust gas detecting sensor Push the a AUTO auto recirculation button the indicator light on the q AUTO auto recirculation button will illuminate to activate the ion control and the automatic air intake control lon control This unit generates highly concentrated Plas macluster ions into the air blown from the ventilators and reduces odor absorbed into the interior trim When the air conditioner is turned on the system generates Plasmacluster ions automati Cally The high density Plasmacluster ions generated in the air conditioner s air stream not only suppress airborne bacteria and reduce the adherence of odors to the interior trim but also have a proven skin moisture preserving e
550. witch remains in the pa or gD position after the lights automatically turn off the lights will turn on when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position CAUTION e When you turn on the headlight switch again after the lights auto matically turn off the lights will not turn off automatically Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time other wise the battery will be discharged e Never leave the light switch on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time even if the headlights turn off automatically SIC2275 Headlight aiming control if so equipped Depending on the number of occupants in the vehicle and the load it is carrying the headlight axis may be higher than desired If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road the headlights may directly hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle The light axis can be lowered with the operation of the switch The larger the number designated on the switch the lower the axis When traveling with no heavy load or on a flat road select position O Instruments and controls 2 33 WARNING Xenon headlights if so equipped are extremely bright compared to conven tional headlights If the xenon head lights hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of oncoming vehicle the driver of these vehicles may have difficulty
551. with the system off and the USB memory inserted the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and a USB memory is inserted push the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 77 Operation keys To operate the USB memory select the desired key displayed on the operation screen using the multi function controller ul Pause Select the u key to pause the movie file To resume playing the movie file select the gt key gt Play Select the P key to start playing a movie file for example after pausing a movie file stop Select the mi key to stop playing a movie file gt Skip Next chapter Select the key to skip the chapter s of the file forward The chapters will advance the number of times the ENTER button is pushed aa Skip Previous chapter Select the 1 lt key to skip the chapter s of the file backward The chapters will go back the number of times the 1 lt key is selected List Select the List key on the movie file operation screen to display the file list 4 78 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems Audio File Play Back Play Mode 10Key Search SAA2504 Example Settings Select the Settings key to adjust
552. xtanneeesevadaceessmiadiaces 4 29 Rear VENUS ONS cc asoteranaseterskeecaes atastieceadyeaxans 4 29 Heater and air conditioner c eeeeeee renee ees 4 29 Operating TDS caesersncisncceaninidsieeameinnecmappiaanes 4 30 Manual air conditioner i e 4 31 Automatic air conditioner 2 eeceeeeee sees 4 36 Servicing air Conditioner eceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 42 N Cab in MIChONMEN essiens i 4 43 PO SY SUC ania EA EARE ERRENA 4 43 Audio operation precautions s sesesererercccn 4 43 FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD GWANOED seeds cccieesteretacsutiensiaseeeesecciecumtepssecene 4 56 FM AM radio with Compact Disc CD player 4 61 FM AM SAT radio with Compact Disc CD Fl Ly E A E A T 4 67 DVD Digital Versatile Disc player operation if so equipped oe csicccce ncnwascsaatonneecdecencisnancceetan 4 71 USB memory operation if so equipped 4 75 Bluetooth streaming audio models with navigation system eceeeeeeeees 4 79 iPod player operation if so equipped 4 84 Music Box if So Equipped ececeeeeeeeeees 4 86 Auxiliary input jacks if so equipped 66 4 93 CD DVD USB memory care and cleaning 4 95 Steering wheel mounted controls for audio if SO eg ipped aersccetecacenneaceonnswencooncestnen deeds 4 96 PEC Re PERETE N E ern ceciescseeese 4 98 NISSAN Mobile Entertainment System MES if so equipped cciiccccicntncmonadddcathoondener
553. xtremely high or low the screen may not clearly display objects This is not a malfunction When strong light directly enters the cam era objects may not be displayed clearly This is not a malfunction Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper This is not a malfunction The screen may flicker under fluorescent light This is not a malfunction The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark place or at night This is not a malfunction If dirt rain or snow attaches to the camera the RearView Monitor may not clearly dis play objects Clean the camera Do not use alcohol benzine or thinner to clean the camera This will cause discolora tion To clean the camera wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected Do not use wax on the camera window Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water 4 28 Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems VENTILATORS SAA351 1 Center CENTER VENTILATORS Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by moving the center knob up down left right until the desired position is achieved HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
554. y 2 Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part Use a cloth to protect the casing 8 22 Maintenance and do it yourself 3 Replace the battery with a new one Recommended battery CR2025 or equivalent Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction Hold the battery by the edges Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity Make sure that the side faces the bottom case SDI1889 4 Align the tips of the upper and lower parts and then push them together until it is securely closed 5 Operate the buttons to check its operation See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance for replacement FCC Notice For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any in
555. y 26 0 MPG Distance to Empty If the Fuel Eco History or View key is Fuel Eco History selected the average fuel consumption history will be displayed in graph form along with the average for the previous Reset to Reset period 20 10 a The unit can be converted between US and SAA2479 SAA2720 Metric See HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON later in this section The fuel economy information may differ from the information displayed on the dot matrix liquid crystal display This is due to the timing e Be Aue ed eee difference in updating the information and does not indicate a malfunction For models without the navigation system the information can also be displayed by pushing the jh ECON button on the control panel Reset Interval Latest SAA2480 SAA2721 Models with navigation system Models without navigation system Monitor heater air conditioner audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 9 Information Maintenance 5 BACK p soe Wie es alized Cy Oil Filter Other Reminder miles SAA2481 Models with navigation system i Information gt Maintenance 0 18000 2 Engine Oil JE Oil Filter E Tire JE Other Reminder ee pf ms Models without navigation system SAA2830 Maintenance information The maintenance intervals can be displayed for the engine oil oil filter tire and other reminders To set a maintenance interval select a preferred i
556. y is explo sive Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin eyes fabrics or painted surfaces After touching a battery or battery cap do not touch or rub your eyes Thoroughly wash your hands If the acid contacts your eyes skin or clothing immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat reduce battery life and in some cases lead to an explosion Maintenance and do it yourself 8 13 e When working on or near a battery always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling e Keep the battery out of the reach of children 8 14 Maintenance and do it yourself DIO137MA Check the fluid level in each cell Remove the battery cover if it is necessary It should be between the UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL lines If it is necessary to add fluid add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening Do not overfill SDI1480C 1 Remove the cell plugs A 2 Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL 4 line If the side of the battery is not clear check the distilled water level by looking directly above the cell the condition 4 indicates OK and the conditions 2 needs more
557. y put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight Check that all the wheel nuts contact the wheel surface horizontally With the wheel nut wrench tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence as illustrated 0 more In case of emergency than 2 times until they are tight Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground Then with the wheel nut wrench tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated Lower the vehicle completely Securely store the flat tire jack and tools in the vehicle WARNING e Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off This could cause an accident e Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts This could cause the nuts to become loose e Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc e As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 80 ft lb 108 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times It is recommended that wheel nuts be tigh tened to specifications at each lubrica tion interval e Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure COLD pressure After the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km COLD tire pressure
558. you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic Instruments and controls 2 35 e Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch in any position Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving MODELS WITH AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM When an impact that could activate the supple mental air bags is detected the hazard warning flasher lights blink automatically If the hazard warning flasher switch is pushed the hazard warning flashers will turn off WARNING Do not turn the hazard warning flasher switch to off until you can make sure that it is safe to do so Also the hazard flasher warning may not blink automa tically depending on the force of im pact 2 36 Instruments and controls HORN SIC3586 To sound the horn push the pad area A of the steering wheel WARNING Do not disassemble the horn Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury HEATED SEATS if so equipped WARNING Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat tempera tures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat Use of the seat heater by such people could result in se
559. ystem This is to prevent accidental infla tion of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system suspension system or front end structure This could affect proper operation of the front air bag sys 1 55 tem Tampering with the air bag system may result in serious personal in jury Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instru ment panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim ma terial around the air bag system Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury For exam ple do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim ma terial such as seat covers on the seat that is not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation Additionally do not stow any ob jects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensors No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system This may affect the front air bag system Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal in jury e Work on and around the front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Install

9 - Nissan

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents